please consult your owner's handbook & warranty...

Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for your vehicle's spe-cific warranty coverage.

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 6. As the owner, it is yourresponsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out atthe appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent main-tenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditionsare also included in Section 6.

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

OWNER'S MANUAL

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so thatour policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions andexplanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, youmay find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehi-cle.

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limitedwarranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-lished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possiblefor an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronicsystems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you chooseto install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

✽✽ NOTICEThis indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNING This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or otherpersons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTIONThis indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if thecaution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who driveHyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're veryproud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai deal-er. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man-ual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

Copyright 2006 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrievalsystem or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.

CAUTIONSevere engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundaispecifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-3 in theVehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appear in the Service Station Information on the backcover of the Owner's Manual.

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the sameparts used by Hyundai MotorCompany to manufacture vehicles.They are designed and tested for theoptimum safety, performance, and reli-ability to our customers.

2.Why should you use genuine parts?Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-neered and built to meet rigid manu-facturing requirements. Using imita-tion, counterfeit or used salvage partsis not covered under the Hyundai NewVehicle Limited Warranty or any otherHyundai warranty.

In addition, any damage to or failure ofHyundai Genuine Parts caused by theinstallation or failure of an imitation,counterfeit or used salvage part is notcovered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchas-ing Hyundai Genuine Parts? Look for the Hyundai Genuine PartsLogo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported tothe United States are packaged withlabels written only in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only soldthrough authorized HyundaiDealerships.

To find the closest authorizeddealer call 1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Consumer information

Specifications

Index

table of contents

1How to use this manual / 1-2Fuel requirements / 1-2Vehicle break-in process / 1-3Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / 1-4

Introduction

Introduction

21

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from your vehi-cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist youin many ways. We strongly recommendthat you read the entire manual. In orderto minimize the chance of death or injury,you must read the WARNING and CAU-TION sections spread throughout themanual.Illustrations complement the words in thismanual to best explain how to enjoy yourvehicle. By reading your manual, youlearn about features, important safetyinformation, and driving tips under vari-ous road conditions.The general layout of the manual is pro-vided in the Table of Contents. A goodplace to start is the index; it has an alpha-betical listing of all information in yourmanual.Sections: This manual has eight sectionsplus an index. Each section begins with abrief list of contents so you can tell at aglance if that section has the informationyou want.

You’ll find various WARNING’s,CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s informationin this manual. These were prepared toenhance your personal safety.You shouldcarefully read and follow ALL proceduresand recommendations provided in theseWARNING’s, CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s.

✽✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates interesting or help-ful information is being provided.

Use Unleaded GasolineUnleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number91) or higher must be used in yourHyundai.For improved vehicle performance, pre-mium unleaded fuel with an PumpOctane Rating of 91 (Research OctaneNumber 95) or higher is recommended.

What About Gasohol?Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleadedgasoline and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol)may be used in your Hyundai. However, ifyour engine develops driveability prob-lems, the use of 100% unleaded gasolineis recommended. Fuels with unspecifiedquantities of alcohol, or alcohols otherthan ethanol, should not be used.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates a situation inwhich harm, serious bodily injury ordeath could result if the warning isignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situation inwhich damage to your vehicle couldresult if the caution is ignored.

CAUTION• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off whenrefueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks, oth-erwise the " " light will illumi-nate.

• Always check that the fuel cap isinstalled securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an acci-dent.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

1 3

Introduction

Use of MTBEHyundai recommends that fuels contain-ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%weight) should not be used in yourHyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) mayreduce vehicle performance and producevapor lock or hard starting.

Do Not Use MethanolFuels containing methanol (wood alco-hol) should not be used in your Hyundai.This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-formance and damage components ofthe fuel system.

Gasolines for Cleaner AirTo help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundairecommends that you use gasolinestreated with detergent additives, whichhelp prevent deposit formation in theengine. These gasolines will help theengine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission ControlSystem.

Operation in Foreign CountriesIf you are going to drive your Hyundai inanother country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding reg-istration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-able.

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000Km)No formal "break-in" procedure isrequired with your new Hyundai.However, you can contribute to the eco-nomical operation and durability of yourHyundai by observing the following rec-ommendations during the first 1,200miles (2,000 km).

• Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88km/h).

• While driving, keep your engine speed(rpm, or revolutions per minute)between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

• Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the acceleratorpedal fully.

• For the first 200 miles (300 km), try toavoid hard stops.

• Whether going fast or slow, vary yourspeed from time to time.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3minutes at one time.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200miles (2,000 km) of operation.

CAUTIONYour Hyundai's New Vehicle LimitedWarranty may not cover damage tothe fuel system and any perform-ance problems that are caused bythe use of fuels containingmethanol or fuels containing MTBE(Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%weight.)

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

Introduction

41

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped withmany high technology, electronically con-trolled systems that help to ensure yourvehicle operates properly and providesthe performance that you expect. Thesesystems utilize computers to monitor theoperation of various systems and com-ponents and help to control their opera-tion. These computerized system opera-tions are wide-ranging and involve com-ponents to reduce emissions, to continu-ously evaluate the readiness of theairbag and seat belt pretensioner sys-tems, to determine when the airbag andseat belt pre-tensioner systems shouldbe deployed and then to activate thedeployment, and if equipped, to operateanti-lock braking, traction control andelectrical stability control to assist thedriver to control the vehicle in difficultdriving situations. These systems elec-tronically store information that is usefulto service technicians when they need todiagnose and repair these systems.

Additional information is stored onlywhen a crash occurs that results in thedeployment of the airbags or seat beltpre-tensioners. This type of data storageis done by devices called event datarecorders(EDR).

After a crash event, the airbag and seatbelt pre-tensioner computer system,known as the Supplemental RestraintSystem Control Module (SRSCM) orAirbag Control Unit (ACU), may recordsome information about the condition ofthe vehicle and how it was being operat-ed. This information consists of datarelated to seat belt usage and if therewas diagnostic information in the airbagor seat belt systems at the time that acrash occurred, and if the ACU sensedthat a crash of sufficient severityoccurred to require seat belt pre-tension-er or airbag deployment.

To retrieve this information, specialequipment is needed and access to thevehicle or the device that stores the datais required. Hyundai will not accessinformation about a crash event or shareit with others except:

• in response to an official request ofpolice or similar government office, or

• with the consent of the vehicle owneror, if the vehicle is leased, with the con-sent of the lessee, or

• as part of Hyundai’s defense of litiga-tion, or

• as required by law.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

2Interior overview / 2-2Instrument panel overview / 2-3



22

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

OVQ026001N

1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-13

2. Driver position memory system*.......3-56

3. Seat adjust knob*..............................3-40

4. Outside rearview mirror control switch .............................................3-105

5. Power rear quarter window switches*...........................................3-26

6. Power window switches ....................3-26

7. Central door lock switch....................3-13

8. Power window lock switch.................3-28

9. Fuel filler lid release button...............3-30

10. Instrument panel illumination........3-112

11. Room light main control switch.....3-125

12. Power adjustable pedal control switch*.............................................3-58

13. Steering wheel tilt .........................3-103

14. Parking brake release lever ............4-19

15. Fuse box .........................................6-27

16. Hood release lever .........................3-29

17. Parking brake pedal ........................4-19

18. Brake pedal.....................................4-17

19. Accelerator pedal..............................4-6

20. Seat.................................................3-37

* : if equipped

2 3


INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Driver’s air bag ...............................3-792. Light control / Turn signals ...........3-1293. Instrument cluster.........................3-1094. Wiper/Washer...............................3-1325. Auto cruise controls* ......................4-146. Audio controls* .............................3-1817. Steering wheel .............................3-1028. Ignition switch...................................4-59. Digital clock ..................................3-18010. Climate control system* .............3-13811. Hazard warning flasher switch ...3-13712. Seat warmer* ...............................3-4513. Shift lever .......................................4-714. Cigar lighter* ..............................3-17515. Power outlet................................3-17916. Ashtray* ......................................3-17517. Passenger’s air bag......................3-7918. Storage compartment.................3-17119. Vent controls...............................3-14220. Glove box ...................................3-17321. Sunglass holder .........................3-17422. Sunvisor .....................................3-17823. Power sliding door and power

tailgate controls*...........................3-1724. Sunroof* .......................................3-3325. Conversation mirror....................3-10826. Trip computer* ............................3-11327. Day/night rearview mirror ...........3-107* : if equipped

OVQ026002N

3

Keys / 3-3Remote keyless entry / 3-4Theft-alarm system / 3-7Immobilizer system / 3-9Door locks / 3-11Power sliding door and power tailgate / 3-17

Window / 3-26Hood / 3-29Fuel filler lid / 3-30Sunroof / 3-33Seat / 3-37Driver position memory system / 3-56Power adjustable pedals / 3-58Seat belts / 3-59Child restraint system / 3-71Air bags-advanced restraint system / 3-78Steering wheel / 3-102Mirrors / 3-104Instrument cluster / 3-109Gauges / 3-110Trip computer / 3-113Warnings and indicators / 3-119


Interior lights / 3-125Lighting / 3-128

Wipers and washers / 3-132Horn / 3-135

Defroster / 3-136

Hazard warning flasher / 3-137Manual climate control system / 3-138

Automatic climate control system / 3-149Windshield defrosting and defogging / 3-162

Luggage net holder / 3-165Roof rack / 3-166

Homelink® wireless control system / 3-167Storage compartments / 3-171

Interior features / 3-175Antenna / 3-180

Audio remote control / 3-181Audio system / 3-182

Rear seat entertainment system / DVD player / 3-212

Features of your vehicle3

3 3


The key code number is stamped on theplate attached to the key set. Should youlose your keys, this number will enablean authorized Hyundai Dealer to dupli-cate the keys easily. Remove the plateand store it in a safe place. Also, recordthe code number and keep it in a safeand handy place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operationsMaster keyUsed to start the engine, lock and unlockthe doors, lock and unlock the glove boxand center console storage (if equipped).

KEYS

WARNING• NEVER leave the ignition key in

the vehicle.• NEVER leave any child unattend-

ed in the vehicle. Even veryyoung children may inadvertentlycause the vehicle to move, entan-gle themselves in the windows, orotherwise injure themselves orothers.

1VQA2001

WARNINGUse only Hyundai original parts forthe ignition key in your vehicle. Ifan aftermarket key is used, the igni-tion switch may not return to ONafter START. If this happens, thestarter will continue to operatecausing damage to the startermotor and possible fire due toexcessive current in the wiring.


43

(1) Lock ( )All doors are locked if the lock buttonis pressed.If all doors and engine hood areclosed, the hazard warning lightsblink once to indicate that all doorsare locked. However, if any door orengine hood remains open, the haz-ard warning lights are not operated.After this, if all door and engine hoodare closed, the hazard warning lightsblink.

(2) Unlock ( ) Driver's door is unlocked if the unlockbutton is pressed once.The hazard warning lights will blinktwice to indicate that the driver's dooris unlocked.All doors are unlocked if the unlockbutton is pressed twice within 3 sec-onds.The hazard warning lights will blinktwice again to indicate that all doorsare unlocked.After depressing this button, thedoors will be locked automaticallyunless you open any door within 30seconds.

(3) Power tailgate opening or closing( , if equipped)The tailgate is opened or closedautomatically if the button is pressed.The hazard warning lights will blinkand the chime will sound 3 times toindicate that the tailgate will swingupward or downward.

(4) Left power sliding door opening orclosing ( , if equipped)The left sliding door is opened orclosed automatically if the button ispressed.

(5) Right power sliding door opening orclosing ( , if equipped)The right sliding door is opened orclosed automatically if the button ispressed.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2002B

1VQA2002A

1VQA2002

Type B

Type A

Type C

3 5


✽✽ NOTICEThe power sliding door and power tail-gate are not opened by pressing the cor-responding button on the transmitterdirectly when all power sliding doorsand power tailgate are locked andclosed. To open the power sliding dooror power tailgate from outside vehicle,press the unlock button first and presscorresponding power sliding door orpower tailgate opening button.

(6) Alarm ( )The horn sounds and hazard warninglights flash for about 27 seconds ifthis button is pressed. To stop thehorn and lights, press any button onthe transmitter.

✽✽ NOTICEThe transmitter will not work if any offollowing occur:• The ignition key is in ignition switch.• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.• The weather is extremely cold.• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not workcorrectly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problemwith the transmitter, contact an author-ized Hyundai Dealer.

Operational distance may vary depend-ing upon the area the transmitter is usedin. For example, if the vehicle is parkednear police stations, government andpublic offices, broadcasting stations, mil-itary installations, airports, or transmit-ting towers, etc.

CAUTIONThe power doors can be operatedwhen the engine is not running.However, the power doors consumelarge amounts of vehicle electricpower. To prevent the battery frombeing discharged, do not operatethem consecutively (more thanapproximately 10 times).

CAUTIONKeep the transmitter away fromwater or any liquid. If the keylessentry system is inoperative due toexposure to water or liquids, it willnot be covered by your manufactur-er vehicle warranty.


63

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC rules. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and 2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

Battery replacementTransmitter uses a 3 volt lithium batterywhich will normally last for several years.When replacement is necessary, use thefollowing procedure.1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-

tly pry open the transmitter centercover (1).

2. Replace the battery with new one.When replacing the battery, make surethe battery positive “+” symbol facesup as indicated in the illustration.

3. Install the battery in the reverse orderof removal.

For replacement transmitters, see anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer for repro-gramming.

1VQA2003

CAUTIONChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

CAUTIONThe keyless entry system transmit-ter is designed to give you years oftrouble-free use, however it canmalfunction if exposed to moistureor static electricity. If you areunsure how to use your transmitteror replace the battery, contact anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION• Using the wrong battery can

cause the transmitter to malfunc-tion. Be sure to use the correctbattery.

• To avoid damaging the transmit-ter, don't drop it, get it wet, orexpose it to heat or sunlight.

3 7


This system is designed to provide pro-tection from unauthorized entry into thecar. This system is operated in threestages: the first is the "Armed" stage, thesecond is the "Theft-alarm" stage, andthe third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audiblealarm with blinking of the hazard warninglights.

Armed stagePark the car and stop the engine. Armthe system as described below.1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-

tion switch.2. Make sure that all doors, the engine

hood and tailgate are closed andlatched.

3. Lock the doors using the transmitter ofthe keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, thehazard warning lights will blink once toindicate that the system is armed.

If any door, tailgate or engine hoodremains open, the hazard warning lightswon’t operate and theft-alarm will notarm. After this, if all doors, tailgate andengine hood are closed, the hazardwarning lights blink once.The system can be armed by locking thedoors with the key from the front doors ortailgate. However, the hazard warninglights are not operated.

• If any door, tailgate or engine hoodremains open, the system will notbe armed. If this happens, re-armthe system as described previously.

• Do not arm the system until all pas-sengers have left the vehicle. If thesystem is armed while a passen-ger(s) remains in the vehicle, thealarm may be activated when theremaining passenger(s) leaves thevehicle. If any door, tailgate orengine hood is opened within 30seconds after entering the armedstage, the system is disarmed.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armedstage

Theft-alarmstage

Disarmedstage


83

Theft-alarm stageThe alarm will be activated if any of thefollowing occurs while the system isarmed.• A front or rear door is opened without

using the ignition key or transmitter.• The tailgate is opened without using

the ignition key or transmitter.• The engine hood is opened.The siren will sound and the hazardwarning lights will blink continuously for27 seconds, and repeat the alarm 3times unless the system is disarmed. Toturn off the system, unlock the doors withthe ignition key or transmitter.

✽✽ NOTICEAvoid trying to start the engine whilethe alarm is activated. The vehicle start-ing motor is disabled during the theft-alarm stage.

Disarmed stageThe system will be disarmed when thedoors are unlocked by depressing theunlock button on the transmitter orunlocked with the ignition key.After depressing unlock button, the haz-ard warning lights will blink twice to indi-cate that the system is disarmed.After depressing unlock button, if anydoor is not opened within 30 seconds,the system will be rearmed.If the system is not disarmed with theignition key or transmitter, insert the keyin the ignition switch, turn the key to theON position and wait for 30 seconds.Then the system will be disarmed.

3 9


Your vehicle is equipped with an elec-tronic engine immobilizer system toreduce the risk of unauthorized vehicleuse.Your immobilizer system is comprised ofa small transponder in the ignition key,and antenna coil in the key cylinder andImmobilizer Control Unit (or SmartraUnit).With this system, whenever you insertyour ignition key into the ignition switchand turn it to ON, the antenna coil in theignition switch receives a signal from thetransponder in the ignition key and thensends the signal to the ECU (EngineControl Unit).The ECU checks the signal whether theignition key is valid.If the key is determined to be valid, theengine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid, theengine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizersystem:Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-der and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer sys-tem:Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.The immobilizer system activates auto-matically. Without a valid ignition key foryour vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not use thekey with other immobilizer keys in closeproximity to your vehicle’s ignitionswitch, otherwise the engine may notstart or may stop soon after it starts.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you need additional keys or lose yourkeys, consult your authorized Hyundaidealer.

Limp home (override) procedureWhen you turn the ignition key to the ONposition, if the immobilizer indicator( ) goes off after blinking 5 times,your transponder equipped in the ignitionkey is out of order. You cannot start theengine without the lime home procedure.To start the engine, you have to inputyour password by using the ignitionswitch.The following procedure is how to inputyour password of “2345” as an example.1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

The immobilizer indicator ( ) willblink 5 times and go off indicating thebeginning of the limp home procedure.

2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC posi-tion.

3. To enter the first digit (in this example“2”), turn the ignition key to the ON andACC position twice. Perform the sameprocedure for the next digits between 3seconds and 10 seconds (for example,for “3”, turn the ignition ON and ACC 3times).

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)


103

4. If all of the digits have been input suc-cessfully, you have to start the enginewithin 30 seconds. If you attempt tostart the engine after 30 seconds, theengine will not start and you will haveto input your password again.

After performing the limp home proce-dure, you have to see an authorizedHyundai dealer immediately to inspectand repair your ignition key or immobiliz-er system.




CAUTIONThe transponder in your ignitionkey is an important part of theimmobilizer system. It is designedto give years of trouble-free service,however you should avoid expo-sure to moisture, static electricityand rough handling.

CAUTIONDo not change, alter or adjust theimmobilizer system because itcould cause the immobilizer sys-tem to malfunction. The systemshould only be serviced by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.Malfunctions caused by improperalterations, adjustments or modifi-cations to the immobilizer systemare not covered by your vehiclemanufacturer warranty.

CAUTIONChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operatethe equipment.

3 11


Operating door locks from out-side the vehicle • Turn the key toward rear of vehicle to

unlock and toward front of vehicle tolock.

• Turn the key toward front of vehicle tolock all doors.

• From the driver’s door, turn the key tothe right once to unlock the driver’sdoor and to the right twice within 3 sec-onds to unlock all doors.

• From the passenger’s door, turn thekey to the left once to unlock the pas-senger’s door and to the left twice with-in 3 seconds to unlock all doors.

• Doors can also be locked andunlocked with the transmitter key (ifequipped).

• Once the doors are unlocked, they maybe opened by pulling the door handle.

• To close the door, push the door byhand. Make sure that doors are closedsecurely.

• Once the rear doors are unlocked, theymay be opened by pulling the doorhandle and sliding the door towardsthe rear of the vehicle.

• When the rear door is fully open, thedoor will lock into an open position. Toclose the door, pull out the door handleand slide the door towards the front ofvehicle.

• If the window on the rear sliding door isopen (more than 3 in./80 mm), the rearsliding door will not open fully, but willopen to the 3/4 position.

DOOR LOCKS

1VQA2004

LockUnlock

Front doors

1VQA2005

Rear sliding doors

WARNINGIn cold and wet climates, door lockand door mechanisms may notwork properly due to freezing con-ditions. Be sure that all the doorsare securely closed before drivingthe vehicle.

WARNINGDoors should be kept locked andthe keys should be kept out of thereach of children. Never let childrenplay in or around an unattendedvehicle. Even very young childrenmay inadvertently cause the vehicleto move or entangle themselves inthe windows. Parents must teachtheir children about the dangers ofplaying in unattended vehicles.


123

To lock a door without the key, push theinside door lock button (1) or door lockswitch (2) to the “Lock” position and closethe door (3).

✽✽ NOTICEIf the door is locked/unlocked multipletimes in rapid succession with either thevehicle key or door lock switch, the sys-tem may stop operating temporarily inorder to protect the circuit and preventdamage to system components.

WARNINGWhen the rear sliding door is notfully open, it is not latched and maymove unintentionally. This couldresult in a serious injury.

OVQ036001N

1VQA2327

Front door

Rear door

CAUTIONThe left sliding door cannot beopened when the fuel filler lid isopen. However, if the fuel filler lid isopened after the door is openedslightly, the left sliding door can beslide rearward. Close the left slidingdoor to prevent possible damage tothe door or the fuel filler lid.

WARNINGAlways remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

3 13


Operating door locks from insidethe vehicleWith the door lock button• To unlock a door, pull the door lock but-

ton (1) to the “Unlock” position. If thedoor is unlocked, the red part (2) of thebutton becomes visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the dooris locked, red part (2) of the button isnot visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle(3).

• If the inner door handle of the frontdoor is pulled when the door lock but-ton is in lock position, the button isunlocked and door opens. (if equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if theignition key is in the ignition switch anddoor is open.

With central door lock switchThe central door locking switch is locatedon the front door arm rest. It is operatedby depressing the door lock switch. If anydoor is open when the switch isdepressed (1), the door will remainlocked when closed.

1VQA2007

1VQA2008

Front door

Rear door

Lock Unlock

Lock Unlock

WARNING - Door lock mal-function

If a power door lock ever fails tofunction while you are in the vehi-cle, try one or more of the followingtechniques to exit:• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic andmanual) while simultaneouslypulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks andhandles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use thekey to unlock the door from out-side.

OVQ026021N

Driver’s door


143

• When pushing down on the front por-tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doorswill lock.

• When pushing down on the rear por-tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doorswill unlock.

• However, if the key is in the ignitionswitch and any front door is open, thedoors will not lock when the front por-tion of central door lock switch ispressed.

1VQA2012

Passenger’s door

WARNING - Unlockedvehicles

Always remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

• NEVER leave any child or animalunattended in the vehicle. Evenvery young children may inadver-tently cause the vehicle to move,entangle themselves in the win-dows, or otherwise injure them-selves or others.

• An enclosed vehicle can becomeextremely hot, causing death orsevere injury to unattended chil-dren or animals who cannotescape the vehicle.

WARNING - Doors• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi-cle is in motion to prevent acci-dental opening of the door.

• Be careful when opening doorsand watch for vehicles, motorcy-cles, bicycles or pedestriansapproaching the vehicle in thepath of the door. Opening a doorwhen something is approachingcan cause damage or injury.

3 15


Child-protector rear door lockThe child safety lock is provided to helpprevent children from accidentally open-ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.The rear door safety locks should beused whenever children are in the vehi-cle.1. Open the rear door.2. Push the child safety lock located on

the front edge of the door to the “Lock”position. When the child safety lock isin the “Lock ( )” position, the reardoor will not open when the inner doorhandle is pulled inside the vehicle orthe sub control button of the powersliding door is pressed.

3. Close the rear door.To open the rear door, pull the outsidedoor handle or push the main control but-ton of the power sliding door.Even though the doors may be unlocked,the rear door will not open by pulling theinner door handle or pushing the subcontrol button until rear door child safetylock is unlocked ( ).

TailgateOpening the tailgate• Tailgate is locked or unlocked with a

key.• If you lock the tailgate with a key, all

doors will lock automatically.• If you unlock the tailgate with a key,

only the tailgate will unlock.• To open the tailgate, insert the key into

the lock, turn it to the unlock positionand pull up the tailgate by pressing thehandle.You can also lock/unlock the latch (butnot release it) with the central door locksystem.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be openedby pressing the handle and pulling itup.

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

If children accidentally open therear doors while the vehicle is inmotion, they could fall out and beseverely injured or killed.To preventchildren from opening the reardoors from the inside, the rear doorseat locks should be used whenev-er children are in the vehicle.

1VQA2013

Lock Unlock

OEP036009


163

Closing the tailgateTo close the tailgate, lower and pushdown the tailgate firmly. Make sure thatthe tailgate is securely latched.

1VQA2010

WARNING - TailgateThe tailgate swings upward. Makesure no objects or people are nearthe rear of the vehicle when open-ing the tailgate.

CAUTIONMake certain that you close the tail-gate before driving your vehicle.Possible damage may occur to thetailgate lift cylinders and attachinghardware if the tailgate is notclosed prior to driving.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

The tailgate should always be keptcompletely closed while the vehicleis in motion. If it is left open or ajar,poisonous exhaust gases mayenter the car resulting in serious ill-ness or death to the occupants. Seeadditional warnings concerningexhaust gases on page 4-2.

WARNING - Rear cargoarea

Occupants should never ride in therear cargo area where no restraintsare available. To avoid injury in theevent of an accident or suddenstops, occupants should always beproperly restrained.

WARNINGIn cold and wet climates, door lockand door mechanisms may notwork properly due to freezing con-ditions. Be sure that all the doorsare securely closed before drivingthe vehicle.

3 17


(1) Left power sliding door main controlbutton

(2) Right power sliding door main controlbutton

(3) Power tailgate main control button*(4) Power ON/OFF button(5) Left power sliding door sub control

button(6) Right power sliding door sub control

button(7) Power tailgate sub control button*

*: if equipped

The power sliding doors and power tail-gate can be opened and closed automat-ically with the transmitter key, the maincontrol buttons on the overhead consoleor the sub control buttons on the centerpillar trim.When the power ON/OFF button (PWR)is OFF (not depressed), the power slid-ing door and power tailgate can beopened and closed manually by pullingthe door handles from inside or outsidevehicle.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the power sliding door or power tail-gate is open approximately 6 hours, theECU will enter a “sleep” (energy con-serving) mode to conserve batterypower. The door or tailgate will not closeautomatically in this mode. Close thedoor or tailgate manually and thenoperate the door or tailgate with thepower operating system.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, power slidingdoors and tailgate may not work prop-erly due to freezing conditions.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the sliding doors are opened man-ually (power OFF), more effort will berequired to open and close the doorsthan on models not equipped withpower sliding doors.

POWER SLIDING DOOR AND POWER TAILGATE (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2014

OVQ036002N

1VQA2016

On the center pillar trim

On the tailgate

On the overhead console

WARNINGNever leave children or animalsunattended in your vehicle.Children or animals might operatethe power sliding door or powertailgate that could result in injury tothemselves or others or damage tothe vehicle.


183

✽✽ NOTICE• The power sliding door and power

tailgate can be operated when theengine is not running. However thepower operation consumes largeamounts of vehicle electric power. Toprevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not operate them exces-sively e.g.: more than approximately10 times repeatedly.

• To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the power slid-ing door and power tailgate in theopen position for a long lime.

• Do not apply excessive force whileoperating the power sliding door orpower tailgate. This could cause dam-age to the power sliding door or powertailgate.

• Do not modify or repair any part ofthe power sliding door or power tail-gate by yourself. This must be done byan authorized Hyundai dealer.

• When jacking up the vehicle tochange a tire or repair the vehicle, donot operate the power sliding door orpower tailgate. This could damage thepower sliding door or power tailgate.

Automatic stop and reversalIf the path of the power sliding door ortailgate is blocked during operation, thepower sliding door and power tailgate willdetect the resistance, a chime will sound3 times, and the door or tailgate will stopor move to the full open position to allowthe path to be cleared.However, if the resistance is weak (suchas an object that is thin or soft) or thedoor is in a near latched position, theautomatic stop and reversal feature maynot detect the resistance and the closingoperation will continue. Also, if the powersliding door or power tailgate is forced bya strong impact, the automatic stop andreversal feature may operate.If the automatic stop and reversal featureoperates continuously more than twiceduring one opening or closing operation,the power sliding door or power tailgatemay stop at that position. At this time,close the doors manually and operatethe door automatically again.

1VQA2346

1VQA2347

3 19


How to reset the power sliding doorand power tailgateIf the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the related fuse has beenreplaced or disconnected, and the powersliding door or power tailgate doesn'twork properly, the power sliding door andpower tailgate must be reset as follows:1. Put the shift lever in the P (Park) for

automatic transaxle.2. Close the sliding door's windows and

fuel filler lid.

3. Pull the SHUNT connector on the dri-ver's side fuse panel and reinstall itafter 1 minute.

4. Close the sliding door or tailgate man-ually.

5. Open the sliding door or tailgate com-pletely using the transmitter or maincontrol button on the overhead con-sole.

6. Close the sliding door or tailgate com-pletely using the transmitter or maincontrol button on the overhead con-sole.

For the left/right power sliding doors andpower tailgate, follow above steps toreset.If the power sliding door or power tailgatedoesn't work properly after above proce-dure, have the system checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the shunt connector is pulled up fromthe fuse panel, the warning chime,audio, clock and interior lamps, etc., willnot operate. Some items must be resetafter replacement. (Refer to “Items to bereset···.” on page 6-36)

WARNING• Never intentionally place any

object or part of your body in thepath of the power sliding door orpower tailgate.

• Make sure rear passengers areseated and there are no people orobjects near the door beforeoperating the power sliding door.

• Make sure all faces, arms, hands,body parts and any other obstruc-tions are safely out of the waybefore operating the power slid-ing doors or power tailgate.

• Never place any object or part ofyour body in the path of thepower sliding door or power tail-gate. This could result in seriousinjury or cause damage to thevehicle.

• Make sure there are no people orobjects around the door beforeoperating the power sliding dooror power tailgate. Have rear pas-sengers get in or out of the vehi-cle after the door is opened com-pletely and door motion hasstopped.

1VQA4005

On the driver’s side fuse panel


203

Power ON/OFF button• When the power ON/OFF button

(PWR) is ON (depressed), the powersliding door and power tailgate can becontrolled with the sub control buttonson the center pillar trim or tailgate.Also, the doors can be opened andclosed automatically by pulling theinside or outside door handles.

• When the power ON/OFF button(PWR) is OFF (not depressed), thepower sliding door and power tailgatecan not be controlled with the sub con-trol buttons or door handles. However,the doors can be controlled with thetransmitter or the main control buttonson the overhead console even thoughthe power ON/OFF button (PWR) isOFF (not depressed).Also, the doors can be opened andclosed manually by pulling the inside oroutside door handles.

✽✽ NOTICEClose the sliding door and tailgate, andkeep the power ON/OFF button (PWR)in the OFF (not depressed) positionbefore washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the sliding doors are opened man-ually (power OFF), more effort will berequired to open and close the doorsthan on models not equipped withpower sliding doors.

1VQA2017

WARNING• Keep the power ON/OFF button

(PWR) in the OFF (not depressed)position when not in use.

• Do not allow children to play withthe power sliding door or powertailgate. Keep the power ON/OFFbutton (PWR) in the OFF (notdepressed) position when not inuse. Serious injury or death canresult from unintentional poweroperation by child.

3 21


Power sliding door operation• Push the corresponding main control

button on the overhead console toopen or close the power sliding door.The power sliding door will not openwith the transmitter or the main controlbutton when all power sliding doorsand power taligate are locked andclosed.

• When the power ON/OFF button(PWR) is ON (depressed), do as fol-lows to open or close the power slidingdoors:- Push the corresponding sub control

button on the center pillar trim.- Pull the door handle from inside or

outside vehicle.- If the sub control button is pushed

while the door is locked or child safe-ty lock is engaged, the chime soundsonce, and the power sliding door willnot open.

- If the door handle is pulled frominside or outside while the door islocked or child safety lock isengaged, the power sliding door willnot open. However, the power slidingdoor can be opened by pulling theoutside door handle while the door isunlocked and child safety lock isengaged.

• When the power ON/OFF button(PWR) is OFF (not depressed), thepower sliding door can not be con-trolled with the sub control buttons ordoor handles, and if the sub controlbutton is pushed, chime sounds once.However, the doors can be openedand closed manually by pulling thedoor handles from inside or outsidevehicle.

• On a steep grade, the power slidingdoor will slide faster when closing. Andchime may sound and the drive unitmotor may operate additionally for amoment after the door is closed.This isa normal operation to ensure doorclosing, not a malfunction.

1VQA2018


OVQ036003N

On the center pillar trim


223

OEP036004

WARNINGIf your vehicle is facing downwardon a steep grade (15 percent ormore), the door may not stay openand could slam shut, possibly injur-ing someone. To make sure thedoor does not slam shut, turn onthe power sliding door feature.Then when the door closes, it willclose under the control of thepower door system.

WARNINGIf children accidentally open thesliding doors while the vehicle is inmotion, they could fall out and beseverely injured or killed.To preventchildren from opening the slidingdoors from the inside, the child seatlocks should be used wheneverchildren are in the vehicle.

WARNINGWhen the rear passenger operatesthe power sliding door, make surethere are no people or objectsaround the door, and have all occu-pants get in or out of the vehicleafter the door is opened completelyand door motion has stopped.

WARNING• Rear passengers should get in or

out of the vehicle only after thedoor is completely opened.Sudden closing could cause aserious injury.

• Close the door by pulling thedoor handle after the door is com-pletely opened. Do not pull thedoor handle while rear passen-gers are getting in or out. Thedoor could suddenly close byitself and cause a serious injury.

• Sudden starting or acceleratingthe vehicle while the door is clos-ing could cause it to open result-ing in a serious injury or damageto cargo.

3 23


• If the window on the power sliding dooris open (more than 3 in./80 mm), thepower sliding door will not power openfully but will open to the 3/4 positionand the chime will sound 3 times. Toclose the door, use the transmitter ormain control button with the powerON/OFF button in OFF position (notdepressed), or sub control button ordoor handle with the power ON/OFFbutton in ON position (depressed).

• The left power sliding door cannot beopened while the fuel filler lid is openfully. If the main or sub control button ispushed, the chime sounds once. Also,if the fuel filler lid open button ispushed while the left power slidingdoor is opening, the chime soundsonce.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the fuel filler lid is opened when theleft sliding door is not closed completely,the door may be opened. Close the leftsliding door before refueling to preventpossible damage to the door or the fuelfiller lid.

• If the power sliding door is not closedand latched completely after powerclosing operation, the chime sounds 3times. Open and close the door again.

• If the power sliding door is operatedwhile the door is in partially openedposition (less than 12 in./300 mm), thedoor is automatically opened fully.

• If the power sliding door is operatedwhile the door is in half-opened posi-tion (more than 12 in./300 mm), thedoor is automatically closed complete-ly.

• If the power sliding door is operatedagain while the door is closing, thedoor is automatically opened fully.

• If the power sliding door is operatedagain while the door is opening, thedoor is automatically closed complete-ly. However, If the power sliding door isoperated again when the door is in par-tially opened position (less than 12in./300 mm), the door is opened con-tinuously.

• The half-opened power sliding door isautomatically opened or closed fully bypushing the door forward or backwardwithout pulling the door handle whilethe power ON/OFF button is in ON(depressed). However, when the dooris in a partially opened position (lessthan 12 in./300 mm), the door will notclose automatically.

WARNINGDo not leave the power sliding doorin a partially opened position. Closethe window and then open the doorfully. A partially opened door is heldand then released after 10 minutes.The chime sounds 3 times to indi-cate the door is released. If thevehicle is stopped on a downwardslope, it may move and cause aninjury.


243

Power sliding door non-opening condi-tionsWhen the ignition switch is in the ONposition, the power sliding door will onlyautomatically close under the followingconditions:1.Vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h).2. The gearshift lever is not in P (Park) for

automatic transaxle.Under theses conditions, if the main orsub control buttons are pushed when thepower sliding door is closed, the chimewill sound.

Power tailgate operation (if equipped)• Push the power tailgate main control

button on the overhead console toopen or close the power tailgate. Thepower tailgate will not open with thetransmitter or the main control buttonwhen all power sliding doors andpower tailgate are locked and closed.

• When the power tailgate is operatedwith the main or sub control button ortransmitter, the chime sounds and haz-ard warning lights flash 3 times.

• When the power ON/OFF button(PWR) is ON (depressed), do as fol-lows to open or close the power tail-gate:- Push the sub control button on the

bottom of the tailgate to close thepower tailgate automatically.

- Press and pull up the tailgate handleslightly to open the power tailgateautomatically when the tailgate isunlocked.

1VQA2019


1VQA2016A

On the tailgate

WARNINGDo not open the sliding doors whilethe vehicle is in motion. Passengersor cargo may be ejected from thevehicle, possibly resulting in prop-erty damage, severe injury, ordeath.

3 25


• When the power ON/OFF button(PWR) is OFF (not depressed), thepower tailgate cannot be controlledwith the sub control buttons or tailgatehandle, and if the sub control button ispushed, the chime sounds once.The tailgate may be opened manuallyby pulling the exterior handle and liftingthe tailgate upward. The tailgate maybe manually closed by pushing the tail-gate downward.

• If the power tailgate is not closed andlatched completely after power closingoperation, the chime sounds 3 times.

• If the power tailgate is operated whilethe tailgate is in partially opened posi-tion (less than 20 degrees), the tailgateis automatically opened fully.If the power tailgate is operated whilethe tailgate is in half-opened position(more than 20 degrees), the tailgate isautomatically closed completely.

• If the power tailgate is operated againwhile the tailgate is closing, the tailgateis automatically opened fully.

• If the power tailgate is operated againwhile the tailgate is opening, the tail-gate is automatically closed complete-ly. However, if the power tailgate buttonis pressed again when the tailgate isopen less than 20 degrees, the tailgatewill continue to open.

Power tailgate non-opening condi-tionsWhen the ignition switch is in the ONposition, the power tailgate will only auto-matically close under the following condi-tions:1.Vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h).2. The gearshift lever is not in P (Park) for

automatic transaxle.Under theses conditions, if the main orsub control buttons are pushed when thepower tailgate is closed, the chime willsound.

WARNINGEven though the power ON/OFFbutton (PWR) is in the OFF (notdepressed) position, the tailgatewill still be propelled upward bymechanical force if the tailgate ismanually opened more than 20degrees beyond the fully closedposition. In addition, if the tailgateis manually closed to the secondarylatch position, the tailgate will beelectrically moved to the fullylatched position. Make sure thatface, arms, hands, and otherobstructions are safely out of theway before operating the tailgate.

WARNINGMake sure there are no people orobjects around the tailgate beforeoperating the power tailgate. Waituntil the tailgate is open fully andstopped before loading or unload-ing cargo or passengers from thevehicle.

WARNINGMake sure the tailgate is closedfirmly before driving. If the tailgateis open, you will draw dangerousexhaust fumes into your vehiclewhich can cause serious injury ordeath to vehicle occupants.


263

Power windows (1) Driver’s door power window switch(2) Front passenger’s door power win-

dow switch(3) Rear door (left) power window switch(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch(5) Power rear quarter window (left)

switch*(6) Power rear quarter window (right)

switch*(7) Power window lock switch(8) Window opening and closing(9) Automatic power window down

(Driver’s window)

*: if equipped

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, power win-dows may not work properly due tofreezing conditions.

WINDOWS

OVQ036005N

3 27


The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to operate.Each door has a power window switchthat controls that door’s window.The driv-er has a power window lock switch whichcan block the operation of passengerwindows.The power windows can be operated forapproximately 30 seconds after the igni-tion key is removed or turned to the ACCor LOCK position. However, if the frontdoors are opened, the power windowscannot be operated within the 30 sec-onds after the ignition key removal.While driving, if you notice wind buffetingor pulsation (wind shock) with either sidewindow open, you should open the oppo-site window slightly to reduce the condi-tion.

Window opening and closingThe driver’s door has a master powerwindow switch that controls all the win-dows in the vehicle.• To open or close a window, press down

(8) or pull up (8) the front portion of thecorresponding switch.

• To open or close a rear quarter win-dow, push (8) the correspondingswitch.

(Continued)• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door andthe individual door windowswitch in opposing directions atthe same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot beopened or closed.

WARNING - Windows• Passengers can be injured if their

head, hands or other body partsare trapped by a closing window.Always check for obstructionsbefore raising any window.

• NEVER leave the ignition key inthe vehicle.

• NEVER leave any child unattend-ed in the vehicle. Even veryyoung children may inadvertentlycause the vehicle to move, entan-gle themselves in the windows, orotherwise injure themselves orothers.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not attempt to operate the

main switch on the driver's doorand a switch on another door inopposing directions at the sametime. If this is done, the windowwill stop and cannot be opened orclosed.

• Do not allow children to play withthe power windows. Keep the dri-ver’s door power window lockswitch in the LOCK position(depressed). Serious injury canresult from unintentional windowoperation by the child.

• Do not extend head, hands orarms outside through the windowopening while driving.

CAUTION• To prevent the power window

system from the possibility ofdamage, do not open or close twowindows at the same time. Thiswill also ensure the longevity ofthe fuse.

(Continued)


283

Automatic power window down (driver’s window)Depressing the power window switchmomentarily to the second detent posi-tion (9) completely lowers the driver’swindow even when the switch isreleased. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, pull up the switch momentarilyto the opposite direction of the windowmovement.If the power window is not operating cor-rectly, the automatic power window sys-tem can be reset as follows:1. Turn the ignition key to ON position.2. Close driver’s window and continue

pulling up on driver’s power windowswitch for at least 1 second after thewindow is completely closed.

Power window lock switch • The driver can disable the power win-

dow switches on a passenger door orrear quarter trim by depressing thepower window lock switch located onthe driver’s door to LOCK (pressed).

• When the power window lock switchis ON, the driver’s master controlcannot operate the passenger doorpower windows or rear quarter win-dows either.

Manual flip - open (rear quarterwindows, if equipped)To open the quarter windows, pull therear portion of the latch out. Swing thelatch forward and out, then lock it into theopen position by pushing outward untilyou hear a click. To close the windows,pull the handle inward. Then push thehandle rearward until you hear a click.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, rear quarterpanel windows may not work properlydue to freezing conditions.

1VQA2024OVQ026023N

3 29


Opening the hood 1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

hood. The hood should pop openslightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise thehood slightly, pull the secondary latchrelease lever (1) inside of the hoodcenter and lift (2) the hood.

3. Raise the hood. It will raise completelyby itself after it has been raised abouthalfway.

Closing the hood1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-

lowing:• All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed.• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removedfrom the engine compartment.

2. Lower the hood halfway and pushdown to securely lock in place.

HOOD

WARNING - Hood• Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are removedfrom the hood opening. Closingthe hood with an obstructionpresent in the hood opening mayresult in property damage orsevere personal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or anyother combustible material in theengine compartment. Doing somay cause a heat-induced fire.

1VQA2028 1VQA2029 WARNING Make sure the hood is properlylocked before driving.


303

1. Stop the engine.2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the

release button located on the driver’slower door.

3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank

cap counterclockwise.5. Refuel as needed.6. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap issecurely tightened.

7. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-ly and make sure that it is securelyclosed.

FUEL FILLER LID

1VQA2025 1VQA2026

WARNING To avoid injury from sharp edges, itis recommended that protectivegloves be worn if there is a need toopen the fuel filler door manually.

WARNING - Refueling• Always remove the fuel cap care-

fully and slowly. If the cap is vent-ing fuel or if you hear a hissingsound, wait until the conditionstops before completely remov-ing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the nozzleautomatically shuts off whenrefueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks, oth-erwise the " " light will illumi-nate.

• Always check that the fuel cap isinstalled securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an acci-dent.

3 31


WARNING - Refueling dan-gers

Automotive fuels are flammablematerials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines care-fully. Failure to follow these guide-lines may result in severe personalinjury, severe burns or death by fireor explosion.• Before refueling note the location

of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas stationfacility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,you should eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching another metalpart of the vehicle, a safe distanceaway from the fuel filler neck, noz-zle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuelingsince you can generate staticelectricity by touching, rubbing orsliding against any item or fabric(polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)capable of producing static elec-tricity. Static electricity dischargecan ignite fuel vapors resulting inrapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you shouldonce again eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching a metal partof the vehicle, away from the fuelfiller neck, nozzle or other gaso-line source.

• When using an approved portablefuel container be sure to place thecontainer on the ground prior torefueling. Static electricity dis-charge from the container canignite fuel vapors causing a fire.Once refueling has begun, con-tact with the vehicle should bemaintained until the filling is com-plete.

(Continued)

(Continued)Use only approved portable plas-tic fuel containers designed tocarry and store gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phones whilerefueling. Electric current and/orelectronic interference from cellu-lar phones can potentially ignitefuel vapors causing a fire.

• When refueling, always shut theengine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components related tothe engine can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refueling iscomplete, check to make sure thefiller cap and filler door aresecurely closed, before startingthe engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighterand DO NOT SMOKE or leave a litcigarette in your vehicle while at agas station especially duringrefueling. Automotive fuel is high-ly flammable and can, when ignit-ed, result in fire.

(Continued)


323

When fuel filler lid does not openwith the release buttonIf the fuel filler lid does not open usingthe remote fuel filler lid release, you canopen it manually. Unsnap and remove thepanel in the cargo area. Pull the handleoutward.

(Continued)• If a fire breaks out during refuel-

ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-cle, and immediately contact themanager of the gas station andthen contact the local fire depart-ment or 911. Follow any seatinstructions they provide.

CAUTION• Make sure to refuel with unleaded

fuel only.• Check to make sure the fuel filler

cap is securely closed after refu-eling. A loose fuel filler cap maycause the "Check Engine"(Malfunction Indicator) light in theinstrument panel to illuminateunnecessarily.

• If the fuel filler cap requiresreplacement, use only a genuineHyundai cap or the equivalentspecified for your vehicle. Anincorrect fuel filler cap can resultin a malfunction of the fuel sys-tem or emission control system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Any typeof fuel spilled on painted surfacesmay damage the paint.

• If the fuel filler lid will not open incold weather because the areaaround it is frozen, push or lightlytap the lid.

OVQ036007N

3 33


(1) Slide button(2) Tilt button(3) Close buttonIf your vehicle is equipped with this fea-ture, you can slide or tilt your sunroofwith the sunroof control buttons locatedon the overhead console.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, the sunroofmay not work properly due to freezingconditions.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in theON position.The sunroof can be operated for approx-imately 30 seconds after the ignition keyis removed or turned to the ACC orLOCK position. However, if the front dooris opened, the sunroof cannot be operat-ed even within the 30 seconds after theignition key is removed or turned to theACC or LOCK position.

✽✽ NOTICEThe sunroof cannot slide when it is inthe tilt position nor can it be tilted whilein an open or sliding position.

Sliding the sunroof

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2030

1VQA2031

1VQA2032

CAUTIONDo not continue to press the sun-roof control button(s) after the sun-roof is in the fully open, closed, ortilt position(s). Damage to the motoror system components could occur.


343

OpenAutoslideTo use the autoslide feature, momentari-ly (less than 0.4 second) press the slidebutton on the overhead console.The sunroof will slide all the way open. Tostop the sunroof sliding at any point,press any sunroof control button.

Manual slidePress the slide button on the overheadconsole and hold it until the sunroof isopened to the desired position.

CloseTo close the sunroof, press the close but-ton on the overhead console and hold ituntil the sunroof is closed.

Tilting the sunroof

OpenAutotiltTo use the autotilt feature, momentarily(less than 0.4 second) press the tilt but-ton on the overhead console. The sun-roof will tilt all the way open. To stop thesunroof tilting at any point, press anysunroof control button.

Manual tilt Press the tilt button on the overhead con-sole and hold it until the sunroof isopened to the desired position.

CloseTo close the sunroof, press the close but-ton on the overhead console and hold ituntil the sunroof is closed.

1VQA2034

1VQA2035

3 35


Sunshade The sunshade will automatically openwith the glass panel when the glasspanel slides open. You will have to closeit manually if you want it closed.

In case of an emergency If the sunroof does not open electrically:1. Open the conversation mirror cover.

1VQA2039

WARNING - Sunroof• Do not extend anyone’s face,

neck, arms or body outsidethrough the sunroof openingwhile driving.

• Make sure everyone’s hand andface are safely out of the waybefore closing a sunroof.

1VQA2036

CAUTION• Do not press any sunroof control

button longer than necessary.Damage to the motor or systemcomponents could occur.

• Periodically remove any dirt thatmay accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroofwhen the temperature is belowfreezing or when the sunroof iscovered with snow or ice, theglass or the motor could be dam-aged.

• The sunroof is made to slidetogether with the sunshade. Donot leave the sunshade closedwhile the sunroof is open.


363

2. Remove the two (2) screws, and thenremove the overhead console.

3. Insert the emergency handle (providedwith the vehicle) and turn the handleclockwise to open or counterclockwiseto close the sunroof.

Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is discon-nected or discharged, or you use theemergency handle to operate the sun-roof, you have to reset your sunroof sys-tem as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi-tion.

2. According to the position of the sun-roof, do as follows.1) in case that the sunroof has closed

completely or been tilted :Press the tilt button until the sun-roof has tilted upward completely.

2) in case that the sunroof has slide-opened:Press and hold the close button(for more than 5 seconds) until thesunroof has closed completely.Press the tilt button until the sun-roof has tilted upward completely.

3. Release the tilt button.

4. Press and hold the tilt button (formore than 10 seconds) until the sun-roof has returned to the original posi-tion of tilt after it is raised a little high-er than the maximum tilt position.Then, release the button.

5. Press and hold the tilt button (formore than 5 seconds) until the sun-roof is operated as follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN →SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the button.

When this has been completed, the sun-roof system will be reset.

1VQA2037

1VQA2038

3 37


Front seat(1) Forward and backward(2) Seatback angle(3) Seat cushion height(4) Seat warmer*(5) Headrest(6) Armrest(7) Lumbar support

Rear seats(8) Forward and backward (9) Seatback angle(10) Headrest(11) Armrest(12) Stowing*

* if equipped

SEAT

OVQ036201N

WARNING - Loose objectsLoose objects in the driver’s footarea could interfere with the opera-tion of the foot pedals, possiblycausing an accident. Do not placeanything under the front seats.


383

WARNING - Driver’s seat• Never adjust the driver’s seat

while the vehicle is moving. Anysudden or unexpected movementof the seat could cause you tolose control of the vehicle result-ing in an accident. Only adjust thedriver’s seat when the vehicle isstationary.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not allow anything to interfere

with the normal position of theseatback. Storing items against aseatback or in any other wayinterfering with proper locking ofa seatback could result in seriousor fatal injury in a sudden stop orcollision.

• Always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap por-tion of the seat belt snug and lowacross the hips. This is the bestposition to protect you in case ofan accident.

• Do not sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the air bag. Position theseat so that you can sit as farback as possible from the air bagand still comfortably reach allcontrols. The U.S. goverment rec-ommends that your chest be atleast 10 inches (250 mm) awayfrom the steering wheel.

• After adjusting the seat, alwayscheck that it is securely lockedinto place by attempting to movethe seat forward or reverse with-out using the lock release lever.Sudden or unexpected movementof the driver's seat could causeyou to lose control of the vehicleresulting in an accident.

WARNING - Uprightingseat

When you return the seatback to itsupright position, hold the seatbackand return it slowly and be surethere are no other occupantsaround the seat. If the seatback isreturned without being held andcontrolled, the back of the seatcould spring forward resulting inaccidental injury to a person struckby the seatback.

WARNING - Rear Seatback• The rear seatback must be

securely latched. If not, passen-gers and objects could be thrownforward resulting in seriousinjury or death in the event of asudden stop or collision.

• Luggage and other cargo shouldbe laid flat in the cargo area. Ifobjects are large, heavy, or mustbe piled, they must be secured.Under no circumstances shouldcargo be piled higher than theseatbacks. Failure to follow thesewarnings could result in seriousinjury or death in the event of asudden stop, collision or rollover.

• No passenger should ride in thecargo area or sit or lie on foldedseatbacks while the vehicle ismoving. All passengers must bein seats and restrained properlywhile riding.

• When resetting the seatback tothe upright position, make sure itis securely latched by pushing itforward and backwards.

• To avoid the possibility of burns,do not remove the carpet in thecargo area. Emission controlsbeneath this floor generate highexhaust temperatures.

3 39


Front seat adjustment - manualForward and backwardTo move the seat forward or backward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-ion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and backward withoutusing the lever. If the seat moves, it is notlocked properly.

Seatback angleTo recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the

seatback recline lever located on theoutside of the seat, at the rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat andadjust the seatback of the seat to theposition you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseatback is locked in place. (The leverMUST return to its original position forthe seatback to lock.)

1VQA2041 1VQA2043

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for front seat pas-senger

Riding with a reclined seatbackincreases your chance of serious orfatal injuries in the event of a colli-sion or sudden stop. The protectionof your restraint system (seat beltsand air bags) is greatly reduced byreclining your seat. Seat belts mustbe snug against your hips andchest to work properly. The morethe seatback is reclined, the greaterthe chance that an occupant's hipswill slide under the lap belt causingserious internal injuries or theoccupant's neck could strike theshoulder belt. Drivers and passen-gers should always sit well back intheir seats, properly belted, andwith the seatbacks upright.


403

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)To change the height of the seat cushion,push the lever located on the outside ofthe seat cushion up or down.• To lower the seat cushion, push down

the lever several times.• To raise the seat cushion, pull up the

lever several times.

Front seat adjustment - powerThe front seat can be adjusted by usingthe control knob on the front door. Beforedriving, adjust the seat to the properposition so as to easily control the steer-ing wheel, pedals and switches on theinstrument panel.

1VQA2328

WARNINGThe power seats are operable withthe ignition OFF.Therefore, children should never beleft unattended in the car.

CAUTION• Power seats are driven by an

electric motor. Stop operatingonce the adjustment is complet-ed. Excessive operation maydamage the electrical equipment.

• When in operation, the powerseats consume large amounts ofelectrical power.To prevent unnec-essary charging system drain,don’t adjust the power seatslonger than necessary while theengine is not running.

• Do not operate two or more powerseat control buttons at the sametime. Doing so may result inpower seat motor or electricalcomponent malfunction.

1VQA2044

3 41


Forward and backward Push the control knob forward or back-ward to move the seat to the desiredposition. Release the knob once the seatreaches to the desired position.

Seatback anglePush the control knob forward or back-ward to move the seatback to the desiredangle. Release the knob once the seatreaches to the desired position.

1VQA2045 1VQA2047

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for front seat pas-senger

Riding with a reclined seatbackincreases your chance of serious orfatal injuries in the event of a colli-sion or sudden stop. The protectionof your restraint system (seat beltsand air bags) is greatly reduced byreclining your seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)Seat belts must be snug againstyour hips and chest to work proper-ly. The more the seatback isreclined, the greater the chance thatan occupant's hips will slide underthe lap belt causing serious internalinjuries or the occupant's neckcould strike the shoulder belt.Drivers and passengers shouldalways sit well back in their seats,properly belted, and with the seat-backs upright.

WARNING• Never adjust a driver’s seat while

the vehicle is moving. Any sud-den or unexpected movement ofthe seat could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle resulting inan accident. Only adjust the dri-ver’s seat when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

• Do not sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the air bag. Position theseat so that you can sit as farback as possible from the air bagand still comfortably reach allcontrols.


423

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)Push the front portion (1) of the controlknob up to raise or down to lower thefront part of the seat cushion. Push therear portion (2) of the control knob up toraise or down to lower the rear part of theseat cushion. Release the knob once theseat reaches to the desired position.

Headrest (front)The headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and passenger, but alsohelps to protect the head and neck in theevent of a collision.For best protection, adjust the headrestso its center is as high as your ears. Alsoadjust the headrest so that it properlysupports the head and neck.

Active headrest (if equipped)The active headrest is designed to moveforward and upward during a rear impact.This helps to prevent the driver's andfront passenger’s head from movingbackward and thus helps prevent neckinjuries.

1VQA2046 1VQH3900N

3 43


Forward and backward adjustment The headrest may be adjusted forward tothree different positions by pulling theheadrest forward. To adjust the headrestbackward, pull it fully forward to the far-thest position and release it. Adjust theheadrest so that it properly supports thehead and neck.

Adjusting the height up and downTo raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3). Toremove the headrest, raise it as far as itcan go then press the release buttonwhile pulling upward.This should only bedone when the seat is not occupied.

WARNING - Headrest posi-tioning

To reduce the risk of head and neckinjuries, each occupant headrestmust be properly adjusted. Do notdrive the vehicle with the headrestremoved or improperly positioned.Do not adjust the driver's headrestwhile driving, or else loss of controland an accident is possible.

1VQA20501VQA2049


443

ArmrestThe front seat armrest are located on theside of the seatback.

Type ATo use the armrest, swing down the arm-rest to the lowest position.

Type BTo use the armrest, swing down the arm-rest to the lowest position then pull it upto the desired position.

Seatback pocketA seatback pocket is provided on theback of the front passenger and driversseatbacks.

1VQA2052

WARNING - Seatbackpockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objectsin the seatback pockets. In an acci-dent they could come loose fromthe pocket and injure vehicle occu-pants.

WARNINGFor proper operation of the occu-pant classification system:• Do not place any items cumula-

tively weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg)in the seatback pocket or on theseat.

• Do not hang onto the front pas-senger seat.

1VQA2053

3 45


Seat warmer (if equipped)The front seats can be electrically heatedindividually when the ignition switch isON. When the switch is ON, a numberranging from 1 to 5 is displayed on theswitch (5 = warmest setting).To turn off the seat warmer, set theswitch to 0.The seat warmer turns off automaticallywhen the seat temperature reaches theselected range and will turn on again ifthe temperature drops below the select-ed range.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat only)You can adjust the lumbar support bymoving the lever on the outside of the dri-ver’s seatback. Pivoting the lever increas-es or decreases the lumbar support.

❈ The location of the seat warmer switch maybe different depending on your model.

OVQ036010N

WARNING - Seat heaterburns

Passengers should use extremecaution when using seat warmersdue to the possibility of excessheating or burns. The seat warmersshould not be turned on when chil-dren, the elderly, ill people, andsleeping people occupy the seat.

CAUTION• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such asthinner, benzene, alcohol andgasoline. Doing so may damagethe surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seatwarmer, do not place blankets,cushions or seat covers on theseats while the seat warmer is inoperation.

• Do not place heavy or sharpobjects on seats equipped withseat warmers. Damage to the seatwarming components could occur.

1VQA2042


463

Rear seat adjustmentAdjusting the seat forward and back-ward (2nd row)To move the seat forward or backward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-ion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and backward withoutusing the lever. If the seat moves, it is notlocked properly.

Seatback angleTo recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the

seatback recline lever located on theoutside of the seat, at the rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat andadjust the seatback of the seat to theposition you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseatback is locked in place. (The leverMUST return to its original position forthe seatback to lock.)

OVQ036203N

OVQ036204N

OVQ036205N

2nd row seat

3rd row seat

3 47


ArmrestThe 2nd row seats have the armrestlocated on the side of seatback.To use the armrest, swing down the arm-rest to the lowest position.

Headrest (rear)The headrest not only provides comfortfor passengers, but also helps to protectthe head and neck in the event of a colli-sion. For best protection, adjust theheadrest so its center is as high as yourears.

Adjusting the height up and downTo raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button(1) while pulling upward (2).

1VQA2057OVQ036206N 1VQA2058

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of head and neckinjuries, do not ride with the head-rest removed or improperly posi-tioned.


483

Full flat seatWhen the vehicle is parked, you canplace the front seat in a reclined position,nearly flat.1. Move the rear seat to the farthest rear-

ward position.2. Move the front seat to the farthest for-

ward position.3. Remove the headrest.4. Recline the seatback as far as it can

go to allow the rear seat passenger tosupport their legs in the reclined posi-tion.

Folding the rear seatbackThe rear seatbacks fold forward to pro-vide additional cargo space and to pro-vide access to the cargo area.

To fold the rear seat:2nd row seat1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi-

tion.

WARNING - Full flat seatNever allow a passenger to use thefull flat seat feature while the vehi-cle is in motion because severeinjury or death could occur in anaccident.

WARNING - Uprightingseat

When you return the seatback to itsupright position, hold the seatbackand return it slowly. If the seatbackis returned without holding it, theback of the seat could spring for-ward resulting in accidental injuryfrom being struck by the seatback.

1VQA2329 OVQ036211N

2nd row seat

3 49


2. Pull the seatback recliner and double-fold the seat forward.

3. Push down the seat backward firmly tolock the catches into the rear anchorsuntil an audible "click" is heard.

4. Make sure the green mark on the rearseat cushion frame is visible and thecatches are locked in position by mov-ing the seat forward and backward orlifting the front portion of the seat. If thegreen mark is not visible and the seatmoves, it is not locked properly.

3rd row seat1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi-

tion.2. Hold the seatback and pull out the

folding strap.3. Fold the seatback forward and down

firmly until it clicks into place.

✽✽ NOTICEBefore folding the rear seats, disconnectthe rear center belt. See page 3-65.

OVQ036209N OVQ036210N OVQ036208N

3rd row seat


503

To unfold the rear seat:1. Pull up the seatback recline lever (or

folding strap).2. Lift and push the seatback backward

firmly until it clicks into place.Make sure the seatback is locked inplace.

3. Return the rear seat belt to the properposition.

Double-folding the rear seat (2nd row)To fold the rear seat:1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi-

tion.2. Move the seat to rear-most position.3. Double-fold the rear seat forward by

pull up the seatback recline lever.

4. Pull the folding strap out of the pocketlocated under the seat cushion.

5. Lift the entire folded seat forward andtie the folded seat to the assist handleusing the strap.

OVQ036211N OVQ036212N

3 51


To unfold the rear seat1. Untie the strap from the assist handle.2. Insert the strap into the pocket.3. Push down the seat backward firmly to

lock the catches into the rear anchorsuntil an audible “click” is heard.


5. Push the seatbacks to an upright andlocked position.

Removing the rear seat (2nd row)To remove a rear seat:1. Double-fold the rear seat by pull up the

seatback recline lever.

OVQ036213N OVQ036211NOVQ036210N


523

2. Pull up the catch release lever underthe front of the seat cushion whilereclining the folded seat rearwardslightly to release the front catchesfrom the anchors.

3. Remove the entire seat from the floor.

To install the rear seat:1. Put the front anchor strikers along the

front anchors on the floor.2. Insert two front anchor strikers into the

front anchors.

3. Lift the rear portion of the seat cushionthen push down firmly to lock thecatches into the rear anchors until anaudible “click” is heard.

OVQ036214N

OVQ036215N

OVQ036216N OVQ036217N

3 53




Stowing the rear seat (3rd row)The rear seat can be folded and stowedin the luggage compartment to provideadditional cargo space.To stow the rear seat:1. Lower the headrest to the lowest posi-

tion.2. Fold the seatback by pulling out the

folding strap.

3. Pull the seat by using the stowingstrap.

OVQ036210N OVQ036218N OVQ036219N


543

4. Stow the seat by pushing down firmly. To use the rear seat:1. Lift the seat by pulling out the stowing

strap.

2. Release the strap and push the seatforward firmly until it clicks into place toinsert the catches into the anchors.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not push down the upper part of theseatback when pushing the seat for-ward. Doing so can prevent the catchesfrom being locked in position.

WARNING• Make sure there are no persons or

objects around the seat and becareful not to injure your hands orbody under the seat or in the mov-ing seat parts when stowing orreinstalling the seat.

• Do not sit on the seat when it isstowed with the seatback uprightin the luggage compartment.Sitting on the unstable andunlocked seat could cause seri-ous injuries or death in an acci-dent.

OVQ036220N OVQ036221N OVQ036222N

3 55


3. Make sure the catches are locked inposition by moving the seat forwardand backward or lifting the front por-tion of the seat. If the seat moves, it isnot locked properly.


OVQ036223N CAUTION - Rear seat beltsWhen returning the rear seatbacksto the upright position, rememberto return the rear shoulder belts totheir proper position. Routing theseat belt webbing through the rearseat belt guides will help keep thebelts from being trapped behind orunder the seats.

CAUTION - Avoid damag-ing rear seat belt buckles

When you fold the rear seatback orput luggage on the rear seat cush-ion, insert the buckle in the pocketbetween the rear seatback andcushion. Doing so can prevent thebuckle from being damaged by therear seatback or luggage.

1VQA2074B

1VQA2074C


563

A driver position memory system is pro-vided to store and recall the driver seat,outside rearview mirror and adjustablepedal positions with a simple buttonoperation. By saving the desired posi-tions into the system memory, differentdrivers can reposition the driver seat,outside rearview mirror and adjustablepedals based upon their driving prefer-ence.If the battery is disconnected, the posi-tion memory will be lost and the drivingpositions must be restored in the system.

Storing positions into memoryusing the buttons on the doorStoring driver’s seat positions1. Shift the transaxle lever into P while

the ignition switch is ON.2. Adjust the driver seat, outside

rearview mirror and adjustable pedalto positions comfortable for the driver.

3. Press the M button on the controlpanel. The system will beep once.

4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or2) within 5 seconds after pressing theM button. The system will beep twicewhen memory has been successfullystored.

WARNING - CargoCargo should always be secured toprevent it from being thrown aboutthe vehicle in a collision and caus-ing serious injury to the vehicleoccupants. Special care should betaken of objects placed in the rearseats, since those may strike thefront seat occupants in a frontalcollision.

WARNING - Cargo loadingMake sure the engine is off, thetransaxle is in P and the parkingbrake is applied whenever loadingor unloading cargo. Failure to takethese steps may allow the vehicle tomove if the shift lever is inadver-tently moved to another position.

DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING Never attempt to operate the driverposition memory system while thevehicle is moving.This could result in loss of control,and an accident causing death,serious injury, or property damage.

1VQA2064

3 57


Recalling positions from memory1. Shift the transaxle lever into P while

the ignition switch is ON.2. To recall the position in memory, press

the desired memory button (1 or 2).The system will beep once, then thedriver seat, outside rearview mirrorand adjustable pedals will automatical-ly adjust to the stored positions.

Adjusting one of the control knobs for thedriver seat, outside rearview mirror andadjustable pedals while the system isrecalling the stored positions will causethe movement for that component to stopand move in the direction that the controlknob is moved. Other components willcontinue position recalling.

Storing and recalling with trans-mitterStoring with the transmitterRemove the key from the ignition switchand lock all the doors using the transmit-ter. The driver seat, outside rearview mir-ror and adjustable pedal positions will bestored in the system memory.

Driver’s position recalling with trans-mitterUnlock the door with the transmitter,positions stored in the system memorywill be recalled automatically.

✽✽ NOTICEThe buzzer sounds 10 times if there is amalfunction of the memory system.Have the driver position memory systemchecked by an authorized Hyundai deal-er.

Easy access functionWhen the AUTO button is ON (the indi-cator light illuminates) with the shift leverin P position, the system will move thedriver’s seat forward or rearward auto-matically so you can comfortably enterand exit the vehicle.• It will move the driver’s seat rearward

when the ignition key is removed.• It will move the driver’s seat forward

when the ignition key is inserted.

WARNING Use caution when recalling adjust-ment memory while sitting in thevehicle. Push the seat position con-trol knob to the desired positionimmediately if the seat moves toofar in any direction.

1VQA2065


583

To adjust the position of the acceleratorand brake pedals, push the switch withthe shift lever in the P position.

If you push the ▲ portion of the switch,the pedals move toward the driver.If you push the ▼ portion of the switch,the pedals move away from the driver.

Setting the adjustable pedal posi-tion1. Be sure the parking brake is engaged.2. Move the accelerator and brake ped-

als to the front most position by push-ing the ▼ portion of the switch.

3. Adjust the seat position and the steer-ing wheel angle properly.

4. Move the pedals toward you until youcan fully depress the brake pedal bypushing the ▲ portion of the switch.

5. Depress the pedals a few times to getused to the feel after adjusting.

POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2066

WARNING• Adjust the pedals after parking

the vehicle on level ground. Neverattempt to adjust the pedals whilethe vehicle is moving.

• Never adjust the pedals with yourfoot on the accelerator pedal asthis may result in increasing theengine speed and acceleration.

• Make sure that you can fullydepress the brake pedal beforedriving. Otherwise, you may notbe able to hold down the brakepedal firmly in an emergencystop.

3 59


Seat belt precautions Infant or small childAll 50 states have child restraint laws.Youshould be aware of the specific require-ments in your state. Child and/or infantsafety seats must be properly placed andinstalled in the rear seat. Informationabout the use of these restraints beginson page 3-71.

✽✽ NOTICESmall children are best protected frominjury in an accident when properlyrestrained in the rear seat by a childrestraint system that meets the require-ments of the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Before buying anychild restraint system, make sure that ithas a label certifying that it meetsFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard213. The restraint must be appropriatefor your child's height and weight.Check the label on the child restraint forthis information. See page 3-71.

SEAT BELTS

WARNINGAll occupants of the vehicle mustwear their seat belts at all times.Seat belts and child restraintsreduce the risk of serious or fatalinjuries for all occupants in theevent of a collision or sudden stop.Without a seat belt, occupantscould be shifted too close to adeploying air bag, strike the interiorstructure or be thrown from thevehicle. Properly worn seat beltsgreatly reduce these hazards.Even with advanced air bags,unbelted occupants can be severe-ly injured by a deploying air bag.Always follow the precautionsabout seat belts, air bags and occu-pant seat contained in this manual.

WARNINGEvery person in your vehicle needsto be properly restrained at alltimes, including infants and chil-dren. Never hold a child in yourarms or lap when riding in a vehicle.The violent forces created during acrash will tear the child from yourarms and throw the child againstthe interior. Always use a childrestraint appropriate for yourchild's height and weight, see page3-71.


603

Larger childrenChildren who are too large for childrestraint systems should always occupythe rear seat and use the availablelap/shoulder belts. The lap portion shouldbe fastened snug on the hips and as lowas possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out ofposition. Children are afforded the mostsafety in the event of an accident whenthey are restrained by a proper restraintsystem in the rear seat. If a larger child(over age 13) must be seated in the frontseat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoulderbelt and the seat should be placed in therearmost position. Children under theage of 13 should be restrained securelyin the rear seat. NEVER place a childunder the age of 13 in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-es the child’s neck or face, try placing thechild closer to the center of the vehicle. Ifthe shoulder belt still touches their faceor neck they need to be returned to achild restraint system. In addition, after-market devices are available from inde-pendent manufacturers which help pullthe shoulder belt down and away fromthe child’s face or neck.

Pregnant womenThe use of a seat belt is recommendedfor pregnant women to lessen the chanceof injury in an accident. When a seat beltis used, the lap belt portion should beplaced as low and snugly as possible onthe hips, not across the abdomen. Forspecific recommendations, consult aphysician.

Injured personA seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported.When this is necessary, you should con-sult a physician for recommendations.

One person per beltTwo people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt.This could increase the severity ofinjuries in case of an accident.

WARNING - Shoulder beltson small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to bein contact with a child’s neck orface while the vehicle is inmotion.

• If safety belts are not properlyworn and adjusted on children,there is a risk of death or seriousinjury.

3 61


Do not lie downTo reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achieve max-imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-tem, all passengers should be sitting upand the front seats should be in anupright position when the car is moving.A seat belt cannot provide proper protec-tion if the person is lying down in the rearseat or if the front seat is in a reclinedposition.

Care of seat beltsSeat belt systems should never be disas-sembled or modified. In addition, careshould be taken to assure that seat beltsand belt hardware are not damaged byseat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspectionIt is recommended that all seat belts beinspected periodically for wear or dam-age of any kind. Parts of the system thatare damaged should be replaced assoon as possible.

Keep belts clean and drySeat belts should be kept clean and dry.If belts become dirty, they can becleaned by using a mild soap solutionand warm water. Bleach, dye, strongdetergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage andweaken the fabric.

When to replace seat beltsEntire in-use seat belt assembly orassemblies should be replaced if thevehicle has been involved in an accident.This should be done even if no damageis visible. Additional questions concern-ing seat belt operation should be directedto your Hyundai Dealer.

WARNING When you return the rear seatbackto its upright position after the rearseatback was folded down, be care-ful not to damage the seat belt web-bing or buckle. Be sure that thewebbing or buckle does not getcaught or pinched in the rear seat.A seat belt with damaged webbingor buckle will not be as strong andcould possibly fail during a colli-sion or sudden stop, resulting inserious injury.

WARNINGRiding with a reclined seatbackincreases your chance of serious orfatal injuries in the event of a colli-sion or sudden stop. The protectionof your restraint system (seat beltsand air bags) is greatly reduced byreclining your seat. Seat belts mustbe snug against your hips andchest to work properly. The morethe seatback is reclined, the greaterthe chance that an occupant's hipswill slide under the lap belt causingserious internal injuries or theoccupant's neck could strike theshoulder belt. Drivers and passen-gers should always sit well back intheir seats, properly belted, andwith the seatbacks upright.


623

Height adjustable shoulder belt (if equipped)You can adjust the height of the shoulderbelt anchor to one of 5 positions for max-imum comfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt istoo near your neck, you will not be gettingthe most effective protection. The shoul-der portion should be adjusted so that itlies across your chest and midway overyour shoulder nearest the door and notyour neck.To adjust the height of the seat beltanchor, lower or raise the height adjuster(A) into an appropriate position.To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).To lower it, push it down (3) while press-ing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchorinto position. Try sliding the heightadjuster to make sure that it has lockedinto position.

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point systemwith emergency locking retractorTo fasten your beltTo fasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab into thebuckle. There will be an audible "click"when the tab locks into the buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to theproper length only after the lap belt por-tion is adjusted manually so that it fitssnugly around your hips. If you lean for-ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt willextend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, however, thebelt will lock into position. It will also lockif you try to lean forward too quickly.

WARNING• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appro-priate height. Never position theshoulder belt across your neck orface. Improperly positioned seatbelts can cause serious injuriesin an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts afteran accident could leave you withdamaged seat belts that will notprovide protection in the event ofanother collision leading to per-sonal injury or death. Replaceyour seat belts after being in anaccident as soon as possible.

B180A01NF1VQA2068

3 63


✽✽ NOTICEIf the driver's safety belt is not fastenedwhen the key is turned ON or if it is dis-connected after the key is turned ON,the safety belt warning light will blinkuntil the belt is fastened.If the driver's safety belt is not fastenedwhen the key is turned ON or if it isunfastened after the key is ON, the safe-ty belt warning chime will sound forapproximately 6 seconds.

Seat belts - Front passenger andrear seat 3-point system withcombination locking retractorTo fasten your belt Combination retractor type seat belts areinstalled in the rear seat positions to helpaccommodate the installation of childrestraint systems. Although a combina-tion retractor is also installed in the frontpassenger seat position, Hyundai strong-ly recommends that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVER placeany infant restraint system in the frontseat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the fea-tures of both an emergency lockingretractor seat belt and an automatic lock-ing retractor seat belt. To fasten your seatbelt, pull it out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab into the buckle. There willbe an audible "click" when the tab locksinto the buckle. When not securing achild restraint, the seat belt operates inthe same way as the driver's seat belt(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). Itautomatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fitssnugly around your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended fromthe retractor to allow the installation of achild restraint system, the seat belt oper-ation changes to allow the belt to retract,but not to extend (Automatic LockingRetractor Type). See page 3-72.

✽✽ NOTICEAlthough the combination retractorprovides the same level of protection forseated passengers in either emergencyor automatic locking modes, it is recom-mended that seated passengers use theemergency locking feature for improvedconvenience. The automatic lockingfunction is intended to facilitate childrestraint installation. To convert fromthe automatic locking feature to theemergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fullyretract.

WARNING• For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts mustalways be used whenever the caris moving.

• Seat belts are most effectivewhen seatbacks are in the uprightposition.

(Continued)


643

Adjusting your seat belt To release the seat beltThe seat belt is released by pressing therelease button in the locking buckle.When it is released, the belt should auto-matically draw back into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt tobe sure it is not twisted, then try again.

B200A01NF B210A01NF

(Continued)• Children age 12 and younger

must always be properlyrestrained in the rear seat. Neverallow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. If a child over 13must be seated in the front seat,he/she must be properly beltedand the seat should be moved asfar back as possible.

• Never wear the shoulder beltunder your arm or behind yourback. An improperly positionedshoulder belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash. The shoulderbelt should be positioned midwayover your shoulder across yourcollarbone.

• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.A twisted belt can't do its job aswell. In a collision, it could evencut into you. Be sure the belt web-bing is straight and not twisted.

• Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. If the beltwebbing or hardware is damaged,replace it.

WARNINGYou should place the lap belt por-tion as low as possible and snuglyacross your hips, not on your waist.If the lap belt is located too high onyour waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of acollision. Both arms should not beunder or over the belt. Rather, oneshould be over and the other under,as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seat belt under thearm nearest the door.

3 65


3-Point rear center seat belt To fasten the rear center belt1. Extract the tongue plate from the hole

on the belt assembly cover and slowlypull the tongue plates out from theretractor.

2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into theopen end of the buckle (C) until anaudible “click" is heard, indicating thelatch is locked. Make sure the belt isnot twisted.

3. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert thetongue plate (B) into the open end ofthe buckle (D) until an audible “click” isheard, indicating the latch is locked.Make sure the belt is not twisted.

1VQH3903

CAUTION - Cargo Be sure that cargo is securelyloaded in the rear cargo area.Failing to do so may cause damageto the rear center seat belt in sud-den stops or collisions.

OVQ036225N OVQ036097N

WARNINGNever let anyone ride in the rearcenter seat without fastening allmetal tabs and buckles asdescribed in this section. This seatbelt is designed to function as atypical 3-point restraint (lap/shoul-der belt). Using only the shoulderportion or lap portion of the beltcan result in serious or fatal injuriesin the event of a collision or suddenstop.


663

There will be an audible “click” when thetab locks in the buckle. The seat beltautomatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt is adjusted manu-ally so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and let youmove around. If there is a sudden stop orimpact, the belt will lock into position. Itwill also lock if you try to lean forward tooquickly.

When using the rear center seat belt, thebuckle with the “CENTER” mark must beused.

To unfasten the rear center seat belt 1. Press the release button on the buckle

(D) and remove the tongue plate (B)from the buckle (D).

2. Retract the rear center seat belt.

WARNINGWhen using the rear seat centerbelt, you must lock all tongue platesand buckles. If any tongue plate orbuckle is not locked, it will increasethe chance of injury in the event ofcollision.

OVQ036226N 1VQH3904

3 67


3. Insert a key or similar small rigiddevice into the web release button (E)on the anchor connector. Pull up onthe seat belt web (A) and allow thewebbing to retract automatically.

4. Insert the tongue plate (A) into thehole on the belt assembly cover.

Stowing the rear seat belt The rear seat belt can be stowed in thepocket between the rear seatback andcushion when not in use.

Proper use and care of the seatbelt system To ensure that the seat belts provide themaximum protection, please follow theseinstructions:• Use the seat belts at all times - even on

short trips.• If the seat belt is twisted, straighten it

prior to use.• Keep sharp edges and damaging

objects away from the seat belts.• After wearing a seat belt, make sure it

fully retracts to the stowed position. Donot allow the belt to get caught in thedoor when you close it.

OVQ036099N

OVQ036098N

OVQ036227N


683

Pre-tensioner seat belt Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped withdriver's and front passenger's pre-ten-sioner seat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that the seatbelts fit tightly against the occupant'sbody in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision issevere enough, together with the airbags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or ifthe occupant tries to lean forward tooquickly, the seat belt retractor will lockinto position. In certain frontal collisions,the pre-tensioner will activate and pullthe seat belt into tighter contact againstthe occupant's body.If the system senses excessive seat belttension on the driver or passenger's seatbelt when the pre-tensioner activates, theload limiter inside the pre-tensioner willrelease some of the pressure on theaffected seat belt.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion:1. SRS air bag warning light2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module

HXG229 1LDE3100

3 69


✽✽ NOTICE• Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's pre-tensioner seat belts will beactivated in certain frontal collisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts can beactivated alone or, where the frontalcollision is severe enough, togetherwith the air bags.The pre-tensioners will not be activat-ed if the seat belts are not being wornat the time of the collision.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heardand fine dust, which may appear to besmoke, may be visible in the passengercompartment. These are normal oper-ating conditions and are not haz-ardous.

• Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and shouldnot be breathed for prolonged peri-ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-oughly after an accident in which thepre-tensioner seat belts were activat-ed.

CAUTION • Because the sensor that activates

the SRS air bag is connected withthe pre-tensioner seat belt, theSRS air bag warning light onthe instrument panel will illumi-nate for approximately 6 secondsafter the ignition key has beenturned to the "ON" position, andthen it should turn off.

• If the pre-tensioner seat belt is notworking properly, this warninglight will illuminate even if there isno malfunction of the SRS air bag.If the SRS air bag warning lightdoes not illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to "ON", or if itblinks for a second and remainsilluminated after illuminating forapproximately 6 seconds, or if itilluminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, please have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspectthe pre-tensioner seat belt or SRSair bag system as soon as possi-ble.

AIRBAG

WARNINGTo obtain maximum benefit from apre-tensioner seat belt:1. The seatbelt must be work cor-

rectly and adjusted to the properposition (see pages 3-61). Pleaseread and follow all of the impor-tant information and precautionsabout your vehicle’s occupantsafety features – including seatbelts and advanced air bags –that are provided in this manual.

2. Be sure you and your passengersalways wear seat belts and wearthem properly.


703

WARNING• Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-vation, pre-tensioner seat beltsmust be replaced. All seat belts,of any type, should always bereplaced after they have beenworn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat beltassembly mechanisms becomehot during activation. Do nottouch the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies for several minutesafter they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect orreplace the pre-tensioner seatbelts yourself. This must be doneby an authorized Hyundai dealer.

• Do not strike the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies.

• Do not attempt to service orrepair the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem in any manner.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Improper handling of the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt assemblies, andfailure to heed the warnings notto strike, modify, inspect, replace,service or repair the pre-tension-er seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadver-tent activation and serious injury.

• Always wear the seat belts whendriving or riding in a motor vehi-cle.

3 71


Children riding in the car should sit in therear seat and must always be properlyrestrained to minimize the risk of injury inan accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statis-tics provided by the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seats than in thefront seat. Larger children not in a childrestraint should use one of the seat beltsprovided.All 50 states have child restraint laws.Youshould be aware of the specific require-ments in your state. Child and/or infantsafety seats must be properly placed andinstalled in the rear seat. You must use acommercially available child restraintsystem that meets the requirements ofthe Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards (FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured. For small children and babies, achild seat or infant seat must be used.Before buying a particular child restraintsystem, make sure it fits your car seatand seat belts, and fits your child. Followall the instructions provided by the man-ufacturer when installing the childrestraint system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WARNING• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Neverinstall a child or infant seat on thefront passenger's seat. Should anaccident occur and cause thepassenger side air bag to deploy,it could severely injure or kill aninfant or child seated in an infantor child seat. Thus only use achild restraint in the rear seat ofyour vehicle.

• A safety belt or child restraintsystem can become very hot if itis left in a closed vehicle on asunny day, even if the outsidetemperature does not feel hot. Besure to check the seat cover andbuckles before placing a childthere.

• When the child restraint systemis not in use, store it in the trunkor fasten it with a safety belt sothat it will not be thrown forwardin the case of a sudden stop or anaccident.

• Children may be seriously injuredor killed by an inflating air bag.All children, even those too largefor child restraints, must ride inthe rear seat.

WARNINGTo reduce the chance or serious orfatal injuries:• Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.A child riding in the front passen-ger seat can be forcefully struckby an inflating air bag resulting inserious or fatal injuries.

• Always follow the instructions forinstallation and use of the childrestraint maker.

• Always make sure the child seatis secured properly in the car andyour child is securely restrainedin the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms orlap when riding in a vehicle. Theviolent forces created during acrash will tear the child from yourarms and throw the child againstthe car’s interior.

• Never put a seat belt over your-self and a child. During a crash,the belt could press deep into thechild causing serious internalinjuries.

(Continued)


723

Using a child restraint systemFor small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is required.Thischild seat or infant seat should be ofappropriate size for the child and shouldbe installed in accordance with the man-ufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in thevehicle's rear seat.Your vehicle is provid-ed with three child restraint hook holdersfor installing the child seat or infant seat.

(Continued)• Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle – not even for a shorttime. The car can heat up veryquickly, resulting in seriousinjuries to children inside. Evenvery young children may inadver-tently cause the vehicle to move,entangle themselves in the win-dows, or lock themselves or oth-ers inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or anytwo persons, to use the same seatbelt.

• Children often squirm and reposi-tion themselves improperly.Never let a child ride with theshoulder belt under their arm orbehind their back. Always prop-erly position and secure childrenin rear seat.

• Never allow a child to stand-up orkneel on the seat or floorboard ofa moving vehicle. During a colli-sion or sudden stop, the child canbe violently thrown against thevehicles interior, resulting in seri-ous injury.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never use an infant carrier or a

child safety seat that "hooks"over a seatback, it may not pro-vide adequate security in an acci-dent.

• Seat belts can become very hot,especially when the car is parkedin direct sunlight. Always checkseat belt buckles before fasteningthem over a child.

• Always store or secure a childseat, even when it is not in use.During a collision or sudden stop,the child seat could be throwninside the vehicle.

3 73


Securing a child restraint seat Tether anchor system Child restraint hook holders are locatedon the back of the rear seat cushions.

1. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrest,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to theappropriate child restraint hook holderand tighten to secure the seat.

WARNING - Tether strap• A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the childrestraint is not properlyanchored. Always follow the childseat manufacturer’s instructionsfor installation and use.

• Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point.Theincreased load caused by multi-ple seats may cause the tethersor anchorage points to break,causing serious injury or death.

WARNING - Child restraintcheck

Check that the child restraint sys-tem is secure by pushing andpulling it in different directions.Incorrectly fitted child restraintsmay swing, twist, tip or separatecausing death or serious injury.

OVQ036228N

OVQ036229N

OVQ036230R


743

Child seat lower anchorsSome child seat manufacturers makechild restraint seats that are labeled asInternational Standards OrganizationFixed (ISOFIX) or ISOFIX-compatiblechild restraint seats. These seats includetwo rigid or webbing mounted attach-ments that connect to two ISOFIXanchors at specific seating positions inyour vehicle. This type of child restraintseat eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach the child seat for forward-facing child restraint seats in the rearseats.

ISOFIX anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors arelocated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Their locations areshown in the illustration. There is noISOFIX anchor provided for the centerrear seating position.The ISOFIX anchors are locatedbetween the seatback and the seat cush-ion of the rear seat left and right outboardseating positions.

WARNING - Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages aredesigned to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses orfor attaching other items orequipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not workproperly if attached somewhereother than the correct tetheranchor.

OVQ036300N OVQ036231N

3 75


Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install childrestraint seats with ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible attachments.Once you have installed the ISOFIX childrestraint, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the ISOFIX and tetheranchors. Also, test the child restraint seatbefore you place the child in it. Tilt theseat from side to side. Also try to tug theseat forward. Check to see if the anchorshold the seat in place.

Placing a passenger seat beltinto the auto lock mode The use of the auto lock mode willensure that the normal movement of thechild in the vehicle does not cause theseat belt to be pulled out and loosen thefirmness of its hold on the child restraintsystem. To secure a child restraint sys-tem, use the following procedure.

WARNING - ISOFIXAnchors

• A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a collision if the childrestraint is not properlyanchored. Always follow the childseat manufacturer’s instructionsfor installation and use.

• Never install a child restraintusing the ISOFIX anchors at thecenter position of the rear seat. Ina crash, the ISOFIX anchors maybreak if a car seat is improperlyplaced in the center positionresulting in serious or fatalinjuries. Only place a ISOFIX orISOFIX-compatible child seat inthe left or right out-board rearseating positions (as shown) tothe appropriate ISOFIX anchorsprovided.

• Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point.Theincreased load caused by multi-ple seats may cause the tethersor anchorage points to break,causing serious injury or death.

WARNINGInstall the child restraint seat fullyrearward against the seatback withthe seatback in a vertical position,not reclined.

WARNINGWhen using the vehicle's "ISOFIX"system to install a child restraintsystem in the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latchedsecurely in their seat belt bucklesand the seat belt webbing must beretracted behind the child restraintto prevent the child from reachingand taking hold of unretracted seatbelts. Unlatched metal latch platesor tabs may allow the child to reachthe unretracted seat belts whichmay result in strangulation and aserious injury or death to the childin the child restraint.


763

Installing a child restraint system bylap/shoulder belt

To install a child restraint system on theoutboard or center rear seats, do the fol-lowing:1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder beltaround or through the restraint, follow-ing the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions. Be sure the seat belt web-bing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch intothe buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”sound.

Position the release button so that it iseasy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seatbelt all the way out. When the shoulderportion of the seat belt is fully extend-ed, it will shift the retractor to the “AutoLock” (child restraint) mode.

E2MS103005 E2BLD310 MMSA3028

WARNINGA child can be seriously injured orkilled in a collision if the childrestraint is not properly anchoredto the car and the child is not prop-erly restrained in the child restraint.Always follow the child seat manu-facturer’s instructions for installa-tion and use.

3 77


4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion ofthe seat belt to retract and listen for anaudible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.This indicates that the retractor is inthe “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinctsound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the beltas possible by pushing down on thechild restraint system while feeding theshoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraintsystem to confirm that the seat belt isholding it firmly in place. If it is not,release the seat belt and repeat steps2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is inthe “Auto Lock” mode by attempting topull more of the seat belt out of theretractor. If you cannot, the retractor isin the “Auto Lock” mode.

To remove the child restraint, press therelease button on the buckle and thenpull the lap/shoulder belt out of therestraint and allow the seat belt to retractfully.

When the seat belt is allowed toretract to its fully stowed position, theretractor will automatically switchfrom the “Auto Lock” mode to theemergency lock mode for normaladult usage.

MMSA3029 MMSA3030

WARNING - Auto lockmode

The lap/shoulder belt automaticallyreturns to the “emergency lockmode” whenever the belt is allowedto retract fully. Therefore, the pre-ceding seven steps must be fol-lowed each time a child restraint isinstalled.If the retractor is not in theAutomatic Locking mode, the childrestraint can move when your vehi-cle turns or stops suddenly. A childcan be seriously injured or killed ifthe child restraint is not properlyanchored to the car, including set-ting the retractor to the AutomaticLocking mode.


783

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Driver’s air bag Front passenger’sair bag

Curtain Air bag

SRS control module

OEP036094/1VQA2076/1VQA2077/OVQ036900N/OVQ036017N/1VQA2079/1VQA2323/OEP036080/OVQ036096N/OVQ036095N/1VQA2081

Side impact air bag

Occupant classi-fication system

Front seat positionsensor

Side impact sensor Front impact sensor

3 79


Driver's and passenger's front airbagYour Hyundai is equipped with anadvanced Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. The indications of the sys-tem's presence are the letters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the air bag pad coverin the steering wheel and the passen-ger's side front panel pad above theglove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of air bagsinstalled under the pad covers in the cen-ter of the steering wheel and the passen-ger's side front panel above the glovebox.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt system alone incase of a frontal impact of sufficientseverity. The SRS uses sensors to gath-er information about the driver's seatposition, the driver's and front passen-ger's seat belt usage and impact severi-ty.

The driver's seat track position sensors,which are installed on the seat track,determine if the seat is fore or aft of a ref-erence position. The seat belt bucklesensors determine if the driver and frontpassenger's seat belts are fastened.These sensors provide the ability to con-trol the SRS deployment based on howclose the driver's seat is to the steeringwheel, whether or not the seat belts arefastened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability tocontrol the air bag inflation with two lev-els. A first stage level is provided for mod-erate-severity impacts. A second stagelevel is provided for more severe impacts.

According to the impact severity, seatingposition and seat belt usage, theSRSCM(SRS Control Module) controlsthe air bag inflation. Failure to properlywear seat belts can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.

Additionally, your Hyundai is equippedwith an occupant classification system inthe front passenger's seat. The occupantclassification system detects the pres-ence of a passenger in the front passen-ger's seat and will turn off the front pas-senger's air bag under certain condi-tions. For more detail, see "OccupantClassification System" later in this sec-tion.

1VQA2076

Driver’s front air bag


803

✽✽ NOTICE• Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the sunvisor and in the glove box.

• Advanced air bags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-vide enhanced occupant protection infrontal crashes. Front air bags are notintended to deploy in collisions inwhich sufficient protection can beprovided by the pre-tensioner seatbelt.

• If you are considering modification ofyour vehicle due to a disability, pleasecontact the Hyundai CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-633-5151.

CAUTION If a seat track position sensor or anoccupant classification system isnot working properly, the SRS airbag warning light on the instru-ment panel will illuminate becausethe SRS air bag warning light isconnected with the seat track posi-tion sensor and the occupant clas-sification system. If the SRS air bagwarning light does not illuminatewhen the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, remains illumi-nated after approximately 6 sec-onds when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, have an authorizedHyundai dealer inspect theadvanced SRS air bag system assoon as possible.

AIRBAG

WARNING• Modification to the seat structure

can adversely affect the seattrack position sensor and causethe air bag to deploy at a differentlevel than should be provided.

• Do not place any objects under-neath the front seats as theycould damage the seat track posi-tion sensor or interfere with theoccupant classification system.

• Do not place any objects that maycause magnetic fields near thefront seat. These may cause amalfunction of the seat trackposition sensor.

3 81


WARNINGAlways use seat belts and childrestraints – every trip, every time,everyone! Air bags inflate with con-siderable force and in the blink ofan eye. Seat belts help keep occu-pants in proper position to obtainmaximum benefit from the air bag.Even with advanced air bags,improperly and unbelted occupantscan be severely injured when the airbag inflates. Always follow the pre-cautions about seat belts, air bagsand occupant safety contained inthis manual.

To reduce the chance of serious orfatal injuries and receive the maxi-mum safety benefit from yourrestraint system:• Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat (seechild restraints 3-71).

• ABC – Always Buckle Children inthe back seat. It is the safestplace for children of any age toride.

• Front and side impact air bagscan injure occupants improperlypositioned in the front seats.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags,while still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

• Never sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the front or side air bags

• Never lean against the door orcenter console – always sit in anupright position.

• Do not allow a passenger to ridein the front seat when the “PAS-SENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicatoris illuminated, because the airbag will not deploy in the event ofa moderate or severe frontalcrash.

• Never place objects over or nearany air bag module (front or sideimpact air bags), because theseobjects can injure passengers ina crash.

• Never place covers, blankets oraftermarket seat warmers on thepassenger seat as these mayinterfere with the occupant classi-fication system.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not tamper or disconnect SRS

wiring or other components.Injuries could result from inadver-tent deployment or failure of theair bag to deploy in a crash.

• If the SRS air bag warning light(see page 3-119) remains illumi-nated while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorizedHyundai dealer inspect the airbag system as soon as possible.

• Air bags can only be used once –have an authorized Hyundai deal-er replace the air bag immediatelyafter deployment.

• The SRS is designed to deploythe front air bags only when animpact is sufficiently severe andwhen the impact angle is lessthan 30° from the forward longitu-dinal axis of the vehicle. The frontair bags will not deploy in side,rear or rollover impacts.Additionally, the air bags will onlydeploy once. Seat belts must beworn at all times.

(Continued)


823

(Continued)• Front air bags are not intended to

deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. Inaddition, front air bags will notdeploy in frontal crashes belowthe deployment threshold.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags,while still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. You and your passen-gers should never sit or leanunnecessarily close to the airbags. Improperly positioned driv-ers and passengers can beseverely injured by inflating airbags.

• No objects should be placed overor near the air bag modules onthe steering wheel, instrumentpanel, and the front passenger'spanel above the glove box,because any such object couldcause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to cause theair bags to deploy.

• If the air bags deploy, they mustbe replaced by an authorizedHyundai dealer. Deployed airbags WILL NOT inflate again andwill provide no protection in sub-sequent collisions.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring or other componentsof the SRS system. Doing socould result in injury, due to acci-dental deployment of the air bagsor by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

• Even though your vehicle isequipped with the occupant clas-sification system, do not install achild restraint system in the frontpassenger seat position. A childrestraint system must never beplaced in the front seat.The infantor child could be severely injuredor killed by an air bag deploymentin case of an accident.

• Children younger than 13 yearsmust always be properlyrestrained in the rear seat. Neverallow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. If a child over 13must be seated in the front seat,he or she must be properly beltedand the seat should be moved asfar back as possible.

(Continued)

OEP036096N

OVQ036018N

OEP036091

Rear impact

Side impact

Rollover

3 83


SRS components and functionsThe SRS consists of the following com-ponents:1. Front Impact Sensors2. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

Indicator (Front passenger's seat only)3. SRS "AIR BAG" warning light4. Knee Bolster5. Passenger's Air bag Module6. Driver's Air bag Module7. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)8. Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)9. Driver's Seat Track Position Sensor10. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat

Belt Buckle Sensors11. Side Impact Sensors12. Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies13. Side Impact Air bag Modules14. Curtain Air bag Modules

The SRSCM continually monitors all ele-ments while the ignition is "ON" to deter-mine if a frontal or near-frontal impact issevere enough to require air bag deploy-ment or pre-tensioner seat belt deploy-ment.

The SRS "AIR BAG" warning light on theinstrument panel will illuminate for about6 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position or after the engine isstarted, after which the "AIR BAG" warn-ing light should go out.

(Continued)• For maximum safety protection in

all types of crashes, all occupantsincluding the driver shouldalways wear their seat beltswhether or not an air bag is alsoprovided at their seating positionto minimize the risk of severeinjury or death in the event of acrash. Do not sit or lean unneces-sarily close to the air bag whilethe vehicle is in motion.

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-tion can result in serious or fatalinjury in a crash. All occupantsshould sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion withtheir seat belt on, legs comfort-ably extended and their feet onthe floor until the vehicle isparked and the ignition key isremoved.

• The SRS air bag system mustdeploy very rapidly to provideprotection in a crash. If an occu-pant is out of position because ofnot wearing a seat belt, the airbag may forcefully contact theoccupant causing serious or fatalinjuries.


843

The air bag modules are located both inthe center of the steering wheel and inthe front passenger's panel above theglove box. When the SRSCM detects asufficiently severe impact to the front ofthe vehicle, it will automatically deploythe front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams moldeddirectly into the pad covers will separateunder pressure from the expansion of theair bags. Further opening of the coversthen allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combinationwith a properly worn seat belt, slows thedriver's or the passenger's forwardmotion, reducing the risk of head andchest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bagimmediately starts deflating, enabling thedriver to maintain forward visibility andthe ability to steer or operate other con-trols.

B240B01L B240B02L B240B03L

Driver’s front air bag Driver’s front air bag Driver’s front air bag

3 85


1VQA2077 B240B05L

CAUTION • Do not install or place any acces-

sories (drink holder, cassetteholder, sticker, etc.) on the frontpassenger's panel above theglove box in a vehicle with a pas-senger's air bag. Such objectsmay become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the pas-senger's air bag inflates.

• When installing a container of liq-uid air freshener inside the vehi-cle, do not place it near the instru-ment cluster nor on the instru-ment panel surface.

(Continued)

(Continued)If there is any leakage from the airfreshener onto these areas(instrument cluster, instrumentpanel or air ventilator), it maydamage these parts. If the liquidfrom the air freshener does leakonto these areas, wash them withwater immediately.

WARNING• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a finedust released in the vehicle.These conditions are normal andare not hazardous - the air bagsare packed in this fine powder.The dust generated during air bagdeployment may cause skin oreye irritation as well as aggravateasthma for some persons.Always wash all exposed skinareas thoroughly with lukewarmwater and a mild soap after anaccident in which the air bagswere deployed.

(Continued)

Passenger’s front air bag Passenger’s front air bag


863

Occupant classification systemYour vehicle is equipped with an occu-pant classification system in the frontpassenger's seat.The occupant classification system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated front passenger anddetermine if the passenger's front air bagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.The driver's front air bag is not affectedor controlled by the occupant classifica-tion system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied bya person that the system determines tobe of adult size, and he/she sits properly(sitting upright with the seatback in anupright position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legs com-fortably extended and their feet on thefloor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator will be turned off and the frontpassenger's air bag will be able to inflate,if necessary, in frontal crashes.You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator on the center facia panel.This system detects the conditions 1~4in the following table and activates ordeactivates front passenger air bagsbased on these conditions.

(Continued)• The SRS can function only when

the ignition key is in the "ON"position. If the SRS "AIR BAG"warning light does not illuminate,or continuously remains on afterilluminating for about 6 secondswhen the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, or after theengine is started, comes on whiledriving, the SRS is not workingproperly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle immediately inspected byyour Hyundai dealer.

• Before you replace a fuse or dis-connect a battery terminal, turnthe ignition key to the "LOCK"position and remove the ignitionkey. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when theignition key is in the "ON" posi-tion. Failure to heed this warningwill cause the SRS "AIR BAG"warning light to illuminate.

OVQ036012N

3 87


Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detected by the occupant classifi-

cation system

1. Adult *1

2. Child*2 or child

restraint system*3

3. Unoccupied

4. There is a malfunc-

tion in the system

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

"PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator

lightSRS warning light

Front passengerair bag

Deactivated

Indicator/Warning light Devices

*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits inthe front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child dependingon his/her physique and posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child whohas outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the systemmay recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

WARNINGRiding in an improper position orplacing weight on the front passen-ger's seat when it is unoccupied bya passenger adversely affects theoccupant classification system(OCS).

(Continued)


883

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the center console.- Never sit on one side of the front

passenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash-board.

OVQ036013N

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load in thefront passenger seat or seatbackpocket.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front pas-senger seatback.

(Continued)

3 89


When an adult is seated in the front pas-senger seat, if the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator is on, turn the igni-tion key to "LOCK" and ask the passen-ger to sit properly (sitting upright with theseat back in an upright position, centeredon the seat cushion with their seat belton, legs comfortably extended and theirfeet on the floor). Restart the engine andhave the person remain in that positionfor about 30 seconds. This will allow thesystem to detect the person and toenable the passenger air bag. If the"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicatoris still on, turn the ignition key to "LOCK"and ask the passenger to sit properlyand restart the engine again.

If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator is still on, ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat.

✽✽ NOTICEThe "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-onds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position or after the engine isstarted. If the front passenger seat isoccupied, the occupant classificationsensor will then classify the front pas-senger within approximately 10 secondsafter the ignition is turned on.

B990A01O

Proper position

WARNINGDo not allow a passenger to ride inthe front seat when the “PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illu-minated, because the air bag willnot deploy in the event of a crash. Ifthe "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator remains illuminated afterthe passenger repositions them-selves properly and the car isrestarted, Hyundai recommendsthat passenger move to the rearseat because the passenger's frontair bag will not deploy.The “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”indicator will not change accordingto the occupants posture after thevehicle has been running for 30seconds. Front seat passengersmust stay properly seated to avoidserious injury from a deploying airbag. For more information seepage 3-86.

WARNINGDo not put a heavy load in the frontpassenger seatback pocket or onthe front passenger seat. Do nothang onto the front passenger seat.Do not hang any items such asseatback table on the front passen-ger seatback. Do not place feet onthe front passenger seatback. Donot place any items under the frontpassenger seat. Any of these couldinterfere with proper sensor opera-tion.


903

CAUTIONIf the occupant classification sys-tem is not working properly, theSRS air bag warning light on theinstrument panel will illuminatebecause the passenger's front airbags are connected with the occu-pant classification system. If thereis a malfunction of the occupantclassification system, the "PAS-SENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicatorwill not illuminate and the passen-ger's front air bags will inflate infrontal impact crashes even if thereis no occupant in the front passen-ger's seat. If the SRS air bag warn-ing light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the"ON" position, remains illuminatedafter approximately 6 secondswhen the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, or if it illuminateswhile the vehicle is being driven,have an authorized Hyundai dealerinspect the occupant classificationsystem and the SRS air bag systemas soon as possible.

(Continued)• If you change the weight on the

front passenger seat just after sit-in or restart of the engine, the"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator may be turned on or offfor a few seconds, disabling orenabling the passenger air bags.After the initial stage of about 30seconds, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator will not tog-gle.

• Do not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place any-thing on or attach anything suchas a blanket or after market seatheater to the front passengerseat.This can adversely affect theoccupant classification system.

• Do not sit on sharp objects suchas tools when occupying the frontpassenger seat.This can adverse-ly affect the occupant classifica-tion system.

• Do not use accessory seat coverson the front seats.

(Continued)

WARNING• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupationclassification system, neverinstall a child restraint system inthe front passenger's seat. Adeploying air bag can forcefullystrike a child resulting in seriousinjuries or death. Any child under13 years of age should ride in therear seat. Children too large forchild restraints should use theavailable lap/shoulder belts. Nomatter what type of crash, chil-dren of all ages are safer whenrestrained in the rear seat.

• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator is illuminatedwhen the front passenger's seatis occupied by an adult andhe/she sits properly (sittingupright with the seatback in anupright position, centered on theseat cushion with their seat belton, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor), havethat person sit in the rear seat.

(Continued)

3 91


Side impact air bag (if equipped)Your Hyundai is equipped with a sideimpact air bag in each front seat. Thepurpose of the air bag is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt alone.

(Continued)• Accident statistics show that chil-

dren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear, as opposedto the front seat. It is recommend-ed that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, includingan infant riding in a rear-facinginfant seat, a child riding in a for-ward-facing child seat and anolder child riding in a boosterseat.

• Air bags can only be used once –have an authorized Hyundai deal-er replace the air bag immediatelyafter deployment.

• A smaller-stature adult who is notseated correctly (for example:seat excessively reclined, leaningon the center console, or hipsshifted forward in the seat) cancause a condition where theadvanced frontal air bag systemsenses less weight than if theoccupant were seated properly(sitting upright with the seatbackin an upright position, centeredon the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on thefloor).

(Continued)

(Continued)This condition can result in anadult potentially being misclassi-fied and illumination of the "PAS-SENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator.

OVQ036310N

OVQ036900N


923

The side impact air bags are designed todeploy only during certain side-impactcollisions, depending on the crash sever-ity, angle, speed and point of impact. Theside impact air bags are not designed todeploy in all side impact situations.

(Continued)• Do not install any accessories on

the side or near the side impactair bag.

• Do not place any objects over theair bag or between the air bag andyourself.

• Do not place any objects (anumbrella, bag, etc.) between thefront door and the front seat.Such objects may become dan-gerous projectiles and causeinjury if the supplemental sideimpact air bag inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-ment of the side impact air bagthat may result in personal injury,avoid impact to the side impactsensor when the ignition key ison.

WARNING• The side impact air bag is supple-

mental to the driver's and the pas-senger's seat belt systems and isnot a substitute for them.Therefore your seat belts must beworn at all times while the vehicleis in motion. The air bags deployonly in certain side impact condi-tions severe enough to cause sig-nificant injury to the vehicle occu-pants.

• For best protection from the sideimpact air bag system and toavoid being injured by the deploy-ing side impact air bag, both frontseat occupants should sit in anupright position with the seat beltproperly fastened. The driver'shands should be placed on thesteering wheel at the 9:00 and3:00 positions. The passenger'sarms and hands should be placedon their laps.

• Do not use any accessory seatcovers.

• Use of seat covers could reduceor prevent the effectiveness ofthe system.

(Continued)

1VQA2079/1VQA2323

Side impact sensor

3 93


Curtain air bag (if equipped)Curtain air bags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors.They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupants andthe rear outboard seat occupants in cer-tain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed todeploy only during certain side impactcollisions, depending on the crash sever-ity, angle, speed and impact. The curtainair bags are not designed to deploy in allside impact situations, collisions from thefront or rear of the vehicle or in mostrollover situations.

OVQ036093N

OVQ036017N

WARNING• In order for side air bags (side

and curtain air bags) to provideits best protection, both front seatoccupants and both outboardrear occupants should sit in anupright position with the seatbelts properly fastened.Importantly, children should sit ina proper child restraint system inthe rear seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats, they must beseated in the proper childrestraint system. Make sure to putthe child restraint system as faraway from the door side as possi-ble, and secure the child restraintsystem in a locked position.

• Do not allow the passengers tolean their heads or bodies ontodoors, put their arms on thedoors, stretch their arms out ofthe window, or place objectsbetween the doors and passen-gers when they are seated onseats equipped with side airbags.

• Never try to open or repair anycomponents of the side curtainair bag system. This should onlybe done by an authorized Kiadealer.

Failure to follow the above men-tioned instructions can result ininjury or death to the vehicle occu-pants in an accident.


943

SRS CareThe SRS is virtually maintenance-freeand so there are no parts you can safelyservice by yourself. If the SRS "AIR BAG"warning light does not illuminate, or con-tinuously remains on, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by your Hyundaidealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or anywork on the steering wheel must be per-formed by a qualified Hyundai technician.Improper handling of the SRS systemmay result in serious personal injury.

WARNING• Do not install a child restraint

system in the front passengerseat position. A child restraintsystem must never be placed inthe front seat. The infant or childcould be severely injured by anair bag deployment in case of anaccident.

• Modification to SRS componentsor wiring, including the additionof any kind of badges to the padcovers or modifications to thebody structure, can adverselyaffect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-ers, use only a soft, dry cloth orone which has been moistenedwith plain water. Solvents orcleaners could adversely affectthe air bag covers and properdeployment of the system.

• No objects should be placed overor near the air bag modules on thesteering wheel, instrument panel,and the front passenger's panelabove the glove box, because anysuch object could cause harm if thevehicle is in a crash severe enoughto cause the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

1JBH3051

(Continued)• If the air bags inflate, they must

be replaced by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

• Do not tamper with or disconnectSRS wiring, or other componentsof the SRS system. Doing socould result in injury, due to acci-dental inflation of the air bags orby rendering the SRS inoperative.

• If components of the air bag sys-tem must be discarded, or if thevehicle must be scrapped, certainsafety precautions must beobserved. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and cangive you the necessary informa-tion. Failure to follow these pre-cautions and procedures couldincrease the risk of personalinjury.

• If your car was flooded and hassoaked carpeting or water onflooring, you shouldn't try to startthe engine; have the car towed toan authorized Hyundai dealer.

3 95


Additional safety precautions• Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat. All occupants shouldsit upright, fully back in their seats withtheir seat belts on and their feet on thefloor.

• Passengers should not move out ofor change seats while the vehicle ismoving. A passenger who is not wear-ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-gency stop can be thrown against theinside of the vehicle, against otheroccupants, or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed torestrain one occupant. If more thanone person uses the same seat belt,they could be seriously injured or killedin a collision.

• Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improveoccupant comfort or reposition the seatbelt can reduce the protection providedby the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

• Passengers should not place hardor sharp objects between them-selves and the air bags. Carryinghard or sharp objects on your lap or inyour mouth can result in injuries if anair bag inflates.

• Keep occupants away from the airbag covers. All occupants should situpright, fully back in their seats withtheir seat belts on and their feet on thefloor. If occupants are too close to theair bag covers, they could be injured ifthe air bags inflate.

• Do not attach or place objects on ornear the air bag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the front orside impact air bag covers could inter-fere with the proper operation of the airbags.

• Do not modify the front seats.Modification of the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of the sup-plemental restraint system sensingcomponents or side impact air bags.

• Do not place items under the frontseats. Placing items under the frontseats could interfere with the operationof the supplemental restraint systemsensing components and wiring har-nesses.

• Never hold an infant or child on yourlap. The infant or child could be seri-ously injured or killed in the event of acrash. All infants and children shouldbe properly restrained in appropriatechild safety seats or seat belts in therear seat.

Adding equipment to or modify-ing your air bag-equipped vehi-cle.If you modify your vehicle by changingyour vehicle's frame, bumper system,front end or side sheet metal or rideheight, this may affect the operation ofyour vehicle's air bag system.

WARNING• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to beshifted too close to a deployingair bag, strike the interior struc-ture or be thrown from the vehicleresulting in serious injury ordeath.

• Always sit upright with the seat-back in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion withyour seat belt on, legs comfort-ably extended and your feet onthe floor.


963

Why didn’t my air bag go off in acollision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditionsof the air bag)There are many types of accidents inwhich the air bag would not be expect-ed to provide additional protection.These include rear impacts, second orthird collisions in multiple impactaccidents, as well as low speedimpacts. In other words, just becauseyour vehicle is damaged and even if itis totally unusable, don’t be surprisedthat the air bags did not inflate.

Air bag collision sensors(1) SRS control module(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)(4) Side impact sensor (if equipped)

OEP036400/1VQA2081/OEP036080/1VQA2079/1VQA2323

3 97


Air bag inflation conditionsFront air bag Front air bags are designed to inflate in afrontal collision depending on the intensi-ty, speed or angles of impact of the frontcollision - generally from an area a littleto the left to a little to the right of straightahead.

1VQA2084

WARNING• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where air bagor sensors are installed.This may cause unexpected airbag deployment, which couldresult in serious personal injuryor death.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is altered inany way, the air bags may deploywhen they should not or they maynot deploy when they should,causing severe injury or death.Therefore, do not try to performmaintenance on or around the airbag sensors. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changeddue to the deformation of thefront bumper, body or B/C pillarwhere side collision sensors areinstalled. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

• Your vehicle has been designedto absorb impact and deploy theair bag(s) in certain collisions.Installing aftermarket bumperguards or replacing a bumperwith non-genuine parts mayadversely affect your vehiclescollision and air bag deploymentperformance.


983

Side impact air bags (if equipped)Side impact air bags (side and/or curtainair bags) are designed to inflate when animpact is detected by side collision sen-sors depending on the strength, speed orangles of impact resulting from a sideimpact collision or rollover.

Although the front air bags (driver’s andfront passenger’s air bags) are designedto inflate only in frontal collisions, theyalso may inflate in other types of colli-sions if the front impact sensors detect asufficient impact. Side impact air bags(side and/or curtain air bags) aredesigned to inflate only in side impactcollisions, but they may inflate in othercollisions if the side impact sensorsdetect a sufficient impact.If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimproved roadsor sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drivecarefully on unimproved roads or on sur-faces not designed for vehicle traffic toprevent unintended air bag deployment.To protect occupants, front air bags orpre-tensioner seat belts may deploy incertain side impact collisions.

Air bag non-inflation conditions• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags aredesigned not to deploy in such casesbecause they may not provide benefitsbeyond the protection of the seat beltsin such collisions.

OVQ036018N

OVQ036016N

1VQA2086

3 99


• Frontal air bags are not designed toinflate in rear collisions, because occu-pants are moved backward by theforce of the impact. In this case, inflat-ed air bags would not be able to pro-vide any additional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate in sideimpact collisions, because occupantsmove to the direction of the collision,and thus in side impacts, frontal air bagdeployment would not provide addi-tional occupant protection.However, side or curtain air bags mayinflate depending on the intensity, vehi-cle speed and angles of impact.

• In a slant or angled collision, the forceof impact may direct the occupants in adirection where the air bags would notbe able to provide any additional bene-fit, and thus the sensors may notdeploy any air bags.

1VQA2087 1VQA2089OVQ036018N


1003

• Just before impact, drivers often brakeheavily. Such heavy braking lowers thefront portion of the vehicle causing it to“ride” under a vehicle with a higherground clearance. Air bags may notinflate in this "under-ride" situationbecause deceleration forces that aredetected by sensors may be signifi-cantly replaced by such “under-ride”collisions.

• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-dents because air bag deploymentwould not provide protection to theoccupants.However, side air bags may inflatewhen the vehicle is rolled over by aside impact collision, if the vehicle isequipped with side impact air bags andcurtain air bags.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehiclecollides with objects such as utilitypoles or trees, where the point ofimpact is concentrated to one area andthe full force of the impact is not deliv-ered to the sensors.

1VQA2090 1VQA2091 1VQA2092

3 101


Air bag warning labelAir bag warning labels required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Seat Administration (NHTSA) are attached to alert driver andpassengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

OEP036401/OVQ036020N/1VQA2096/1VQA2097/1VQA2330

(if equipped)(if equipped)(if equipped)


1023

Power steeringPower steering uses energy from theengine to assist you in steering the vehi-cle. If the engine is off or if the powersteering system becomes inoperative,the vehicle may still be steered, but it willrequire increased steering effort.Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the power steer-ing checked by an Authorized HyundaiDealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the vehicle is parked for extendedperiods outside in cold weather (below14°F/-10°C), the power steering mayrequire increased effort when the engineis first started. This is caused byincreased fluid viscosity due to the coldweather and does not indicate a mal-function.When this happens, increase the engineRPM by depressing accelerator until theRPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release orlet the engine idle for two or three min-utes to warm up the fluid.

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION• Never hold the steering wheel

against a stop (extreme right orleft turn) for more than 5 secondswith the engine running. Holdingthe steering wheel for more than5 seconds in either position maycause damage to the power steer-ing pump.

• If the power steering drive beltbreaks or if the power steeringpump malfunctions, the steeringeffort will greatly increase.

3 103


Tilt steering A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjustthe steering wheel before you drive. Youcan also raise it to the highest level togive your legs more room when you exitand enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positionedso that it is comfortable for you to drive,while permitting you to see the instru-ment panel warning lights and gauges.

To change the steering wheel angle, pullup the lock release lever (1), adjust thesteering wheel to the desired angle (2),then release the lock-release lever tolock the steering wheel in place. Be sureto adjust the steering wheel to thedesired position before driving.

WARNING• Never adjust the angle of the

steering wheel while driving. Youmay lose your steering controland cause an accident that mayresult in serious injury or death.

• After adjusting, push the steeringwheel both up and down to becertain it is locked in position.

OVQ036021N


1043

Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust mirror angles beforedriving.Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearviewmirrors. The mirrors can be adjustedremotely with the remote switch. The mir-ror heads can be folded back to preventdamage during an automatic car wash orwhen passing in a narrow street.

Folding the outside rearview mirrorTo fold an outside rearview mirror, graspthe housing of the mirror and then fold ittoward the rear of the vehicle.

MIRRORS

WARNING - Rearview mir-rors

• The right outside rearview mirroris convex. Objects seen in themirror are closer than theyappear.

• Use your interior rearview mirroror direct observation to deter-mine the actual distance of fol-lowing vehicles when changinglanes.

CAUTIONDo not scrape ice off the mirrorface; this may damage the surfaceof the glass. If ice should restrictmovement of the mirror, do notforce the mirror for adjustment. Toremove ice, use a deicer spray, or asponge or soft cloth with very warmwater.

OVQ036022N

3 105


Outside rearview mirror heater (if equipped) The outside rearview mirror heater isactuated in connection with the rear win-dow defroster. To heat the outsiderearview mirror glass, push the button forthe rear window defroster.The rearview mirror heater (and rear win-dow defroster) will not operate unless theengine is running.The outside rearview mirror glass will beheated for defrosting or defogging andwill give you improved rear vision ininclement weather conditions. Push thebutton again to turn the heater off. Theoutside rearview mirror heater automati-cally turns off after 20 minutes.

Electric remote control The electric remote control mirror switchallows you to adjust the position of theleft and right outside rearview mirrors. Toadjust the position of either mirror, movethe selection switch lever (1) to R or L toselect the right side mirror or the left sidemirror, then press a corresponding point( ) on the mirror adjustment control toposition the selected mirror up, down, leftor right.After adjustment, put the selection switchlever into neutral position to prevent theinadvertent adjustment.

CAUTION• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-ing angles, but the motor contin-ues to operate while the switch isdepressed. Do not depress theswitch longer than necessary, themotor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-side rearview mirror by hand.Doing so may damage the mirror.

1VQA2108


1063

Automatic mirror adjustment in reversemaneuvers (if equipped)When the transaxle gear is shifted intoreverse (R), the outside rearview mir-ror(s) will automatically be turned down-ward about 5 degrees to improve drivervisibility. They will stay in that positionuntil the transaxle shift lever is shifted outof reverse (R).

Use the mirror selection switch lever tocontrol automatic mirror adjustment asfollows:

L : Both the left and right outsiderearview mirrors will be turneddownward about 5 degrees.

R : Only the right outside rearviewmirror will be turned downwardabout 5 degrees.

Center : Automatic mirror adjustmentfunction is disabled. No mirrorwill be turned downward.

The outside rearview mirror(s) will returnto its previous position automatically ifthe outside rearview mirror selectionswitch is changed to another position, ortransaxle shift lever is shifted out ofreverse (R).

(Examples) If the shift lever is shifted into reverse (R)when the outside rearview mirror selec-tion switch is in L, both the right and leftoutside rearview mirrors will automatical-ly be turned down about 5 degrees.If the outside rearview mirror selectionswitch is set to R while shift lever is inreverse (R), the left outside rearview mir-ror will return to its previous position. Theright outside rearview mirror will notreturn to it’s previous position.If the shift lever is shifted into any otherrange OR the outside rearview mirrorselection switch is set to center, the rightoutside rearview mirror will automaticallyreturn to its original position.

1VQA2109

3 107


Day/night rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror to center onthe view through the rear window. Makethis adjustment before you start driving.

Manual type Make this adjustment before you startdriving and while the day/night lever is inthe day position.Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce glare from the headlights of vehi-cles behind you during night driving.Remember that you lose some rearviewclarity in the night position.

Electric type The electric rearview mirror automatical-ly controls the glare from the headlightsof the car behind you in nighttime or lowlight driving conditions. The sensormounted in the mirror senses the lightlevel around the vehicle, and through achemical reaction, automatically controlsthe headlight glare from vehicles behindyou.When the engine is running, the glare isautomatically controlled by the sensormounted in the rearview mirror.Whenever the shift lever is shifted intoreverse (R), the mirror will automaticallychange to the brightest setting in order toimprove the driver’s view behind thevehicle.

WARNING - Rear visibilityDo not place objects in the rear seator cargo area which would interferewith your vision out the rear win-dow.

1VQA2105

Day Night

Day/Night lever

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the mirror, use apaper towel or similar materialdampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly onthe mirror as that may cause the liq-uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-ing and cause damage to the mirrorcomponents.


1083

Type ATo operate the electric rearview mirrorPress the ON/OFF button (1) to turn theautomatic- dimming function on. The mir-ror indicator light will illuminate.Press the ON/OFF button to turn theautomatic- dimming function off. The mir-ror indicator light will turn off.

Type B (with homelink wireless control system)To operate the electric rearview mirrorPress the I button (1) to turn the auto-matic- dimming function on. The mirrorindicator light will illuminate.Press the O button (2) to turn the auto-matic- dimming function off. The mirrorindicator light will turn off.

Conversation mirrorThe mirror is a convenient feature to helpthe front passenger talk with rear pas-sengers without turning the head or bodyrearward. To use the mirror, push thecover and open it.Adjust mirror angle to the desired posi-tion.Close the cover after use.

1KMA3084 1VQA2107

WARNINGDo not adjust the mirror angle ortalk with rear passengers whiledriving. You may lose your steeringcontrol and cause an accident thatmay result in severe personal injuryor death.

OVQ036025N

3 109


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer 2. Turn signal indicators3. Speedometer4. Engine temperature gauge5. Warning and indicator lights6. Shift position indicator

(Automatic transaxle only)7. Odometer/Trip odometer8. Fuel gauge

OVQ036026N/OVQ036027N

■■ Type A

■■ Type B


1103

Speedometer The speedometer indicates the forwardspeed of the vehicle.

Odometer/Trip odometerYou can choose the odometer, tripodometer A and trip odometer B bypressing the tripmeter mode button.

OdometerThe odometer indicates the total dis-tance the vehicle has been driven.

GAUGES

OVQ036028N OVQ036032N OVQ036035N

3 111


Trip odometerTRIP A: Trip odometer ATRIP B: Trip odometer BThe trip odometer indicates the distanceof individual trips selected by the driver.Trip odometer A and B can be reset to 0by pressing the reset button for 1 secondor more, and then releasing.

Tachometer The tachometer indicates the approxi-mate number of engine revolutions perminute (rpm).Use the tachometer to select the correctshift points and to prevent lugging and/orover-revving the engine.The tachometer pointer may move slight-ly when the ignition switch is in ACC orON position with the engine OFF. Thismovement is normal and will not affectthe accuracy of the tachometer once theengine is running.

Engine temperature gauge This gauge shows the temperature of theengine coolant when the ignition switchis ON.Do not continue driving with an overheat-ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, referto “Overheating” in the Index.

OVQ036030N

CAUTIONDo not operate the engine withinthe tachometer's RED ZONE.This may cause severe engine dam-age.

OVQ036031N

CAUTIONIf the gauge pointer moves beyondthe normal range area toward the“H” position, it indicates overheat-ing that may damage the engine.

OVQ036036N


1123

Fuel gaugeThe fuel gauge indicates the approxi-mate amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank.Fuel tank capacity : 21 US gallons (80 liters)The fuel gauge is supplemented by a lowfuel warning light, which will illuminatewhen the fuel tank is nearly empty.

Instrument panel illuminationWhen the vehicle’s parking lights or head-lights are on, rotate the illumination con-trol knob to adjust the instrument panelillumination intensity.The instrument cluster (Type B) illumina-tion intensity can be adjusted by rotatingthe control knob with the headlight switchin any position when the ignition switch isin ON position.

OVQ036033N

WARNING - Fuel gaugeRunning out of fuel can exposevehicle occupants to danger.You must stop and obtain addition-al fuel as soon as possible after thewarning light comes on or when thegauge indicator comes close to theE level.

1VQA2126

3 113


The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system thatdisplays information related to driving,including compass, distance to empty,driving time, average fuel consumptionand outside temperature on the displaywhen the ignition switch is in the ONposition. All stored driving information isreset if the battery is disconnected.

Mode selectionThe compass is always displayed untilthe display is turned off.Push the MODE button to select distanceto empty, driving time, average fuel con-sumption and outside temperature func-tions.

CompassThe vehicle compass displays the direc-tion the vehicle is heading.Heading display- E : East- W : West- S : South- N : Northex) NE : North East

TRIP COMPUTER (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2315Driving time (ET)

Average fuel consumption(AVG)

Outside temperature

OFF

Distance to empty (RANGE)

OVQ036037N


1143

✽✽ NOTICEPerform the calibration procedure for anew vehicle as follows.

Calibration procedureThe compass may not indicate the cor-rect compass direction when you aredriving in certain areas (tunnels, parkinggarages, underground parking lots, neartransformer substations, etc.), and thefollowing may occur:• The compass headings become inac-

curate.• The compass heading doesn't change

when the vehicle changes direction.• Some compass headings are not dis-

played.• The compass headings are inaccurate

in long distance driving.If the vehicle's compass headingsbecome inaccurate continuously, thecompass should be manually calibratedas follows:

1. Move the vehicle away from any largesteel structures or power generatingcables or equipment and into a safeopen location, such as an abandonedparking lot.

2. Check the terrestrial deviation anglevalue by pressing and holding theMODE button for 4.5 seconds until thecurrent terrestrial deviation anglevalue appears in the display.

3. If the terrestrial deviation angle valueis different for your country, set the cor-rect angle referring to “Setting thecompass zone” and perform the“Calibration procedure” again.

4. Make sure the vehicle windshieldwipers are turned off.

5. Press and hold the MODE buttonagain for 2~4.5 seconds until the “turn”appears and “DIR” blinks in the displayand release the button.

6. Drive your vehicle in at least 1 com-plete (either clockwise or counter-clockwise) circle at less than 3 mph (5km/h) within 10 minutes until the com-pass heading appears.

7. If the vehicle’s compass headingsbecome inaccurate again, repeatsteps 1 through 6 above.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you press the MODE button beforethe calibration is completed or the vehi-cle is not rotated within 10 minutes after“turn” appears and “DIR” blinks, thecorrection will be cancelled.

1VQA2316

3 115


Setting the compass zoneThis compass must be set to compen-sate for the variation between true northand magnetic north. To set the variation:1. Find your current location and terres-

trial deviation angle value on the zonemap.

2. Press and hold the MODE button for4.5 seconds. The current terrestrialdeviation angle value will appear in thedisplay.

3. Release the MODE button and pressthe RESET button repeatedly until thecorrect terrestrial deviation angle valuefor your location appears in the display.

4. Press and hold the MODE button formore than 1 second, and then the dis-play will show a compass direction.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you press the MODE button for lessthan 1 second before a new compasszone is set, the correction is cancelled.Also, if the correction is not completedwithin 30 seconds, the current terrestri-al deviation angle value will blink for 2seconds and the correction will be can-celled.

✽✽ NOTICE1. Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.

that is attached to the vehicle using amagnet, as anything attached to theroof of the vehicle with a magnet willeffect compass operation.

2. If the compass deviates from the cor-rect indication after repeated adjust-ment, have the compass checked at anauthorized dealer.

3. The compass may not indicate thecorrect compass point in tunnels orwhile driving up or down a steep hill.

(The compass returns to the correctcompass point when the vehicle movesto an area where the geomagnetism isstabilized.)

1VQA2317


1163

Compass zone map

3 117


Distance to empty (“RANGE”shown on display)This mode indicates the estimated dis-tance to empty based on the current fuelin the fuel tank and the amount of fueldelivered to the engine. When theremaining distance is below 30 miles (50km), a blinking “----” symbol will be dis-played.The meter’s working range is from 30 to1500 miles (50 to 1500 km).

✽✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-ed, the “Distance to empty” functionmay not operate correctly.The trip computer may not registeradditional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons(6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehi-cle.

• The fuel consumption and distance toempty values may vary significantlybased on driving conditions, drivinghabits, and condition of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an esti-mate of the available driving distance.This value may differ from the actualdriving distance available.

Driving time (“ET” shown on dis-play)This mode indicates the total time trav-eled since the last driving time reset.Even if the vehicle is not in motion, thedriving time keeps going while the engineis running.The meter’s working range is from0:00~99:59.Pressing the RESET button for less than4 seconds, when the driving time is beingdisplayed, clears the driving time to zero.

1VQA2319OVQ036039N


1183

Average fuel consumption (“AVG”shown on display)This mode calculates the average fuelconsumption from the total fuel used andthe distance since the last average con-sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-culated from the fuel consumption input.For an accurate calculation, drive morethan 0.3 miles (500 m).The meter's working range is from 0.0 to99.9 miles per gallon (0.0 to 99.9 l/100km).Pressing the RESET button for less than4 seconds, when the average fuel con-sumption is being displayed, clears theaverage fuel consumption to “- -” until thevehicle is moved to 0.3 miles (500 m).

Outside temperatureThis mode indicates the outside temper-ature around the vehicle.The meter’s working range is from -40°F~140°F (-40°C to 60°C).

Unit conversionThe unit on each mode can be changedby pushing the RESET button for morethan 4 seconds as follows:• Distance to empty: km ↔ MI• Average fuel consumption: l/100km ↔

MPG• Outside temperature: °C ↔ °FThe units on the mode of distance toempty and average fuel consumption arechanged together. However, the outsidetemperature mode display units arechanged separately.

1VQA2322OVQ036038N OVQ036040N

3 119


Checking operation All warning lights are checked by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). Any light that does not illuminateshould be checked by an AuthorizedHyundai Dealer.After starting the engine, check to makesure that all warning lights are off. If anyare still on, this indicates a situation thatneeds attention. When releasing theparking brake, the brake system warninglight should go off. The fuel warning lightwill stay on if the fuel level is low.

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.If this indicator does not go out, or if it illu-minates while the vehicle is being driven,see an authorized Hyundai Dealer forimmediate service.

Anti-lock brake system(ABS) warning light

This light illuminates if the key is turnedto ON and goes off in approximately 3seconds if the system is operating nor-mally.If the light stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS system. Contactan authorized Hyundai dealer as soon aspossible.

Electronic brake forcedistribution (EBD) sys-tem warning light

If two warning lights illumi-nate at the same time whiledriving, your vehicle has aproblem with the ABS andEBD system.In this case, your ABS system and regu-lar brake system may not work normally.Have the vehicle checked by anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer as soon aspossible.

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

WARNINGIf both ABS and Brake warninglights are ON and stay ON, yourvehicle’s brake system will not worknormally. So you may experience anunexpected and dangerous situa-tion during sudden braking. In thiscase, avoid high speed driving andabrupt braking. Have your vehiclechecked by Authorized HyundaiDealer as soon as possible.

AIRBAG


1203

Seat belt warning light

If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the key is turned ON or if it isunfastened after the key is turned ON,the seat belt warning light blinks until thebelt fastened.

Seat belt warning chime (if equipped)If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition key is turned ON or if itis unfastened after the key is ON, theseat belt warning chime will sound forapproximately 6 seconds. At this time, ifthe seat belt is fastened, the chime willstop at once.

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-lights are on and in the high beam posi-tion or when the turn signal lever is pulledinto the Flash-to-Pass position.

Engine oil pressurewarning

This warning light indicates the engine oilpressure is low.If the warning light illuminates while driv-ing:1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil asrequired.

If the warning light remains on afteradding oil or if oil is not available, call anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer.

Parking brake & brakefluid warning

Parking brake warning This light is illuminated when the parkingbrake is applied with the ignition switch inthe START or ON position. The warninglight should go off when the parkingbrake is released.Low brake fluid level warningIf the warning light remains on, it mayindicate that the brake fluid level in thereservoir is low.If the warning light remains on:1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and addfluid as required. Then check all brakecomponents for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks arefound, the warning light remains on orthe brakes do not operate properly.Have it towed to any AuthorizedHyundai Dealer for a brake systeminspection and necessary repairs.

CAUTIONIf the engine is not stopped imme-diately after the engine oil pressurewarning light is illuminated, severedamage could result.

3 121


To check bulb operation, check whetherthe parking brake and brake fluid warninglight illuminates when the ignition switchis in the ON position.

Parking brake warning chimeIf you drive over 6 mph (10 km/h) with theparking brake applied, the parking brakewarning chime will sound.

Front fog light indicator(if equipped)

This light comes on when the front foglights are ON.

Shift pattern indicators(if equipped)

The individual indicators illuminate toshow the automatic transaxle shift leverselection.

Charging system warning

This warning light indicates a malfunctionof either the generator or electricalcharging system.If the warning light comes on while thevehicle is in motion:1. Drive to the nearest safe location.2. With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break-age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-lem exists somewhere in the electricalcharging system. Have an AuthorizedHyundai Dealer correct the problem assoon as possible.

Tailgate openwarning light

This warning light comes on when thetailgate is not closed securely.

Door ajar warning light

This warning light illuminates when adoor is not closed securely with the igni-tion in any position.

Door ajar warning chime If a door or tailgate is opened while driv-ing the vehicle over 6 mph (10km/h), thewarning chime will sound.

WARNINGDriving the vehicle with a warninglight on is dangerous. If the brakewarning light remains on, have thebrakes checked and repaired imme-diately by an authorized HyundaiDealer.


1223

Immobilizer indicator (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the immobiliz-er key is inserted and turned to the ONposition to start the engine.At this time, you can start the engine.Thelight goes out after the engine is running.If this light blinks when the ignition switchis in the ON position before starting theengine, have the system checked by anauthorized Hyundai Dealer.

Low fuel level warning

This warning light indicates the fuel tankis nearly empty. When it comes on, youshould add fuel as soon as possible.Driving with the fuel level warning light onor with the fuel level below “E” can causethe engine to misfire and damage thecatalytic converter.

Malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) (checkengine light)This indicator light is part of the EngineControl System which monitors variousemission control system components. Ifthis light illuminates while driving, it indi-cates that a potential problem has beendetected somewhere in the emissioncontrol system.Generally, your vehicle will continue to bedrivable, but have the system checked byan authorized Hyundai Dealer promptly.

✽✽ NOTICE A loose fuel filler cap may cause the OnBoard Diagnostic System MalfunctionIndicator Light ( ) in the instrumentpanel to illuminate unnecessarily.Always make sure that the fuel filler capis tight.

Low washer fluid levelwarning indicator

This warning light indicates the washerfluid reservoir is near empty. Refill thewasher fluid as soon as possible.

CAUTION• Prolonged driving with the

Emission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light ( ) illuminated may causedamage to the emission controlsystems which could effect dri-vability and/or fuel economy.

• If the Emission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light ( )illuminates, potential catalyticconverter damage is possiblewhich could result in loss ofengine power. Have the EngineControl System inspected as soonas possible by an authorizedHyundai Dealer.

3 123


ESC indicator (Electronic StabilityControl) (if equipped)The ESC indicator will illuminate whenthe ignition switch is turned ON, butshould go off after approximately 3 sec-onds. When the ESC is on, it monitorsthe driving conditions and under normaldriving conditions, the ESC light willremain off. When a slippery or low trac-tion condition is encountered, the ESCwill operate, and the ESC indicator willblink to indicate the ESC is operating.

ESC OFF indicator (if equipped)

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turned ON,but should go off after approximately 3seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,press the ESC OFF button. The ESCOFF indicator will illuminate indicatingthe ESC is deactivated. If this indicatorstays on in the ESC ON mode, the ESCmay have a malfunction. Take your car tothe authorized Hyundai dealer and havethe system checked.

Cruise indicator (if equipped)CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise control system is enabled.

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise function switch (COAST/SET orRES/ACCEL) is ON.

Lights on warning chimeThe lights on warning chime will sound ifthe headlight switch is left in the 1st or2nd position and the driver’s door isopened.

Key reminder warning chimeIf the driver’s door is opened while theignition key is left in the ignition switch(ACC or LOCK position), the keyreminder warning chime will sound. Thisis to prevent you from locking your keysin the vehicle.

ESC

ESCOFF

CRUISE

SET


1243

Low tire pressure indi-cator

Low tire pressure position indicator

The low tire pressure and position indica-tors illuminate for 3 seconds after the igni-tion key is turned to the "ON" position.If the warning lights do not come on, orcontinuously remain on after the 3-secondbulb check when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position, the Tire PressureMonitoring System is not working properly.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby an authorized Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.This warning lights will also illuminate ifone or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. The low tire pressure posi-tion indicator light will indicate which tire issignificantly under-inflated by illuminatingthe corresponding position light.

You should stop and check your tires assoon as possible. If the warning lights illu-minate while driving, reduce vehicle speedimmediately and stop the vehicle. Avoidhard braking and overcorrecting at thesteering wheel. Inflate the tires to the prop-er pressure as indicated on the vehicle’stire information placard.

TPMS (Tire pressuremonitoring system)malfunction indicator

TPMS malfunction indicator illuminates for3 seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position.

If the warning light does not come on, orcontinuously remains on after the 3-sec-ond bulb check when you turned the igni-tion key to the "ON" position, the TirePressure Monitoring System is not work-ing properly. If this occurs, have your vehi-cle checked by an authorized Hyundaidealer as soon as possible.The warning light also comes on and stayson when there is a problem with the TirePressure Monitoring System.If this happens, the system may not moni-tor the tire pressure. Have the systemchecked by an authorized Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

TPMS

WARNINGSignificantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable and cancontribute to loss of vehicle controland increased braking distances.Continued driving on low pressuretires will cause the tires to overheatand fail. WARNING

• The TPMS cannot alert you tosevere and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors.

• If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator and slowly move to asafe position off the road.

3 125


INTERIOR LIGHTS

1VQA2141

1VQA2140

Main control switch

Map light

OFF Any ON OFF

Close ON OFF*2)

ON Any

Map lights operating logic

Main controlswitch status

Door open/close status

DOOR

Open orClose ➜ Open ON

Lamp turns ON, then turns OFF afterabout 20 minutes*1)

Open ➜ Close ON

ON

Lamp dims gradually overa 5-second period*3)

Map light switchON (depressed) DOOR (not depressed)

*1) If other door is opened while the light stays off after about 20 minutes, the light stays onagain for about 20 minutes.

*2) When a door is unlocked by the transmitter, the light stays on for about 30 seconds as longas any door is not opened. When the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position, the light stays on for about 15seconds.

*3) If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the light turns off immediately.

Map lightThe lights are turned ON or OFF based on the status of the doors, main control switchand corresponding light switch.


1263

1VQA2141

1VQA2142

1VQA2333

Dome light - center/rear

Main control switch

Dome light - center (if equipped)

OFF Any

Close ON OFF*2) OFF

ON Any

Dome lights operating logic

Main controlswitch status

Door open/close status

DOOR

Open orClose ➜ Open ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Lamp turns ON, then turns OFFafter about 20

minutes*1)

Lamp dimsgradually over

a 5-secondperiod*3)

Open ➜ Close

OFF

ON

Dome light switchON DOOR OFF

*1) If other door is opened while the light stays off after about 20 minutes, the light stays onagain for about 20 minutes.

*2) When a door is unlocked by the transmitter, the light stays on for about 30 seconds as longas any door is not opened. When the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position, the light stays on for about 15seconds.

*3) If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the light turns off immediately.

Dome lightThe lights are turned ON or OFF based on the status of the doors, main control switchand corresponding light switch.

3 127


1VQA2141

1VQA2311

Main control switch

Tailgate light

Open ON OFFClose

ON Any

Tailgate light operating logic

Main control switch status

Tailgate open/close status

DOOR

OFF

Open orClose ➜ Open

Lamp turns ON, then turns OFF after

about 20 minutesOFF

Close orOpen ➜ Close OFF

ON

OFF

Tailgate light switch

DOOR OFF

Tailgate light The lights are turned ON or OFF based on the status of the tailgate, main controlswitch and corresponding light switch.


1283

Door courtesy lamp (if equipped)The door courtesy lamp comes ON whenthe door is opened to assist entering orexiting the vehicle. It also serves as awarning to passing vehicles that the vehi-cle door is open.

Glove box lampThe glove box lamp comes ON when theglove box is opened.The parking lights or headlights must beON for the glove box lamp to function.

LIGHTING Battery saver function • The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the small light when the driverremoves the ignition key and opens thedriver- side door.

• With this feature, the parking lights willbe turned off automatically if the driverparks on the side of road at night.If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed, per-form the following :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on thesteering column.

OVQ036041N

OVQ036042N

Front

RearOVQ036043N

3 129


Rescue mode functionIf your vehicle has any problem on thevehicle network system, the headlights(low beam) and parking lights turn onautomatically with the ignition switch inthe ON position even though the head-light switch is not turned on. At this time,the emergency lighting is not turned offwhen the headlight switch is turned off.

Lighting controlThe light switch has a Headlight and aParking light position.To operate the lights, turn the knob at theend of the control lever to one of the fol-lowing positions:(1) OFF position(2) Parking light position(3) Headlight position(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Parking light position ( )When the light switch is in the parkinglight position (1st position), the tail, posi-tion, license and instrument panel lightsare ON.

CAUTIONIf the rescue mode occurs, haveyour vehicle checked by an author-ized Hyundai dealer as soon aspossible.

1VQA2129 1VQA2130


1303

CAUTION• Never place anything over sensor

(1) located on the instrumentpanel, this will ensure better auto-light system control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using awindow cleaner, the cleanser mayleave a light film which couldinterfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint orother types of coating on thefront windshield, the Auto lightsystem may not work properly.Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the headlightposition (2nd position) the head, tail,position, license and instrument panellights are ON.

Auto light position (if equipped)When the light switch is in the AUTO lightposition, the taillights and headlights willbe turned ON or OFF automaticallydepending on the amount of light outsidethe vehicle.

1VQA2131 1VQA2132

3 131


High - beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever away from you. Pull it backfor low beams.The high-beam indicator will light whenthe headlight high beams are switchedon.To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights on for aprolonged time while the engine is notrunning.

Flashing headlights To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the normal(low-beam) position when released. Theheadlight switch does not need to be onto use this flashing feature.

Turn signals (A)The ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn on theturn signals, move the lever up or down.Green arrow indicators on the instrumentpanel indicate which turn signal is oper-ating. They will self-cancel after a turn iscompleted. If the indicator continues toflash after a turn, manually return thelever to the OFF position.

1VQA2134 1VQA2133 1VQA2135


1323

Lane change signals (B)To signal a lane change, move the turnsignal lever slightly and hold it in position.The lever will return to the OFF positionwhen released.If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, one of theturn signal bulbs may be burned out andwill require replacement.

✽✽ NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormally quickor slow, a bulb may be burned out orthere may be a poor electrical connec-tion in the circuit.

Front fog light (if equipped) Fog lights are used to provide improvedvisibility and avoid accidents when visibil-ity is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc.The fog lights will turn on when the foglight switch (1) is turned to ON after theheadlights are turned on.To turn off the fog lights, turn the switchto OFF.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the ignitionswitch is turned ON.OFF : Wiper is not in operationINT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. Usethis mode in a light rain or mist. Tovary the speed setting, turn thespeed control knob(1). (S : slowoperation, F: fast operation)

OVQ03690N

CAUTIONWhen in operation, the fog lightsconsume large amounts of vehicleelectrical power. Only use the foglights when visibility is poor orunnecessary battery and generatordrain could occur.

OVQ036051N

3 133


LO : Normal wiper speedHI : Fast wiper speedMIST: For a single wiping cycle, push the

lever upward and release it withthe lever in the OFF position. Thewipers will operate continuously ifthe lever is pushed upward andheld.

✽✽ NOTICEIf there is heavy accumulation of snowor ice on the windshield, defrost thewindshield for about 10 minutes, oruntil the snow and/or ice is removedbefore using the windshield wipers toensure proper operation.

Auto control (if equipped)The rain sensor located on the upper endof windshield glass senses the amount ofrainfall and controls the wiping cycle forthe proper intervals. The more it rains,the faster the wiper operates. When therain stops, the wiper stops. To vary thespeed setting, turn the speed controlknob (1). (S : slow operation, F: fast oper-ation.)If the wiper switch is set in AUTO modewhen the ignition switch is ON, or thespeed control knob is turned toward theF position when the wiper switch is inAUTO mode, wiper will operate once toperform a self-check of the system. Setthe wiper to OFF position when the wiperis not in use.

OVQ036052N

CAUTION• When washing the vehicle, set the

wiper switch in the OFF positionto stop the auto wiper operation.

• The windshield wipers may oper-ate and be damaged if the switchis set in AUTO mode while wash-ing vehicle.

• Do not remove the sensor coverlocated on the upper end of thepassenger side windshield glass.Damage to system parts couldoccur and may not be covered byyour vehicle warranty.

• When the starting the vehicle inwinter, set the wiper switch in theOFF position. Otherwise, wipersmay operate and ice may damagethe windshield wiper blades.Always remove all snow and iceand defrost the windshield prop-erly prior to operating the wind-shield wipers.


1343

Variable intermittent wipersSet the lever to the INT/AUTO positionand choose the desired wiper interval byturning the ring.

One - touch wiper For a single wiping cycle, push the leverupward and release it with the lever in theOFF position.The wipers will operate continuously ifthe lever is pushed upward and held.

Windshield washers In the OFF position, pull the lever gentlytoward you to spray washer fluid on thewindshield and to run the wipers 1-3cycles.Use this function when the windshield isdirty.The spray and wiper operation will con-tinue until you release the lever.If the washer does not work, check thewasher fluid level. If the fluid level is notsufficient, you will need to add appropri-ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluidto the washer reservoir.The reservoir filler neck is located in thefront of the engine compartment on thepassenger side (see page 6-20).

CAUTIONWhen the ignition switch is ON andthe windshield wiper switch isplaced in the AUTO mode, use cau-tion in the following situations toavoid any injury to the hands orother parts of the body:• Do not touch the upper end of the

windshield glass facing the rainsensor.

• Do not wipe the upper end of thewindshield glass with a damp orwet cloth.

• Do not put pressure on the wind-shield glass.

CAUTION• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do notoperate the wipers when thewindshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiperarms and other components, donot attempt to move the wipersmanually.

OVQ036053N

3 135


Rear window wiper and washerswitch (if equipped)The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of the wiperand washer switch lever. Turn the switchto desired position to operate the rearwiper and washer.

- Spraying washer fluid and wipingOFF - Wiper is not in operationINT - Intermittent wiper operation ON - Normal wiper opertion

HORN

To sound the horn, press the area indi-cated by the horn symbol on your steer-ing wheel (see illustration). The horn willoperate only when this area is pressed.Check the horn regularly to be sure itoperates properly.

CAUTIONTo prevent possible damage to thewasher pump, do not operate thewasher when the fluid reservoir isempty.

WARNINGDo not use the washer in freezingtemperatures without first warmingthe windshield with the defroster;the washer solution could freeze oncontact with the windshield andobscure your vision.

OVQ036054N

CAUTION• Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist.• Do not press on the horn with a

sharp-pointed object.

1VQA2100


1363

The defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice from theinterior and exterior of the rear windowwhile engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster,press the rear window defroster buttonlocated in the center console switchpanel. The indicator on the rear windowdefroster button illuminates when thedefroster is ON.If there is heavy accumulation of snow onthe rear window, brush it off before oper-ating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automaticallyturns off after approximately 20 minutesor when the ignition switch is turned off.To turn off the defroster, press the rearwindow defroster button again.

Outside mirror defroster (if equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with an out-side mirror defroster, it will operate at thesame time as the rear window defroster.

DEFROSTER

OVQ036056N

OVQ036057N

Type A

Type B

CAUTION• To prevent damage to the con-

ductors bonded to the inside sur-face of the rear window, never usesharp instruments or windowcleaners containing abrasives toclean the window.

• If you want to defrost and defogon the front windshield, refer to“Windshield Defrosting andDefogging” in this section.

3 137


Front windshield deicer(if equipped)The engine must be running to enablethis feature. To activate the front wind-shield deicer, press the front windshielddeicer button. The indicator on the buttonilluminates when the deicer is ON. Thefront windshield deicer automaticallyturns off after approximately 20 minutesor when the ignition switch is turned off.To turn off the deicer, press the frontwindshield deicer button again.

The hazard warning flasher causes thefront and rear turn signal lights to flashon and off, which serves as a warning toother drivers to exercise caution whenapproaching or passing your vehicle.

To activate the flasher, depress the haz-ard warning flasher switch. This switchoperates in any ignition switch position.To turn the flashers off, depress theswitch again.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

OVQ036059N

OVQ036060N

Type A

Type B

❈ The location of the front windshield deicerbutton may be different depending on yourmodel.

OVQ036058N


1383

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OVQ036061N

1. Driver’s temperature control knob2. Passenger’s temperature control knob3. Front fan speed control knob4. Air conditioning button (if equipped)5. Air intake control button

6. Rear window defroster button7. Mode selection knob8. Rear temperature control button9. Rear fan speed control knob

3 139


Heating and ventilation (front)Fan speed control knobThe ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.The fan speed control knob allows you tocontrol the fan speed of the air flowingfrom the ventilation system. To changethe fan speed, turn the knob to the rightfor higher speed or left for lower speed.Setting the mode selection knob to theOFF position turns off the fan.

Air intake control button This is used to select outside (fresh) airposition or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control position,push the control button.

Recirculated air position The indicator light on thebutton is illuminated whenthe recirculated air positionis selected.With the recirculated airposition selected, air frompassenger compartmentwill be drawn through theventilation system and heat-ed or cooled according tothe function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position The indicator light on thebutton is not illuminatedwhen the outside (fresh) airposition is selected.With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside andis heated or cooled accord-ing to the function selected.

OVQ036062N OVQ036063N


1403

✽✽ NOTICEIt should be noted that prolonged oper-ation of the heating in recirculated airposition will cause fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the “recirculated airposition” selected, will result in exces-sively dry air in the passenger compart-ment.

Temperature control knobThe temperature control knob allows youto control the temperature of the air flow-ing from the ventilation system. Tochange the air temperature in the pas-senger compartment, turn the knob tothe WARM position for warm and hot airor COOL position for cooler air.• Turn the left knob to control the driver

side air temperature.• Turn the right knob to control the pas-

senger side air temperature.

WARNING• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside vehicle whichmay fog the glass and obscurevisibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with airconditioning or heating systemon. It may cause serious harm ordeath due to a drop in the oxygenlevel and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition can cause drowsiness orsleepiness, and loss of vehiclecontrol. Set the air intake controlto the outside (fresh) air positionas much as possible while driv-ing.

OVQ036064N

3 141


Mode selection knob The mode selection knob controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.The steps (•) between the air flow posi-tions adjust the direction of the air flow tothe middle position.

Outlet port locations

OVQ036065N

1VQA2147


1423

MAX/ A/C position When you select the MAXA/C mode while the fanspeed is on, the followingsystem settings will be madeautomatically;• the air conditioning system

will be turned on.• the recirculated air position

will be selected.• the face mode will be

selected.If you select MAX A/C mode,you will not be able to cancelthe A/C system operation, orchange the recirculated airmode position.Set the fan speed controlknob to the desired speedand rotate the temperaturecontrol knob to the COOLposition for maximum cool-ing. (outlet port : B, E)

Face position Air flow is directed toward theupper body and face.Additionally, each outlet canbe controlled to direct the airdischarged from the outlet.(outlet port: B, E)

Face - floor position Air flow is directed towardsthe face and the floor.(outlet port: B, C, E, F)

OFF positionThe fan is turned off.

Floor position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor, with a smallamount of the air beingdirected to the windshieldand side window defroster.(outlet port: A, C, D, E, F)

Floor - defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor and the wind-shield with a small amountdirected to the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: A, C, D, E, F)

Defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the windshield with asmall amount of air directedto the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: A, D, E)

Instrument panel ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The outletport (B, E) can be opened or closed sep-arately using the horizontal thumbwheel.To close the vent, rotate it left to the max-imum position. To open the vent, rotate itright to the desired position.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.

OFF

MAXA/C

1VQA2148

3 143


Air conditioning button (if equipped) Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-tioning system on (indicator light will illu-minate). Push the button again to turn theair conditioning system off.

1VQA2335/1VQA2168

■ Front

■ Rear

1. Rear fan speed control knob (from front seat)

2. Rear temperature control button(from front seat)

3. Rear fan speed control knob (from rear seat)

4. Rear mode selection button (from rear seat)

5. Rear temperature control button(from rear seat)

OVQ036066N


1443

Ventilation (rear)Temperature, fan speed and mode of therear climate control system can be con-trolled independently regardless of thefront climate control system operation.However, the front climate control systemshould be operated together for rear airconditioning as follows;1. Set the front fan speed to the desired

position.2. Push the air conditioning button.3. Set the rear temperature, fan speed

and mode to the desired position.Rear fan speed controlFrom front seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe desired position (except R and 0positions).To change the rear fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed or leftfor lower speed.Setting the knob to the OFF(0) positionturns off the rear fan.

From rear seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe R position and set the rear fan speedcontrol knob on the rear control panel tothe desired position.To change the rear fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed or leftfor lower speed.Setting the knob to the OFF(0) positionturns off the rear fan.

1VQA2170OVQ036067N

3 145


Rear temperature controlFrom front seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe desired position (except R and 0positions), and set the rear temperaturecontrol in the front climate control panelto the desired position.To change the rear air temperature, pushthe upper part ▲ of the button for warmerair or push the lower part ▼ of the buttonfor cooler air.The lights located to the right of the reartemperature control will illuminate to indi-cate the selected outlet temperaturerange.

From rear seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe R position and turn the rear tempera-ture control knob on the rear controlpanel to the desired position.To change the rear air temperature, turnthe knob to the right for warmer air or leftfor cooler air.

Rear mode selectionWhen the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel isin the any position (except R and 0 posi-tions), the rear mode is selected auto-matically depending on the mode of thefront climate control as follows:• Front climate control is MAX A/C,

or • :Rear air blows from the upper vents onthe rear ceiling.

• Front climate control is or • :Rear air blows from the upper vents onthe rear ceiling and the lower vents onthe right rear trim together.

• Front climate control is OFF, •, ,•, , •, :Rear air blows from the lower vents onthe right rear trim.

1VQA2172

1VQA2338

1VQA2174OVQ036068N


1463

When the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel isin the R position, the rear mode is select-ed by pushing the rear mode selectionbutton on the rear control panel as fol-lows:• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear ceiling.• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear ceiling and thelower vents on the right rear trimtogether.

• : Rear air blows from the lowervents on the right rear trim.

Rear ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe rear vents on the rear ceiling.The vent can be opened or closed sepa-rately using the control lever. To close thevent, move it to the close position ( ).To open the vent, move it to the openposition ( ).Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents by moving theblade.

System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

1VQA2173 1VQA2175

3 147


Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside



desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the modeto the or position.

Air conditioning (if equipped) All Hyundai Air Conditioning Systemsuse R-134a refrigerant which is not dam-aging to the ozone layer.1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.4. Set the temperature control to the


desired speed.6. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximumcomfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, setthe temperature control to the COOLposition, set the air intake control to therecirculated air position, then set thefan speed control to the highest speed.

CAUTION• When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the temperaturegauge closely while driving uphills or in heavy traffic when out-side temperatures are high. Airconditioning system operationmay cause engine overheating.Continue to use the blower fan byturning the air conditioning sys-tem off if the engine temperaturegauge indicates engine overheat-ing.

• When opening the windows inhumid weather, the air condition-ing system may cause condensa-tion inside the vehicle. Sinceexcessive condensation (water)may cause damage to electricalequipment, the air conditioningshould only be run with the win-dows closed.


1483

Air conditioning system operation tips • If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of win-dows on rainy humid days, decreasethe humidity inside the vehicle by oper-ating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed as theair conditioning compressor cycles on.This is a normal system operationcharacteristics.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth for a few minutes to ensuremaximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-tem, you may notice water dripping (orpuddling) on the ground under thepassenger side of the vehicle. This is anormal system operation characteris-tic.

• Operating the air conditioning systemin the recirculated air position doesprovide maximum cooling, however,continual operation in this mode maycause the air inside the vehicle tobecome stale.

Checking the amount of air con-ditioner refrigerant and compres-sor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant is low,the performance of the air conditioning isreduced. Overfilling also has negativeresult on the air conditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

WARNINGThe air conditioning system shouldbe serviced by an authorizedHyundai dealer. Improper servicemay cause serious injury.

CAUTIONWhen the performance of the airconditioning system is reduced it isimportant that the correct type andamount of oil and refrigerant isused. Otherwise, damage to thecompressor and abnormal systemoperation may occur.

3 149


AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. AUTO (automatic control) button

2. Driver’s temperature control button

3. A/C display

4. Passenger’s temperature control button

5. Dual temperature control selection button

6. Front fan speed control knob

7. Mode selection button

8. Front windshield defrost button

9. Recirculated air position button

10. Rear temperature control button

11. Rear fan speed control knob

12. System OFF button

13. Air conditioning button

14. Rear window defrost button

15. Outside air position button

OVQ036069N


1503

Automatic operationThe automatic climate control system iscontrolled by simply setting the desiredtemperature.The Full Automatic Temperature Control(FATC) system automatically controls theheating and cooling system as follows;

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicatedby AUTO on the display. The modes,fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-tioning will be controlled automaticallyby the temperature setting.

2. Push the TEMP button to set thedesired temperature.If the temperature is set to the lowestsetting LO (62°F/17°C), the air condi-tioning system will operate continu-ously.

3. To turn the automatic operation off,press any button except the tempera-ture control button. If you press themode selection button, air-conditioningbutton, defrost button, air intake con-trol button or fan speed knob, theselected function will be controlledmanually while other functions operateautomatically.

Regardless of the temperature setting,when using automatic operation, the airconditioning system can automaticallyturn on to decrease the humidity insidethe vehicle, even if the temperature is setto warm.

1VQA2156

CAUTIONNever place anything over the sen-sor located on the instrument panelto ensure better control of the heat-ing and cooling system.

OVQ036070N

3 151


Manual operation The heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually as well by pushingbuttons other than the AUTO button. Inthis case, the system works sequentiallyaccording to the order of buttons select-ed.When pressing any button except theAUTO button during automatic operation,the functions of the buttons not selectedwill be controlled automatically.Press the AUTO button in order to con-vert to full automatic control of the sys-tem. Temperature control button

The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum 90°F/32°C (HI) by pushing the upbutton. Each push of the button will causethe temperature to increase by 1°F/0.5°C.The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum 62°F/17°C (LO) by pushing the downbutton. Each push of the down button willcause the temperature to decrease by1°F/0.5°C. When set to the lowest tem-perature setting, the air conditioning sys-tem will operate continuously.

Dual temperature control selectionbuttonAdjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature individually 1. Press the DUAL button to operate the

driver and passenger side temperatureindividually. Pressing the right temper-ature control button will automaticallyswitch to the DUAL mode as well.

2. Press the left temperature control toadjust the driver side temperature.Press the right temperature control toadjust the passenger side tempera-ture.

OVQ036071N OVQ036072N


1523

Adjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature equally1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-

tivate DUAL mode. The passengerside temperature will be set to thesame as the driver side temperature.

2. Press the left temperature control but-ton. The driver and passenger sidetemperature will be adjusted equally.

Temperature conversionIf the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode dis-play will reset to Fahrenheit.This is normal condition. You can switchthe temperature mode betweenFahrenheit to Centigrade as follows;While depressing the AUTO button,depress the OFF button for 3 seconds ormore. The display will change fromFahrenheit to Centigrade, or fromCentigrade to Fahrenheit.

Fan speed control knobThe fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by turning the fan speed controlknob.The higher the fan speed is, the more airis delivered.Pressing the OFF button turns off thefan.

Air intake control button These are used to select outside (fresh)air position or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control position,push the desired control button.

OVQ036073N OVQ036074N

3 153


Recirculated air positionThe indicator light on the but-ton is illuminated when therecirculated air position isselected.With the recirculated air posi-tion selected, air from pas-senger compartment will bedrawn through the ventilationsystem and heated or cooledaccording to the functionselected.

Outside (fresh) air positionThe indicator light on the but-ton is illumimated when theoutside (fresh) air position isselected.With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside andis heated or cooled accordingto the function selected.

✽✽ NOTICEIt should be noted that prolonged oper-ation of the heating in recirculated airposition will cause fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the “recirculated airposition” selected, will result in exces-sively dry air in the passenger compart-ment.

Defrost button Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.(outlet port: A, D, E)

WARNING• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside vehicle which mayfog the glass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with airconditioning or heating system on.It may cause serious harm or deathdue to a drop in the oxygen leveland/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition can cause drowsiness orsleepiness, and loss of vehicle con-trol. Set the air intake control to theoutside (fresh) air position as muchas possible while driving.

OVQ036075N


1543

Mode selection button The mode selection button controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.The air flow outlet port is converted asfollows:

Outlet port locations1VQA2147

OVQ036076N

3 155


Face position Air flow is directed toward theupper body and face.Additionally, each outlet canbe controlled to direct the airdischarged from the outlet.(outlet port: B, E)

Face - floor position Air flow is directed towardsthe face and the floor.(outlet port: B, C, E, F)

Floor position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor, with a smallamount of the air beingdirected to the windshieldand side window defroster.(outlet port: A, C, D, E, F)

Floor - defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor and the wind-shield with a small amountdirected to the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: A, C, D, E, F)

Instrument panel ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The outletport (B, E) can be opened or closed sep-arately using the horizontal thumbwheel.To close the vent, rotate it left to the max-imum position. To open the vent, rotate itright to the desired position.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.

Air conditioning button Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-tioning system on (indicator light will illu-minate).Push the button again to turn the air con-ditioning system off.

1VQA2148 OVQ036077N


1563

OFF buttonPush the OFF button to turn off the air cli-mate control system.You can still operatethe mode and air intake buttons as longas the ignition switch is ON.

1VQH2167N/1VQA2168

■ Front

■ Rear

1. Rear fan speed control knob (from front seat)

2. Rear temperature control button(from front seat)

3. Rear fan speed control knob (from rear seat)

4. Rear mode selection button (from rear seat)

5. Rear temperature control button(from rear seat)

OVQ036078N

3 157


Ventilation (rear)Temperature, fan speed and mode of therear climate control system can be con-trolled independently regardless of thefront climate control system operation.However, the front climate control systemshould be operated together for rear airconditioning as follows;1. Set the front fan speed to the desired

position.2. Push the air conditioning button.3. Set the rear temperature, fan speed

and mode to the desired position.Rear fan speed controlFrom front seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe desired position (except R and 0positions).To change the rear fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed or leftfor lower speed.Setting the knob to the OFF(0) positionturns off the rear fan.

From rear seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe R position and set the rear fan speedcontrol knob on the rear control panel tothe desired position.To change the rear fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed or leftfor lower speed.Setting the knob to the OFF(0) positionturns off the rear fan.

1VQA2170OVQ036079N


1583

Rear temperature controlFrom front seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe desired position (except R and 0positions), and set the rear temperaturecontrol in the front climate control panelto the desired position.To change the rear air temperature, pushthe upper part ▲ of the button for warmerair or push the lower part ▼ of the buttonfor cooler air.

From rear seatSet the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel tothe R position and turn the rear tempera-ture control knob on the rear controlpanel to the desired position.To change the rear air temperature, turnthe knob to the right for warmer air or leftfor cooler air.

Rear mode selectionWhen the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel isin the any position (except R and 0 posi-tions), the rear mode is selected auto-matically depending on the mode of thefront climate control as follows:• Front climate control is :

Rear air blows from the upper vents onthe rear ceiling.

• Front climate control is :Rear air blows from the upper vents onthe rear ceiling and the lower vents onthe right rear trim together.

• Front climate control is , , : Rear air blows from the lower ventson the right rear trim together.

1VQA2172

1VQA2338

1VQA2174OVQ036080N

3 159


When the rear fan speed control (REAR)knob in the front climate control panel isin the R position, the rear mode is select-ed by pushing the rear mode selectionbutton on the rear control panel as fol-lows:• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear ceiling.• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear ceiling and thelower vents on the right rear trimtogether.

• : Rear air blows from the lowervents on the right rear trimtogether.

Rear ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe rear vents on the rear ceiling.The vent can be opened or closed sepa-rately using the control lever. To close thevent, move it to the close position ( ).To open the vent, move it to the openposition ( ).Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents by moving theblade.

System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside



desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside



desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode

to the or position.

1VQA2173 1VQA2175


1603

Air conditioning (Automatic system)All Hyundai Air Conditioning Systemsuse R-134a refrigerant which is not dam-aging to the ozone layer.1. Start the engine. Push the AUTO but-

ton.2. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

Air conditioning system operation tips • If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of win-dows on rainy humid days, decreasethe humidity inside the vehicle by oper-ating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed as theair conditioning compressor cycles on.This is a normal system operationcharacteristics.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth for a few minutes to ensuremaximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-tem, you may notice water dripping (orpuddling) on the ground under thepassenger side of the vehicle. This is anormal system operation characteris-tic.

• Operating the air conditioning systemin the recirculated air position doesprovide maximum cooling, however,continual operation in this mode maycause the air inside the vehicle tobecome stale.

CAUTION• When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the temperaturegauge closely while driving uphills or in heavy traffic when out-side temperatures are high. Airconditioning system operationmay cause engine overheating.Continue to use the blower fan byturning the air conditioning sys-tem off if the engine temperaturegauge indicates engine overheat-ing.

• When opening the windows inhumid weather, the air condition-ing system may cause condensa-tion inside the vehicle. Sinceexcessive condensation (water)may cause damage to electricalequipment, the air conditioningshould only be run with the win-dows closed.

3 161


Checking the amount of air con-ditioner refrigerant and compres-sor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant is low,the performance of the air conditioning isreduced. Overfilling also has negativeresult on the air conditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

WARNINGThe air conditioning system shouldbe serviced by an authorizedHyundai dealer. Improper servicemay cause serious injury.

CAUTIONWhen the performance of the airconditioning system is reduced it isimportant that the correct type andamount of oil and refrigerant isused. Otherwise, damage to thecompressor and abnormal systemoperation may occur.


1623

Manual climate control systemTo defog inside windshield 1. Select any fan speed.2. Select desired temperature.3. Select the or position.4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected

automatically.If the outside (fresh) air position are notselected automatically, press the corre-sponding button manually.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.3. Select the position.4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected

automatically.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

OVQ036082N

WARNINGDo not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature ofthe outside air and that of the wind-shield could cause the outer sur-face of the windshield to fog up,causing loss of visibility. In thiscase, set the mode selection knobto the position and fan speedcontrol knob to the lower speed.OVQ036081N

3 163


Automatic climate control systemTo defog inside windshield 1. Select desired fan speed.2. Select desired temperature.3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected automatically.If the outside (fresh) air position are notselected automatically, adjust the corre-sponding button manually.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set fan speed to the highest (extreme

right) position.2. Set temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will be

selected automatically.

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-perature control to the extreme highesttemperature setting and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired whiledefrosting or defogging, set the modeto the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield, rear window, out-side rear view mirrors, and all side win-dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hoodand air inlet in the cowl grill to improveheater and defroster efficiency and toreduce the probability of fogging upinside of the windshield.

OVQ036304N

WARNINGDo not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature ofthe outside air and that of the wind-shield could cause the outer sur-face of the windshield to fog up,causing loss of visibility. In thiscase, set the mode selection knobto the position and fan speedcontrol knob to the lower speed.OVQ036083N


1643

Defogging logicManual climate control systemTo reduce the probability of fogging upthe inside of the windshield, the air intakecontrol is set to the outside (fresh) airposition automatically if any of followingoccur.• The mode is selected to the , or

while the system is activated.• The ignition switch is turned on while

the mode is selected to the , or.

• The ignition switch is turned off.• The fan is off.• The fan begins to be operated.Press the air intake control button toselect the recirculated air position whilethe ignition switch is on.

How to cancel or return defogging logicof manual climate control system1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.2. Turn the mode selection knob to the

defrost position ( ).3. Push the air intake control button

( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-onds.

The indicator light in the air intake controlbutton ( ) will blink 3 times with 0.5second of interval. It indicates that thedefogging logic is canceled or returned tothe programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, it is reset as the defog logicstatus.

Automatic climate control systemTo reduce the probability of fogging upinside of the windshield, the air intakecontrol is set to outside (fresh) air posi-tion automatically if any of followingoccur.• The ignition switch is turned on while

the mode is selected to the , .• The OFF button is pushed.• The mode is selected to the or

position.Press the air intake control button toselect the recirculated air position whilethe ignition switch is on.

OVQ036084N

3 165


How to cancel or return defogging logicof automatic climate control system1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.2. Select the defrost position pressing

defrost button ( ).3. While holding the air conditioning but-

ton (A/C) pressed, press the air intakecontrol button ( ) at least 5 timeswithin 3 seconds.

The display panel blinks 3 times with 0.5second of interval. It indicates that thedefogging logic is canceled or returned tothe programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, it is reset as the defog logicstatus.

To keep items from shifting in the cargoarea, you can use the four holders locat-ed in the cargo area to attach the lug-gage net.Contact your authorized Hyundai dealerto obtain a luggage net.

OVQ036085N

LUGGAGE NET HOLDER (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2182


1663

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you canload cargo on top of your vehicle.Crossbars and fixing components need-ed to install the roof rack on your vehiclemay be obtained from an authorizedHyundai dealer.

ROOF RACK (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2206

CAUTION• The crossbars should be placed

in the proper load carrying posi-tions prior to placing items ontothe roof rack.

• If the vehicle is equipped with asunroof, be sure not to positioncargo onto the roof rack in such away that it could interfere withsunroof operation.

(Continued)

WARNING • The following specification is the

maximum weight that can beloaded onto the roof rack.Distribute the load as evenly aspossible across the crossbarsand roof rack and secure the loadfirmly.

• The vehicle center of gravity willbe higher when items are loadedonto the roof rack. Avoid suddenstarts, braking, sharp turns,abrupt maneuvers or high speedsthat may result in loss of vehiclecontrol or rollover causing anaccident.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Always drive slowly and turn cor-

ners carefully when carryingitems on the roof rack. Severewind updrafts, caused by passingvehicles or natural causes, cancause sudden upward pressureon items loaded on the roof rack.This is especially true when car-rying large, flat items.

• To prevent damage or loss ofcargo while driving, check fre-quently to make sure the items onthe roof rack are securely fas-tened.

CAUTION• If the vehicle has a sunroof, do

not position the roof rack loadsso that they could interfere withthe sunroof.

• Loading cargo or luggage abovespecification on the roof rack maydamage your vehicle.

(Continued)• When carrying cargo on the roof

rack, take the necessary precau-tions to make sure the cargo doesnot damage the roof of the vehicle.

• When carrying large objects onthe roof rack, make sure they donot exceed the overall roof lengthor width.

ROOF 165 lbs. (75 kg)RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

3 167


Your new mirror comes with an integrat-ed HomeLink Universal Transceiver,which allows you to program the mirror toactivate your garage door(s), estate gate,home lighting, etc. The mirror actuallylearns the codes from your various exist-ing transmitters.

Retain the original transmitter for futureprogramming procedures (i.e., new vehi-cle purchase). It is also suggested thatupon the sale of the vehicle, the pro-grammed HomeLink buttons be erasedfor security purposes (follow step 1 in the“Programming” portion of this text).

ProgrammingYour vehicle may require the ignitionswitch to be turned to the ACC positionfor programming and/or operation ofHomeLink. It is also recommended that anew battery be replaced in the hand-heldtransmitter of the device being pro-grammed to HomeLink for quicker train-ing and accurate transmission of theradio-frequency.Follow these steps to train yourHomeLink mirror:

HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING• When programming the

HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem, you may be operating agarage door or gate operator.Make sure that people and objectsare out of the way of the movingdoor or gate to prevent potentialharm or damage.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks thesafety stop and reverse feature asrequired by federal safety stan-dards. (This includes any garagedoor opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982.) A garagedoor opener which cannot detectan object, signaling the door tostop and reverse, does not meetcurrent federal safety standards.Using a garage door opener with-out these features increases riskof serious injury or death. Formore information, call 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

OVQ036305N

Glare detection sensorIndicator light

Homelink buttons


1683

1. When programming the buttons for thefirst time, press and hold the left andcenter buttons ( , ) simultane-ously until the indicator light begins toflash after approximately 20 seconds.(This procedure erases the factory-setdefault codes. Do not perform this stepto program additional hand-held trans-mitters.)

✽✽ NOTICEFor non rolling code garage door open-ers, follow steps 2 - 3. For rolling code garage door openers,follow steps 2 - 6. For Canadian Programming, please fol-low the Canadian Programming section.For help with determining whether yourgarage is non-rolling code or rollingcode, please refer to the garage dooropeners owner’s manual or contactHomeLink customer service at 1-800-355-3515.

2. Press and hold the button on theHomeLink system you wish to trainand the button on the transmitter whilethe transmitter is approximately 1 to 3inches away from the mirror. Do notrelease the buttons until step 3 hasbeen completed.

3. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light flashes rapidly, both but-tons may be released. (The rapid flash-ing light indicates successful program-ming of the new frequency signal.)

✽✽ NOTICESome gate operators and garage dooropeners may require you to replace step#3 with the “cycling” procedure noted inthe “Canadian Programming” sectionof this document.

OVQ036306N

Flashing

OVQ036307N

Flashing

1-3inc

hes

Transmitter

3 169


Rolling code programmingTo train a garage door opener (or otherrolling code equipped devices) with therolling code feature, follow these instruc-tions after completing the “Programming”portion of this text. (A second personmay make the following training proce-dures quicker & easier.) 4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on

the device’s motor head unit. Exactlocation and color of the button mayvary by product brand. If there is diffi-culty locating the “learn” or “smart” but-ton, reference the device’s owner’smanual or contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

5. Press and release the “learn” or“smart” button on the device’s motorhead unit. You have 30 seconds tocomplete step number 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly pressand release the programmedHomeLink button up to three times.The rolling code equipped deviceshould now recognize the HomeLinksignal and activate when theHomeLink button is pressed. Theremaining two buttons may now beprogrammed if this has not previouslybeen done. Refer to the“Programming” portion of this text.

Operating HomeLink To operate, simply press the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Activationwill now occur for the trained product(garage door, security system, entry doorlock, estate gate, or home or office light-ing). For convenience, the hand-heldtransmitter of the device may also beused at any time. The HomeLinkWireless Controls System (once pro-grammed) or the original hand-heldtransmitter may be used to activate thedevice (e.g. garage door, entry door lock,etc.). In the event that there are still pro-gramming difficulties, contact HomeLinkat 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

Erasing programmed HomeLinkbuttonsTo erase the three programmed buttons(individual buttons cannot be erased):• Press and hold the left and center

buttons simultaneously, until the indi-cator light begins to flash (approxi-mately 20 seconds). Release both but-tons. Do not hold for longer than 30seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)mode and can be programmed at anytime.

OVQ036306N

Flashing


1703

Reprogramming a singleHomeLink buttonTo program a device to HomeLink usinga HomeLink button previously trained,follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. Do NOT release until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inchesaway from the HomeLink surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-mitter button (or press and “cycle” - asdescribed in “Canadian Programming”above).

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light begins to flash rapidly,release both buttons.

The previous device has now beenerased and the new device can be acti-vated by pushing the HomeLink buttonthat has just been programmed. This pro-cedure will not affect any other pro-grammed HomeLink buttons.

Gate operator programming &canadian programmingDuring programming, your hand-heldtransmitter may automatically stop trans-mitting. Continue to press and hold theHomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4in the “Programming” portion of this text)while you press and re-press (“cycle”)your handheld transmitter every two sec-onds until the frequency signal has beenlearned. The indicator light will flashslowly and then rapidly after several sec-onds upon successful training.

AccessoriesIf you would like additional information onthe HomeLink Wireless Control System,HomeLink compatible products, or topurchase other accessories such as theHomeLink® Lighting Package, pleasecontact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 oron the internet at www.homelink.com.




CAUTIONIf programming a garage dooropener or gate, it is advised tounplug the device during the“cycling” process to prevent possi-ble motor burn-up. WARNING

The HomeLink transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC andDOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifi-cations not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.IC: 4112104541A Gentex MODEL/FCC ID: NZLSTDHL3

3 171


These compartments can be used tostore small items required by the driveror passengers.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

WARNING - Flammablematerials

Do not store cigarette lighters,propane cylinders, or other flamma-ble/explosive materials in the vehi-cle. These items may catch fireand/or explode if the vehicle isexposed to hot temperatures forextended periods.

CAUTION• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storagecompartment.

• Always keep the storage com-partment covers closed whiledriving. Do not attempt to placeso many items in the storagecompartment that the storagecompartment cover can not closesecurely.

1VQA2197/1VQA2313/1VQA2192/1VQA2314/1VQA2193


1723

Center console storage (if equipped)These compartments can be used tostore small items required by the driveror front passenger.

FrontCups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

CenterThe center compartment can be lockedand unlocked with a master key.To open the center compartment, makesure it is unlocked, then pull the lever andraise the cover.To remove the bucket, lift it upward.

RearTo open the rear compartment, pull thelever and the compartment will automati-cally open. Close the compartment afteruse.

The center console storage can beremoved and reinstalled.To remove the storage, pull up the frontportion slightly while pressing the releaselever and move it forward.To reinstall the storage, insert the reartap on the bottom of the storage into therear hole on the floor, put the front por-tion slightly on the floor while pressingthe release lever and release the lever.Make sure the compartment is locked inplace.

1VQA2194 1VQA2195 1VQA2196

3 173


Glove boxThe glove box can be locked andunlocked with a master key.To open the glove box, make sure it isunlocked, then pull the handle (1) andthe glove box will automatically open (2).Close the glove box after use.

WARNINGNever leave the removed centerstorage console in the vehicleunsecured. The storage consolecan be thrown about in the vehiclein a sudden stop or an accidentcausing serious injuries or death tothe vehicle occupants. Alwaysmake sure the storage console islocked in place.

1VQA2191

CAUTIONSince key is not fully inserted intothe center console storage key set,do not apply excessive force. Doingso may damage the parts.

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the center console storagecover closed while driving.


1743

Sunglass holder To open the sunglass holder, press thecover and the holder will slowly open.Place your sunglasses in the compart-ment door with the lenses facing out.Push to close.

Side table (if equipped)The side table is located on the inner por-tion of the passenger’s seat.To use the table, pull the table all the wayup until it locks into place. Verify the tableis locked by trying to push it down. If thetable moves down, it is not locked prop-erly.You can extend it by pulling the rear por-tion backward.To fold down the table, pull up the releaselever and press down the edge of thetable.

1VQA2198 OVQ036339

CAUTIONSince key is not fully inserted intothe glove box key set, do not applyexcessive force. Doing so may dam-age the parts.

WARNING To reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the glove box door closedwhile driving.

CAUTIONMake sure the sunglass holder isclosed while driving.

3 175


Cigarette lighter (if equipped)To operate the cigarette lighter, press it inand release it. When it is heated, it auto-matically pops out ready for use.If the engine is not running, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACC or ON positionfor the lighter to operate.

Ashtray (if equipped)To use the ashtray, press the cover andrelease it.To remove the ashtray to empty or cleanit, lift it upward and pull it out.

INTERIOR FEATURES

1VQA2185 1VQA2186

CAUTION• Do not hold the lighter in after it is

already heated because it willoverheat.

• Only a genuine Hyundai lightershould be used in the cigarettelighter socket. The use of plug-inaccessories (shavers, hand-heldvacuums, and coffee pots, forexample) may damage the socketor cause electrical failure.

• If the lighter does not pop outwithin 30 seconds, remove it toprevent overheating.

WARNING - Ashtray use• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays

as waste receptacles.• Putting lit cigarettes or matches

in an ashtray with other com-bustible materials may cause afire.


1763

Cup holder

FrontTo use the cup holders, pull the cup hold-er cover out. Push the cover to close afteruse.

Center (if equipped)Cups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.The storage can be removed and rein-stalled.To remove the storage, pull up the rearportion slightly after moving the lockingtab to the unlock position and move itrearward.To reinstall the storage, insert the fronttab on the bottom of the storage into thefront hole on the floor, put the rear por-tion on the floor and move the locking tabto the lock position. Make sure the com-partment is locked in place.

WARNING - Hot liquids• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder whilethe vehicle is in motion. If the hotliquid spills, you could be burned.Such a burn to the driver couldcause a loss of control of thevehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of sudden stopor collision, do not place uncov-ered or unsecured bottles, glass-es, cans, etc., in the cup holderwhile the vehicle is in motion.

1VQA2199

CAUTIONDo not place heavy cups or cans incup holders. Cup holders could bedamaged.

OVQ036234N

3 177


RearCups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

Shopping bag holder FrontTo use the holder, push the lower portion.

Rear✽✽ NOTICEDo not hang heavy bags as they maydamage the holder.

1VQA2202

CAUTIONDo not hang a bag weighing morethan 7 lbs. (3 kg). It may cause dam-age to the shopping bag holder.

OVQ036090N OVQ036308N


1783

CAUTION - Vanity mirror (if equipped)

Close the vanity mirror coversecurely and return the sunvisor toits original position after use. If thevanity mirror is not closed securely,the lamp will stay on and couldresult in battery discharge and pos-sible sunvisor damage.

Clothes hanger SunvisorUse the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.To use the sunvisor for a side window,pull it downward, unsnap it from thebracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).Adjust the sunvisor extension forward orbackward (3).To use the vanity mirror, pull down thevisor and pull up the mirror cover (4).

1VQA2201

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the hook, donot hang heavy clothing on theclothes hanger.

OVQ036233N

3 179


1VQA2188

1VQA2190

Front (Type B)

Rear1VQA2188A

1VQA2189

Front (Type A)

Center (if equipped)

CAUTION• Use power outlet only when the

engine is running and remove theaccessory plug after use. Usingthe accessory plug for prolongedperiods of time with the engineoff could cause the battery to dis-charge.

• Only use 12V electric accessorieswhich are less than 10A in elec-tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner orheater to the lowest operatinglevel when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interferencewhen plugged into a vehicle’spower outlet. These devices maycause excessive audio static andmalfunctions in other electronicsystems or devices used in yourvehicle.(1) : Can be used when the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position.

(2), (3), (4) : Can be used regardless of the ignition switch position.

Power outletThe power outlets are designed to provide power for mobile telephones or otherdevices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices shoulddraw less than 10 amps with the engine running.


1803

Digital clockWhenever the battery terminals or relat-ed fuses are disconnected, you mustreset the time.When the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position, the clock buttons operate asfollows:

• HOUR:Pressing the “H” button with your fin-ger, a pencil or similar object willadvance the time displayed by onehour.

• MINUTE:Pressing the “M” button with your fin-ger, a pencil or similar object willadvance the time displayed by oneminute.

• RESET:To clear the minutes display, press the“R” button with your finger, a pencil orsimilar object. Then the clock will beset precisely on the hour.For example, if the “R” button ispressed while the time is between 9:01and 9:29, the display will be reset to9:00.9:01 ~ 9:29 display changed to 9:009:30 ~ 9:59 display changed to 10:00

To change the 12 hour format to the 24hour format, press the “R” button formore than 5 seconds.For example, if the “R” button is pressedfor more than 5 seconds while the time is10:15 p.m., the display will be changed to22:15.

Glass antennaWhen the radio power switch is turned onwhile the ignition key is in either the ONor ACC position, your car will receiveboth AM and FM broadcast signalsthrough the antenna in the rear windowglass or quarter glass.

OVQ036092N

ANTENNA

OEP036210

CAUTION• Do not clean the inside of the rear

window glass or quarter glasswith a cleaner or use a scraper toremove any foreign deposits asthis may cause damage to theantenna elements.

• Avoid adding metallic coatingsuch as Ni, Cd, and so on. Thesecan interfere with AM/FM recep-tion.

3 181


Remote audio control buttons are provid-ed on the steering wheel.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not operate audio remote controlbuttons simultaneously.

MODEPress the MODE button to select Radio,Tape (if equipped) or CD (compact disc).

MUTE• Pull the MUTE button to deactivate the

sound.• Once again pull the MUTE button to

reactivate the sound.

VOL (▲/▼) • Press the VOL (▲) button to increase

volume.• Press the VOL (▼) button to decease

volume.

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

1VQA2343


1823

How car audio worksAM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located around yourcity.They are intercepted by the radio anten-na on your car. This signal is then receivedby the radio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to yourvehicle may not be strong and clear. Thiscan be due to factors such as the dis-tance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the pres-ence of buildings, bridges or other largeobstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broadcasts.This is because AM radio waves aretransmitted at low frequencies. Theselong, low frequency radio waves can fol-low the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmos-phere. In addition, they curve aroundobstructions so that they can provide bet-ter signal coverage.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at highfrequencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FMbroadcasts generally begin to fade atshort distances from the station. Also,FM signals are easily affected by build-ings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening con-ditions which might lead you to believe aproblem exists with your radio. The fol-lowing conditions are normal and do notindicate radio trouble:

AUDIO SYSTEM

♬♩♪

JBM001

♬♩♪ ♬♩♪

JBM002 JBM003

FM reception AM reception FM radio station

3 183


• Fading - As your car moves away fromthe radio station, the signal will weakenand sound will begin to fade. When thisoccurs, select another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between the trans-mitter and your radio can disturb thesignal causing static or fluttering nois-es to occur. Reducing the treble levelmay lessen this effect until the distur-bance clears.

• Station Swapping - As a FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency maybegin to play. This is because yourradio is designed to lock onto the clear-est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-er station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signalsbeing received from several directionscan cause distortion or fluttering. Thiscan be caused by a direct and reflect-ed signal from the same station, or bysignals from two stations with closefrequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition haspassed.

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio When a cellular phone is used inside thevehicle, noise may be produced from theaudio equipment. This does not meanthat something is wrong with the audioequipment. In such a case, use the cellu-lar phone at a place as far as possiblefrom the audio equipment.

✽✽ NOTICESome states and cities have regulationsprohibiting the use of cell phones whiledriving. You should be aware of the spe-cific requirements in your area.

♬♩♪

JBM004 JBM005WARNING

Hyundai recommends that younever use a cell phone while driv-ing.This could result in loss of con-trol, and an accident that may causedeath, serious injury, or propertydamage. You must stop at a safeplace to use a cellular phone.


1843

Care of cassette tapes (if equipped)• Because the thickness of a cassette

tape with the total playback time ofover 60 minutes (C-60) are too thin, wesuggest that you do not use any ofthem to avoid having tapes being tan-gled.

• To achieve better sound quality, period-ically clean the tape head using a cot-ton stick with colorless alcohol (onceper month).

• If a tape is too loose, fasten it to reel bywinding with objects like a pencil.

• Because dust or foreign objects on acassette tape may damage the play-back head, always store tapes in theircases when not in use.

• Make sure cassette tapes are keptaway from magnetic devices (TV,stereo system, etc) in order to achievebetter sound quality.

• Be certain that no objects or substancesother than cassette tapes are insertedinto the cassette tape player.

• Because tape media can be distortedwhen exposed to direct sunlight, Donot leave cassette tapes on the seats,dashboard or near the back wind-shield.

Care of disc (if equipped)• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows for ventilationbefore using your car audio.

• It is illegal to copy and useMP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE files withoutpermission(If equipped with M465, useonly MP3/WMA, If equipped with M445,use only CD-DA). Use CDs that are cre-ated only by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents such asbenzene and thinner, normal cleanersand magnetic sprays made for ana-logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs bythe edges or the edges of the centerhole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece of softcloth before playback (wipe it from thecenter to the outside edge).

• Do not damage the disc surface orattach pieces of sticky tape or paperonto it.

• Make sure nothing other than CDs areinserted into the CD player (Do notinsert more than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use toprotect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may not operatenormally according to manufacturingcompanies or making and recordingmethods. In such circumstances, if youstill continue to use those CDs, theymay cause a malfunction of your audiosystem.

✽✽ NOTICE - Playing anIncompatible Copy-ProtectedAudio CD

Some copy-protected CDs, which do notcomply with international audio CDstandards, may not play on your caraudio. Please note that if you try to playcopy protected CDs and the CD playerof your car audio is not performing toyour expectation, this may be caused bythose CDs and not a defect in the deviceitself.

3 185


1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND (AM/FM) Select Buttons

3. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button

5. SCAN Button

6. EQUILIZER (EQ) Button

7. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

JBM445UR

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)


1863

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob• The radio unit may be operated when

the ignition key is in the “ACC”or “ON”position. Press the knob to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in radio mode, and displaysthe CD track in CD mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.

• Push the FM/AM or CD to turn on thatfunction without pushing the PowerON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME ControlRotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND SelectorFM Selection Button Pressing the button changesbetween the FM1 and FM2 bands.

AM(MW, LW) Selection Button Pressing the button selects theAM band. AM mode is displayed on theLCD.

3. TUNE Select/AUDIO ControlKnob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.

Mode Select KnobPressing the TUNE knob changes theBASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADERand BALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.After selecting each mode, rotate themode select knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.

BASS ControlTo increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MID-RANGE ControlTo increase the MID-RANGE, rotate theknob clockwise, while to decrease theMID-RANGE, rotate the knob counter-clockwise.

TREBLE ControlTo increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TRE-BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

FADER ControlRotate the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated). Whenthe control knob is turned counterclock-wise, front speaker sound will be empha-sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counterclockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).

4. AUTO SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, the unitwill automatically tune to the next higherfrequency and when the side ispressed, it will automatically tune to thenext lower frequency.AM

FM

3 187


5. SCAN ButtonWhen you Press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel isreceived automatically.To stay on a station, press the SCANbutton again.

6. EQUILIZER (EQ) ButtonPress the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFFMODE for the desired tone quality. Eachpress of the button changes the displayas follows;

7. PRESET STATION SelectButtons

Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2respectively can be preset in the elec-tronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing the AM/FM band select buttons and/or one of thesix station select buttons, you may recallany of these stations instantly.

To program the stations, follow thesesteps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set the bandfor AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to be storedby seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to access thatstation.

• Press and hold the station select but-ton for more than 1 second. A selectbutton indicator will show in the displayindicating which select button you havedepressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored into thememory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 18 sta-tions can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM stations per but-ton.

• When completed, any preset stationmay be recalled by selecting AM, FM1or FM2 band and the appropriate sta-tion button.

CAUTION• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. The audio sys-tem mechanism may be damagedif you spill them.

• Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system; damageto the system mechanisms couldoccur.

CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF


1883

1. CD Select Button

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button

3. FF/REW Button

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

5. SCAN (BSM) Button

6. CD EJECT Button

7. RANDOM (RDM) Button

JBM445NA

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)

3 189


1. CD Select Button• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation.• When a disc is in the CD deck, if you

press the CD button the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio player isbeing used.

• The CD player can be used when theignition switch is in either the “ON” or“ACC” position.

• Push the CD button to turn on thatfunction without pushing the PowerON-OFF control knob.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the

label side or the recording side of anydiscs, as it may cause a malfunction.

• The unit cannot play a CD-R(Recordable CD) and CD-RW(Rewritable CD) that is not final-ized. Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information onfinalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not beplayed on this unit.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button• The desired track on the disc currently

being played can be selected using thetrack number.

• Press button once to skip forward tothe beginning of the next track.Press within a second after play-back begins to quickly move backwardthrough a CD.If you press after more than a sec-ond, it will take you to the beginning ofthe track you are now listening to.

3. FF/REW Button If you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, push andhold the FF or REW button.When you release the button, the com-pact disc player will resume playing.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button• To repeat the track you are currently

listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press it again.

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn thePower OFF then ON.

5. SCAN Button• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track, press the SCAN button.• Press the SCAN button again within 10

sec. when you have reached thedesired track.

6. CD EJECT ButtonWhen the button is pressed with a CDloaded, the CD will eject.Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,press this button for more than 3 sec-onds.(Do this only when a CD is jammed andyou can not eject it in the normal way -e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2CDs by mistake)

7. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith the random function, you can listento the tracks in random, rather thansequential order.To use the random function, do the fol-lowing:Press the RDM button to listen to record-ed tracks in random sequence. PressRDM again to cancel or turn the powerOFF then ON.The unit defaults to playingtracks in sequential order.


1903

✽✽ NOTICE• To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.

• When replacing the audio unit fuse,replace it with a fuse having the cor-rect capacity.

• All stored stations are all erased whenthe car battery is disconnected orpower to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks station presetswill have to be reset.

• This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery systemwith negative ground.

• This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to disassemble oradjust any parts.

• When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

• Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and CD) to water orexcessive moisture.

CAUTION• Do not insert warped or poor

quality discs into the CD playeras damage to the unit may occur.

• Do not insert anything like coinsinto the player slot as damage tothe unit may occur.

• Do not place beverages close tothe audio system. The playbackmechanism may be damaged ifyou spill them.

• Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system, damageto the system mechanisms couldoccur.

• Off-road or rough surface drivingmay cause the compact disc toskip. Do not use the compact discwhen driving in such conditionsas damage to the compact discface could occur.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not attempt to grab or pull the

compact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unitby the self-loading mechanism.Damage to the audio unit andcompact disc could occur.

• Avoid using home-recorded com-pact discs in your audio unit.Original compact discs are rec-ommended for best results.

3 191



2. AUDIO Select Button

3. BAND Select Button

4. SCAN Button



7. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control knob

8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

JBM455UR



1923



the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"position. Press the button to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in the radio mode, the tapedirection indicator in the tape mode orCD/MP3 track in the CD/MP3 mode. Toswitch the power off, press the buttonagain.

• Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3 toturn on that function without pushingthe Power ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. AUDIO Select ButtonPressing the AUDIO button changes theBASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADERand BALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the dis-play.After selecting each mode, rotate theAudio control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.




FADER ControlTurn the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated). Whenthe control knob is turned counterclock-wise, front speaker sound will be empha-sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counter clockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).

3. BAND Select ButtonPressing the FM/AM button changes theAM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The modeselected is shown on the display.

4. SCAN ButtonWhen you press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel isreceived automatically.To stay on a station, press the SCAN but-ton again.



Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, the unitwill automatically tune to the next higherfrequency and when the side ispressed, it will automatically tune to thenext lower frequency.

3 193


7.TUNE Select/Audio Control KnobRotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.



HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing theAM/FM band select button and/or one ofthe six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. Toprogram the stations, follow these steps:

• Press AM/FM selector to set the bandfor AM, FM1 and FM2.

• Select the desired station to be storedby seek or manual tuning.

• Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to access thatstation.

• Press and hold the station select buttonfor more than 0.8 seconds. A select but-ton indicator will show in the display indi-cating which select button you havedepressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored in to thememory.You should then release the but-ton, and proceed to program the nextdesired station. A total of 18 stations canbe programmed by selecting one AM andtwo FM stations per button.



the audio system. The playbackmechanism may be damaged ifyou spill them.



1943

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

2. TAPE EJECT Button

3. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS) Button

4. FF/REW Button


6. DOLBY Button


JBM455UR

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M455) (IF EQUIPPED)

3 195


1. TAPE PROGRAM Button• This allows you to play the reverse side

of the tape by merely depressing theprogram button. An arrow will appear inthe display to show tape direction.

• Push the TAPE button while the tape isin the tape deck to turn on that functionwithout pushing the Power ON-OFFcontrol knob.

2. TAPE EJECT Button• When the button is pressed with a

cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.• When the button is pressed during

FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS)Button

Press the button to find the starting pointof each song in a prerecorded musictape. The quiet space between songs(must have at least 4 sec. gap) can beidentified by the AUTO MUSIC SEARCHbutton.

• Pressing the button will play thebeginning of the next music segment.

• Pressing the button will start replayat the beginning of the music just lis-tened to.

• To stop FF or REW action, press thebutton again.

4. FF/REW Button• Forward tape winding starts when the

FF button is pressed during PLAY orREW mode.

• Tape PLAY starts when the FF buttonis pressed again during FF mode.

• Tape rewinding starts when the REWbutton is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

• Tape PLAY starts when the REW but-ton pressed again during REW mode.


listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press again.

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn thepower OFF then ON.

6. DOLBY ButtonIf you get background noise during tapeplay, you can reduce this considerably bymerely pressing the DOLBY button. Ifyou want to cancel the DOLBY feature,press the button again.




1963




• The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have tobe set again if this should occur.

• Do not add any oil to the rotatingparts. Keep magnets, screwdriversand other metallic objects away fromthe tape mechanism and head.



(Continued)

(Continued)• When driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

• Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.

CAUTION• Do not insert anything like coins

into the player slot as damage tothe unit may occur.



3 197


1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button


3. FF/REW Button



6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

7. SCROLL Button


9. CD EJECT Button

10. SCAN Button

11. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

12. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR) Button

JBM455UR

COMPACT DISC PLAYER (M455) (IF EQUIPPED) - Compatible with mp3/wma/aac/wave


1983

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button• Insert the CD with the label facing

upward.• Insert the CD to start CD playback,

during radio operation or cassette tapeplayback.

• If you press the CD button while a discis in the CD deck, the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio or cas-sette player is being used.





• The unit can play a multi-session CD-R (recordable CD) and CD-RW(rewritable CD) that consists of morethan two sessions.Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information onfinalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not beplayed on this unit.

✽✽ NOTICEPlayback of MP3, AAC and WMA fileformats are supported. Load to playtime for these formats may be longerdue to the compressed nature of thesediscs.



• Press button once to skip forwardto the beginning of the next track.Press within a second after play-back begins to quickly move backwardthrough a CD.If you press after more than a sec-ond, it will take you to the beginning ofthe file you are now listening to.

3. FF/REW Button If you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, push andhold the FF or REW button.When you release the button, the com-pact disc player will resume playing.


listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press it again.

• To repeat the music within selectedfolder, press the RPT button for morethan 1 second. To cancel, press itagain. (MP3 CD only)

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn the powerOFF then ON.

5. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith random, you can listen to the tracksin random, rather than sequential order.To use random, do the following:• Press the RDM button to listen to

recorded tracks in random sequence.Press RDM again to cancel or turn thepower OFF then ON. The unit defaultsto playing tracks in sequential order.

• To listen to the music within the select-ed folder in random order, press theRDM button within a second. To can-cel, press it again or turn the powerOFF then ON. (MP3 CD only)

3 199


6. BOOKMARK (MARK) ButtonWhen the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can be book-marked by using the MARK button.(MP3CD only)

• Press the MARK button for more than1 second to bookmark the desiredtrack.“M” will be displayed on the LCD and“MEMORY(1~50)” will display forapproximately five seconds with beepsound.To play a bookmarked track, press theMARK button within 1 second andselect the bookmarked track to play.

• To erase a bookmarked track, pressthe MARK button for more than 1 sec-ond. The unit will beep once when thebookmark is erased.

✽✽ NOTICETracks stored on Mark Memory will beautomatically erased after you eject CDsthat contain those tracks.

7. SCROLL ButtonPress the button, and you can check thefile names with more than 16 characterson MP3 CD(max 34 characters.).

The button doesn’t work on file namesless than 16 characters.


9. CD EJECT ButtonWhen the button is pressed with a CDloaded, the CD will eject.Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,press this button for more than 3 sec-onds.(Do this only when a CD is jammed andyou can not eject it in the normal way -e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2CDs by mistake)

10. CD SCAN Button• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track, press the SCAN buttonmore than 1 second.

• To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track in the selected folder, pressthe SCAN button within 1 second.(MP3 CD only)

• Press the SCAN button again within 10sec. when you have reached thedesired track.

11. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Select Knob)

• You can skip the track (file) by turningthe FILE SEARCH knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.After selecting the desired track (file),press the FILE SEARCH knob to play-back the track (file).If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within five seconds, the searchwill stop.

12. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR)Button

• You can move through the folder bypushing the DIR button to up ( ) anddown( ).

• After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to play back inthe selected folder. If you do not pressthe FILE SEARCH knob within 5 sec-onds, the folder searching function willbe released. It can not be operated in asingle folder.



2003




• All stored CD bookmarks are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected or power to the vehicle is lost.If this occurs, the bookmarks willhave to be reset.










• Off-road or rough surface drivingmay cause the compact disc toskip. Do not use the compact discwhen driving in such conditionsas damage to the compact discface could occur.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not attempt to grab or pull the

compact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unitby the self-loading mechanism.Damage to the audio unit andcompact disc could occur.

• Avoid using recorded compactdiscs in your audio unit. Originalcompact discs are recommendedfor best results.

3 201



2. BAND Select Button

3. AUDIO Select Button

4. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob


6. SCAN Button

7. EQUILIZER (EQ) Button or AUX Button

8. PRESET Station Select Buttons

(or Button)

JBM465UR



2023


the ignition key is in the "ACC" or “ON”position. Press the knob to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in the radio mode, the tapedirection indicator in the tape mode orCD/MP3 track in the CD/MP3 mode orCD AUTO CHANGER mode. To switchthe power off, press the knob again.

• Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3 toturn on that function without pushingthe Power ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME ControlRotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND Select ButtonPressing the FM/AM button changes theAM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The modeselected is shown on the display.

3. AUDIO Select ButtonPressing the AUDIO button changes theBASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADER,BALANCE and SURROUND ON/OFFmode. The mode selected is shown on thedisplay.

After selecting the each mode, rotate theAudio control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.




FADER ControlRotate the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated). Whenthe control knob is turned counterclock-wise, front speaker sound will be empha-sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counterclockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).

4. TUNE Select/AUDIO ControlKnob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the frequency.


Press the AUTO SEEK select button.When the side is pressed, the unitwill automatically tune to the next higherfrequency and when the side ispressed, it will automatically tune to thenext lower frequency.

6. SCAN ButtonWhen you press the button, frequency ischanged and the next channel isreceived automatically.To stay on a station, press the SCAN but-ton again.

3 203


7. EQUILIZER (EQ) Button orAUXILARY (AUX) Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFFMODE for the desired tone quality. Eachpress of the button changes the displayas follows;

• If the button is labeled AUX, it willchange to AUX mode when you pressthe button, and the button has no EQfunction.

• The AUX button is functional only ifRear Seat Entertainment (RSE) unit ison.

• You can enjoy the RSE audio throughthe speakers in AUX mode.

• The speaker volume level is adjustableby VOLUME(+,-) key, on RSE unit orwireless remote control.

* Refer to the “RSE” in this section fordetails RSE operation.

* RSE : Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem(A/V).



HOW TO PRESET STATIONSSix AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing the AM/FM band select button and/or one of thesix station select buttons, you may recallany of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:• Press AM/FM selector to set the band

for AM, FM1 and FM2.• Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.• Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access thatstation.

• Press and hold the station select but-ton for more than 1 second. A selectbutton indicator will show in the displayindicating which select button you havedepressed. The frequency display willflash after it has been stored into thememory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 18 sta-tions can be programmed by selectingone AM and two FM stations per but-ton.




the audio system. The audio sys-tem mechanism may be damagedif you spill them.



2043

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

2. TAPE EJECT Button

3. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS) Button

4. FF/REW Button


6. DOLBY Button

7. EQUILIZER (EQ) Button or AUXILARY

(AUX) Button

JBM465UR

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M465) (IF EQUIPPED)

(or Button)

3 205


1. TAPE PROGRAM Button• This allows you to play the reverse side

of the tape by merely depressing theprogram button. An arrow will appear inthe display to show tape direction.

• Push the TAPE button while the tape isin the tape deck, to turn on that func-tion without pushing the Power ON-OFF control knob.

2. TAPE EJECT Button• When the button is pressed with a

cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.• When the button is pressed during

FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS)Button

Press the button to find the starting pointof each song in a prerecorded musictape. The quiet space between songs(must have at least 4 sec. gap) can beidentified by the AUTO MUSIC SEARCHbutton.

• Pressing the button will play thebeginning of the next music segment.

• Pressing the button will start replayat the beginning of the music just lis-tened to.

• To stop FF or REW action, press thebutton again.

4. FF/REW Button• Forward tape winding starts when the

FF button is pressed during PLAY orREW mode.

• Tape PLAY starts when the FF buttonis pressed again during FF mode.

• Tape rewinding starts when the REWbutton is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

• Tape PLAY starts when the REW but-ton pressed again during REW mode.


listening to, press the RPT button. Tocancel, press again.

• If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn thepower OFF then ON.

6. DOLBY ButtonIf you get background noise during tapePLAY, you can reduce this considerablyby merely pressing the DOLBY button. Ifyou want to cancel the DOLBY feature,press the button again.




• The AUX button is functional only ifRSE unit is on.







2063




• The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have tobe set again if this should occur.

• Do not add any oil to the rotatingparts. Keep magnets, screwdriversand other metallic objects away fromthe tape mechanism and head.



(Continued)

(Continued)• When driving your vehicle, be sure to

keep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.


CAUTION• Do not insert anything like coins

into the player slot as damage tothe unit may occur.



3 207


1. LOAD Button

2. Playing CD Button

3. CD EJECT Button


5. SCROLL Button

6. FF/REW Button

7. EQUILIZER (EQ) Button or AUX Button

8. SCAN Button

9. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button



12. DISC UP/DOWN Button

13. FILE SEARCH Knob

(TUNE Select Knob)

14. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR) Button

JBM465UR

COMPACT DISC PLAYER/CD AUTO CHANGER OPERATION (M465) (IF EQUIPPED)- Compatiable with MP3/WMA

(or Button)


2083

1. LOAD ButtonThis compact disc player will accommo-date up to six compact discs.To insert multiple discs into the player,perform the following:

1.Press and release the LOAD Button.2.Green light on the slot will be illuminat-

ed and the lowest number of emptyslot will blink on the display.After “WAIT” is displayed on the LCD,the slot will open with “INSERT” dis-played on the LCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull the disc in.

When the disc is inserted, the disc willbegin to play automatically.

✽✽ NOTICE• The disc can be only inserted while the

green light is blinking on the slot.• This CD player is suitable only for 12

centimeter discs, do not use irregularshaped CDs.

To insert multiple discs do the followings:1.Press and hold the LOAD button for

one second or more.You will then hear a beep sound andthe green light on the slot will be illumi-nated, and the numbers of empty discwill blink on the display.

2.After “WAIT” is displayed on the LCDwith the lowest number of empty slotblinking, the slot will open with “INSERT”displayed on the LCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The player will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the numbersof the empty disc will blink on the dis-play continuously.If the next “DISC NO.” is displayed whenthe slot is illuminated, you can then loadanother disc.

4.Load the remaining disc by followingthe same procedures 1 and 2. Whenyou finished loading 6 discs, the CDplayer will begin to play the last CDloaded.

5.To load more than one disc but lessthan six, complete Steps 1 and 2.

When you have finished loading discs,press LOAD button to cancel the loadingfunction or wait for 10 seconds. The CDplayer will begin to play the last CDloaded. As each CD starts to play, theDISC number will appear on the display.

✽✽ NOTICEThe disc player takes up to six discs. Donot try to load more than six.

2. Playing CD Button• Press the CD Button to start CD play-

back, during radio operation or cas-sette tape playback.

• When discs are in the CD deck, if youpress the CD button, the CD player willbegin playing even if the radio or cas-sette player is being used.





• The unit can play a multi-session CD-R (recordable CD) and CD-RW(rewritable CD) that consists of morethan two sessions.Please refer to the manual of CD-R/CD-RW recorder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information onfinalization process.

• Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not playon this unit.

3 209


✽✽ NOTICEPlayback of MP3 and WMA file formatsare supported. Load to play time forthese formats may be longer due to thecompressed nature of these discs.

3. CD EJECT Button• When the button is pressed with a

CD loaded, the CD will eject.• To eject all of the discs, press this but-

ton for one second or more.



• Press once to skip forward to thebeginning of the next track.

• Press once to skip back to thebeginning of the track.

• Press before playback begins toquickly move backward through a CD.

5. SCROLL ButtonPress the button, and you can check the filenames with more than 16 characters onMP3 CD(max 34 characters).The button doesn’t work on file namesless than 16 characters.

6. FF/REW ButtonIf you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, push andhold the FF or REW button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.




• The AUX button is functional only ifRSE unit is on.





8. SCAN Button• To playback the first 10 seconds of

each track, press the SCAN buttonmore than 1 second.

• To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track in the selected folder, pressthe SCAN button within 1 second.(MP3 CD only)

• Press the SCAN button again within 10sec. when you have reached thedesired track.



2103

9. BOOKMARK (MARK) ButtonWhen the CD player unit is operating, thedesired track on the disc can be book-marked by using the MARK button.

• Press the MARK button for more than1 second to bookmark the desiredtrack.“M” will be displayed on the LCD and“MEMORY(1~50)” will display forapproximately five seconds with beepsound.To play the bookmarked tracks, pressthe MARK button within 1 second andselect the bookmarked track to play.

• To erase a bookmarked track, press theMARK button for more than 1 second.The unit will beep once when the book-mark is erased.

If you want to delete all tracks stored onMark Memory, press FILE SEARCHKnob in the Mark Play mode for morethan 0.8 seconds. You will hear a beepsound and all tracks will be deleted fromMark Memory with “MARK DELETE ALL”displayed on the LCD.

✽✽ NOTICETracks stored on Mark Memory will beautomatically erased after you eject CDsthat contain those tracks.


listening to, press the RPT button.To cancel, press it again.

• To repeat the music within selectedCD, press the RPT button for morethan 1 second.To cancel, press it again for more than1 second.

• To repeat the music within currentlyplayed folder, press the RPT button formore than 1 second.To cancel, press it again(MP3 CDonly).

• If you do not release RPT operationafter all the tracks are played back, theunit will play back again from the firsttrack.This process will be continued until youpush the button again or turn the powerOFF then ON.

11. RANDOM (RDM) ButtonWith random, you can listen to the tracksin random, rather than sequential orderon one disc.

To use random, do the following:

• Press the RDM button to listen torecorded tracks in random sequence.Press RDM again to cancel or turn thepower OFF then ON. The unit defaultsto playing tracks in sequential order.

• To listen to the music within the select-ed folder in random order, press theRDM button within a second. To can-cel, press it again or turn the powerOFF then ON. (MP3 CD only)

12. DISC UP/DOWN Button• By pressing "DISC "/"DISC "

while CD changer is playing you canmove backward or forward to the nextdisc and playback automaticallybegins.

• If any of the slots do not contain a CD,your car audio will skip the empty slotand play only those that contain a CD.When switching CD’s, the LCD dis-plays the selected CD’s number.

3 211


13. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Select Knob)

• You can skip the track (file) by turningthe FILE SEARCH knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.After selecting the desired track (file),press the FILE SEARCH knob to play-back the track (file).If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within five seconds, the searchwill stop.

14. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR)Button

• You can move through the folder bypushing the DIR button to up ( ) anddown( ).

• After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to play back inthe selected folder. If you do not pressthe FILE SEARCH knob within 5 sec-onds, the folder searching function willbe released. It can not be operated in asingle folder.




• Stored CD bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehicle is lost. If thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have to bereset.










• Off-road or rough surface drivingmay cause the compact disc toskip. Do not use the compactdisc when driving in such condi-tions as damage to the compactdisc face could occur.

• Do not attempt to grab or pull thecompact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unitby the self-loading mechanism.Damage to the audio unit andcompact disc could occur.

• Avoid using home-recorded com-pact discs in your audio unit.Original compact discs are rec-ommended for best results.


2123

The Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System is a compact, built-in, easy-to-useentertainment system designed to providefamily fun while you are on the road. Enjoygreat quality sound from the 11 speakers,or have a private, quiet viewing with thewireless headphones.The display unit is mounted to the ceilingin the rear passenger area of the vehicle,allowing rear-seat passengers to playDVD movies, video CDs or music CDs.Users may also plug in a game platform orVHS player. Headphones, game car-tridges and other accessories can be keptneatly out of the way in the 3rd-row arm-rest compartment.

System OverviewThe RSE System includes a mountedcolor monitor with a built-in audio/videocontrol panel and a DVD player. It alsoincludes a remote control and two (2)sets of battery-operated wireless head-phones.

Connections / SetupThe RSE system is designed to makeyour time on the road more enjoyable.Please follow these instructions carefullyto get the most out of your RSE.

✽✽ NOTICERSE operation is prevented during thefirst 2 seconds after the ignition switch isturned to ignition on or accessory mode.

REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM / DVD PLAYER (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION• Refrain from using food or drinks

near the RSE, the wireless head-phones or the remote control.

• Direct sunlight may interfere withthe headphone's operation andperformance.

• Normal RSE operation cannot beguaranteed with duplicated discs.

• In order to prevent inadvertentbattery discharge, the RSE willremain in standby mode whenignition switch is turn to ignitionON or accessory mode.

• Use of rear seat entertainmentsystem without the engine run-ning will reduce battery power.

CAUTIONDisclaimer: The RSE system is pro-grammed to the regional displayformats for your region (NTSC orPAL). Please note that your RSE willnot read DVDs from a differentregion.

3 213


Viewing/Adjusting the MonitorTo view the monitor, locate the latch onthe bottom center of the mounted unitand pull it forward. This will release themonitor from its locked, stow-away posi-tion. Use your hands to adjust the moni-tor into optimal viewing position. Do nottouch the LCD panel itself to avoid dam-age or smudging.

To close the monitor, pull the bottomedge forward and push it up until it clicksinto the stow-away position.

HeadphonesThe RSE comes with two (2) sets of wire-less headphones and four (4) AAA 1.5Vbatteries. Install the batteries by openingthe compartment on the right side of theheadphones. Each set of headphonesrequires two (2) AAA 1.5V batteries.

RES_OPEN_8111

RES_CLOSED_8111

HEADPHONE8112

HEADPHONE8111

Folded

Spread

Close

Open


2143

To turn the headphones on, push the but-ton (➊) once. Push the button again toturn the headphones off. The red LEDindicator on the headphone identifies theOn/Off status. The power status indicatoris located on the left headphone.The sound level of the headphones iscontrolled by the volume up[down] knob(➋) located on the side of the head-phones.The headphones can be stored by fold-ing the headphones.

✽✽ NOTICE• Conserve the energy of your batteries

by turning the headphones off whenthey are not in use. The on/off buttonis located on the left side of the head-phones.

• The headphone has an automaticshutoff feature if an IR signal fromthe RSE units is not received after 20seconds. This feature is used to pre-vent inadvertent battery dischargingof the headphones.

• The life cycle of headphone's batteryis approximately 48 hours.

• In case of poor reception perform-ance, check the battery condition.

• The headphones are best used within2-6 feet (0.6-1.8 m) of the RSE unit.Getting too close or too far away willcause poor audio reception.

• Audio from the vehicle's CD/radiocannot be heard through the head-phones.

Audio Via Vehicle SpeakersTo hear the audio from the RSE throughthe vehicle's speakers, the RSE must beselected by the Head Unit in the front ofthe vehicle. To select the RSE, pressAUX button. To end the RSE audiothrough the vehicle’s speakers, pressAUX button again. When RSE is de-selected by the Head Unit, the head-phones can still be used to hear audio.

HEADPHONE8112 ICDX_VQ-465_1

3 215


Connecting Other Devices to the RSEElectronic devices such as video gamesystems, VHS players, Camcorder or etc,can be played through the RSE. Theseexternal devices can be connected to theunit via RCA plugs available throughoutthe vehicle. DC power for additional elec-tronic equipment is provided by one of the12-volt power outlets located in the dash,third row and cargo areas. Additional infor-mation can be found in the vehicle manu-al.Press the SOURCE (SRC) Button toswitch to the externally connected device.(AUX mode)

The RSE unit has an automatic videodetection feature that will automatic switchto external device when the device isplugged into the auxiliary jacks in the vehi-cle.Once the RSE has switched to the exter-nal device, you can make your selectionsby using the buttons on the externaldevice. The RSE controls will not work forexternal devices. For example, to select avideo game after the RSE has recognizedthe source, you must use the game con-trols, not the RSE controls, to choose aselection.The RSE unit will automatically switch tothe RSE mode when the external device isunplugged from the auxiliary jacks.The display mode can be changed byDISP( ) button.

✽✽ NOTICEOnly external devices that have anactive video source - such as video gamesystems or VHS players - can be read bythe RSE. The RSE will not play anexternal device that only has an audiosource, such as a cassette player or otherCD player.

Cleaning of DisplayIf the LCD display becomes dusty ordirty, clean it by wiping gently with a soft,dry, clean cloth.

CAUTIONConnect only appropriate inputsources to the RSE jacks.Connecting an incorrect input maycause damage to the player and/orthe external electronic device.

AUX_INPUT_8111

RCA plug

12V Power outlet


2163

Using the DVD playerDisc compatibilityYour RSE player accepts and plays allDVDs in 4:3 (normal) and 16:9 (widescreen) video formats. With DVDs thatoffer multiple formats, the default formatis 16:9 and will stay that way unless theuser changes the format. (See “Display”to learn how to adjust the format.)

✽✽ NOTICE• The DVD player has the capability to

play DVD-Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW,CD-DA, CD-R, CD-RW and Video-CD.

• The DVD player has the capability toplay CD-DA, DVD, VCD, PCM,Dolby Digital and DTS formats.

• Please refer to the appendix for theerror messages.

Loading a DiscInsert the disc part way into the load slot.The player will automatically grip the discand pull it in the rest of the way. The playerwill display “reading” on the screen andshow the “Hyundai Motors” logo beforebeginning the DVD.

The player is only capable of reading thebottom side of a disc. When inserting asingle-sided disc, the label side should beup. When inserting a two-sided disc, thedesired play side should be down.

✽✽ NOTICE• Because there is no universal standard

for DVD programming, your disc maybehave differently than below. SomeDVDs may present warning messagesabout unauthorized duplication, somewill go directly to a menu and othersmay start playing the movie immedi-ately.

• When the vehicle's ignition is active,the loading of any playable disc willcause the player to initialize and auto-matically play the disc. If a disc wasplaying prior to the ignition beingturned off, it will not automaticallyreplay once the ignition is turned onagain. Instead, it will go into standbymode. Press the SRC orPLAY/PAUSE( ) button to “wakeup” the unit and resume disc play.

Disc ProtectionThe player has an Auto-Reload DiscProtection feature to protect discs fromaccidental damage. If an ejected disc isnot removed within 25 seconds after beingejected, it will be pulled back into the play-er.The disc will not begin playing. Disc canbe played by the SRC orPLAY/PAUSE( ) buttons.

DVD ControlsYou can control your DVD by using thebuttons on the unit's control panel or byusing the remote control. Instructions forthe controls listed below are the samewhether you are using the control panelor the remote control. However, there arefunctions that are only available from theremote control. These buttons and theirfunctionality are discussed in the“REMOTE CONTROL” section begin-ning.

3 217


VIDEO MODE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

1. STOP/EJECT

2. SPEAKER VOLUME CONTROL

3. PLAY/PAUSE

4. DISPLAY

5. FORWARD

6. REVERSE

7. NEXT CHAPTER

8. PREVIOUS CHAPTER

9. ENTER

10. MENU

11. SOURCE

RES_OPEN_8111


2183

✽✽ NOTICEThe RSE will enter standby mode whenthe vehicle ignition is turned off andback on. Press the SRC orPLAY/PAUSE( ) button to “wakeup” the unit and resume disc play.

1. Stop/Eject While the disc is playing, press theSTOP/EJECT ( ) button to stop discplay. When the disc has stopped, pressthe button again to eject the disc.

✽✽ NOTICEThe player has an Auto-Reload DiscProtection feature to protect discs fromaccidental damage. If an ejected disc isnot removed within 25 seconds afterbeing ejected, it will be pulled back intothe player. This is to protect the discfrom accidental damage.

2. Speaker Volume ControlYou can adjust the volume one of twoways. First, if you are adjusting the vol-ume for audio through the vehicle speak-ers, you can use the VOLUME button onthe control panel or the remote control.This button is reserved for sending a sig-nal to the vehicle speakers only, and willnot adjust the headphone volume. Press“+” to increase the volume and “-” todecrease the volume.Second, the volume on the wirelessheadphones can be adjusted by turningthe VOL knob located on the left side ofthe headphones.

3. Play/Pause You do not need to press the play buttonafter first loading a DVD or VCD; it willstart automatically by playing the firsttrack or bringing up the disc menu.If the disc does not automatically load,press PLAY/PAUSE( ) to play the DVD.While playing a DVD, press PLAY/PAUSE( ) to pause the DVD. Pressthe button again to resume play.

4. Display When the player is in DVD mode, pressthe DISP button to view the DVD title,chapter number and elapsed time andother information about the DVD current-ly playing.It will also display brightness. There are“Day Time” brightness with brightest leveland “Night Time” brightness which has70% level of “Day Time” brightness.Adjust the level of brightness by pressingthe REV(dimmer) or FWD(brighter) but-tons.The next time the player is turned on, itwill return to the brightness level it wasadjusted to when last used.The RSE unit has two presets of displaybrightness. When the headlamp is turnedon, the display brightness level will bedimmed as the preset. However, whenthe headlamp is turned off, the displaybrightness will return to the daytimebrightness.Press DISP to adjust the image format.The image format, also known as theaspect ratio, is a ratio of the height towidth of the image on the screen. Forexample, a 4:3 ratio would mean animage that is 4 units by 3 units.

3 219


You have two options: 4:3 (normal) and16:9 (widescreen). Press the display but-ton to select the preferred aspect ratio.When the RSE unit receives video sig-nals from the AUX, the aspect ratio canbe changed to 16:9 or 4:3 by the DISPbutton.The aspect ratio information will auto-matically disappear if no button ispressed for three seconds.

5. ForwardThere are three DVD and VCD fast for-ward speeds. Press and hold the FWDbutton for up to 2 seconds and the playerwill fast forward at 4 times the normalspeed (8 times for VCDs). Hold the but-ton for more than 2 seconds but less than4 seconds and the player will fast forwardat about 8 times the normal speed (20times for VCDs). Hold the button for morethan 4 seconds and the fast forward willincrease to about 32 times the normalspeed for both DVDs and VCDs. Pressthe FWD button again to stop fast for-warding and return to normal speed play.

6. ReverseThere are three DVD and VCD fastreverse speeds. Press and hold the REVbutton for up to 2 seconds and the playerwill reverse through the DVD at 4 timesthe normal speed (8 times for VCDs).Hold the button for more than 2 secondsbut less than 4 seconds and the playerwill reverse at about 8 times the normalspeed (20 times for VCDs). Hold the but-ton for more than 4 seconds and thereverse will increase to 32 times the nor-mal speed for both DVDs and VCDs.Press the REV button again to stopreversing and return to normal speedplay.

7. Next ChapterWhile a DVD is playing, press the NEXTbutton to skip to the next chapter. Thecurrent chapter number is shown on thescreen. Press and hold the NEXT buttonto move quickly through the chapters.

✽✽ NOTICEDepending on the DVD, if NEXT ispressed during the last chapter on aDVD, a red circle with a “Invalidicon[ ]” may be displayed, indicatingan invalid button press.

8. Previous ChapterPress the PREV button to skip to thebeginning of the previous chapter. Pressand hold the PREV button to move quick-ly through the chapters.Depending on your DVD, if the PREVbutton is pressed during the first 8 sec-onds of the first chapter, the player willskip to the beginning of the last chapterof the DVD.

9. EnterA momentary press shall initiate a selector enter function of a selected menuitem.

10. Menu DVDs may contain special programmingor features that are accessed by usingthe menu. To use the menu with a DVDthat is playing, press the MENU buttononce to display the DVD disc menu.Press the button a second time to exit themenu and return to the DVD program.The menu is not available during disc ini-tialization, the beginning credits or anycopyright warnings.


2203

When viewing a menu, pressing theMENU button again will automaticallyreturn to the movie at the point it wasbeing viewed.You can also select “play” orany other option by using the NEXT,PREV, FWD and REV buttons.Press the NEXT button to move the cursorup and the PREV button to move the cur-sor down the menu.Press the FWD button to move the cursorto the right, and the REV button to movethe cursor to the left.

✽✽ NOTICEYou must repeatedly push any button tomove through several items. Pressingand holding any button will not advancethe cursor beyond the position justmoved.

Press ENTER to select the desired menuchoice.

11. SourcePress the SOURCE button to switch fromthe RSE’s internal DVD player to anexternal device such as a VCR or videogame. The sound and images from theexternal source will be presentedthrough the RSE.

Pressing the SRC button will switchbetween the following RSE states:

Playback state - will play DVDs, VCDs, andCDs

Auxiliary (AUX) state - will play videogames and other external devices

When an external source is selected, theRSE’s internal DVD player turns off.Press the SRC button to switch backfrom the external source to the internalDVD player.If a disc is present in the DVD player, thedisc will begin to play. If another sourcehas been detected, such as a VCR orvideo game, the RSE will enter the AUXmode automatically and shall remain sountil a disc is inserted or until the PLAY/SRC button is pressed on the RSE's frontpanel or on the remote control. If thevehicle ignition is on but the player isn'tbeing used, the display will power off.The DVD mechanism will be in sleepmode, but the main RSE's controller willstay up to accept commands from thefront panel controls or the remote control.

✽✽ NOTICEThe external device must be correctlyconnected to the RSE in order to playproperly.

Using the CD PlayerThe RSE will play audio CDs in both thestandard (12 cm) and mini-disc (8 cm)format.

✽✽ NOTICEWhile the player will accept DVDROMs and CD ROMs discs, the RSEcannot play discs in these formats andwill eject them.

With power applied to your unit, insertthe disc part way into the load slot. Theplayer will automatically grip the CD disc,pull it the rest of the way in and beginplaying.

CD ControlsThe following functions are availablewhen playing audio CDs.

3 221


AUDIO MODE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

1. STOP/EJECT

2. VOLUME CONTROL

3. PLAY/PAUSE

4. DISPLAY

5. FORWARD

6. REVERSE

7. NEXT TRACK

8. PREVIOUS TRACK

RES_CLOSED_8111


2223

1. Stop/Eject While the disc is playing, press theSTOP/EJECT( ) button to stop discplay.While the disc is stopped, press theSTOP/EJECT( ) button again to ejectthe disc.

2. Volume Control You can adjust the volume one of twoways. First, if you are adjusting the vol-ume for audio through the vehicle speak-ers, you can use the VOLUME ()button on the control panel or theremote control. Press “+” to increase thevolume and “-” to decrease the volume.The volume level will be displayed on thehead-unit, when the RSE unit volumelevel is adjusted from its control panel orremote control. This button does notaffect headphone volume.Second, you can adjust the volume onthe wireless headphones by locating theVOL control wheel on the left side of theheadphones. Roll the control wheel toadjust the volume.

3. Play/Pause When an audio CD is inserted, the RSEwill display the HYUNDAI logo, thenautomatically begin playing the first track.The track number and time elapsed forthe current track is displayed.If a CD is loaded and playing, press thePLAY/PAUSE( ) button to pause theCD. Press the button again to resumeplay.If a CD is already loaded, stopping andplaying the CD by pressingPLAY/PAUSE( ) button on the remotecontrol; cycling the ignition and pressingplay; or changing the source will cause theCD to begin playing at the point where itwas stopped during the previous play. Theplayer will automatically play this previousplay position unless theSTOP/EJECT( ) button is pressed.At the end of the CD, the player will auto-matically return to the first track and con-tinue playing.

4. Display When the player is in DVD mode, pressthe DISP button to view the DVD title,chapter number and elapsed time andother information about the DVD current-ly playing.The next time the player is turned on, itwill return to the brightness level it wasadjusted to when last used.The RSE unit has two presets of displaybrightness. When the headlamp is turnedon, the display brightness level will bedimmed as the preset. However, whenthe headlamp is turned off, the displaybrightness will return to the daytimebrightness.Press DISP to adjust the image format.The image format, also known as theaspect ratio, is a ratio of the height towidth of the image on the screen. Forexample, a 4:3 ratio would mean animage that is 4 units by 3 units. You havetwo options: 4:3 (normal) and 16:9(widescreen). Press the display button toselect the preferred aspect ratio.When the RSE unit receives video sig-nals from the AUX, the aspect ratio canbe changed to 16:9 or 4:3 by the DISPbutton.The aspect ratio information will auto-matically disappear if no button ispressed for three seconds.

3 223


5. ForwardThere are two CD fast forward speeds.Press and hold the FWD button for up to2 seconds and the player will fast forwardat 3 times the normal speed. Hold thebutton for more than 2 seconds and theplayer will fast forward at about 10 timesthe normal speed. When the holding but-ton is released, the RSE unit will auto-matically return to a play mode.

6. ReverseThere are two fast reverse speeds. TheRSE unit will fast reverse at 3 times thenormal speed, if the REV button ispressed. Hold the button for more than 2seconds and the RSE unit will fastreverse at about 10 times the normalspeed. When the button is released, theRSE unit will automatically return to aplay mode.

7. Next TrackPress the NEXT button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. The nexttrack number is displayed on the screen.Press and hold the NEXT button for 2seconds or more to move quickly throughthe tracks.

8. Previous TrackPress the PREV button to skip to thebeginning of the current track.Press the PREV button during the first 8seconds of the current track to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.Press the PREV button during the first 8seconds of the first track to skip to thebeginning of the last track on the CD.Press and hold the PREV button for 2seconds or more to move quickly throughthe tracks.


2243

REMOTE CONTROL

1. STOP

2. SPEAKER VOL (+, -)

3. PLAY/PAUSE

4. DISPLAY

5. FORWARD

6. REVERSE

7. NEXT

8. PREVIOUS

9. ENTER

10. MENU

11. SOURCE

12. ANGLE

13. SUBSCRIPT

14. LANGUAGE

15. SLOW PLAY

16. ON/OFF

REMOTE_CONTROL_EP_8111

3 225


Using the Remote ControlIn addition to having all the buttons andfunctionality listed in the DVD and CDControls section, the remote control hasseveral other buttons that offer additionalfunctions. It is an infrared remote control,and must be pointed at the face of theRSE at a 45° angle for best results. Itrequires a CR2025 battery (included).The remote control has the followingadditional buttons:

✽✽ NOTICEThe RSE system is always “awake”when the vehicle's ignition is turned onor when the vehicle is in “accessory”power mode.

1. StopPressing this button once will stop DVDor CD play. To eject a disc, you must usethe eject button on the control panel.

2. Speaker Volume “+” and “-”These buttons control the volume of theaudio of a DVD or CD through the vehiclespeakers, not the volume from head-phones. Press “+” to turn the volume upand “-” to turn the volume down.

3. Play/PauseWhen an audio CD(VCD/DVD) is insert-ed, the RSE will display the HYUNDAIlogo, then automatically begin playingthe first track. The track number and timeelapsed for the current track is displayed.If a CD(VCD/DVD) is loaded and playing,press the PLAY/PAUSE( ) button topause the CD(VCD/DVD). Press the but-ton again to resume play.If a CD(VCD/DVD) is already loaded,stopping and playing the CD(VCD/ DVD)by pressing PLAY/PAUSE( ) buttonon the remote control; cycling the ignitionand pressing play; or changing thesource will cause the CD(VCD/DVD) tobegin playing at the point where it wasstopped during the previous play. Theplayer will automatically play this previ-ous play position unless theSTOP/EJECT( ) button is pressed.At the end of the CD(VCD/DVD), theplayer will automatically return to the firsttrack and continue playing.

4. DisplayWhen the player is in DVD mode, pressthe DISP button to view the DVD title,chapter number and elapsed time andother information about the DVD current-ly playing.

It will also display brightness. There are“Day Time” brightness with brightest leveland “Night Time” brightness which has70% level of “Day Time” brightness. Adjustthe level of brightness by pressing theREV(dimmer) or FWD(brighter) buttons.The next time the player is turned on, itwill return to the brightness level it wasadjusted to when last used.The RSE unit has two presets of displaybrightness. When the headlamp is turnedon, the display brightness level will bedimmed as the preset. However, whenthe headlamp is turned off, the displaybrightness will return to the daytimebrightness.Press DISP to adjust the image format.The image format, also known as theaspect ratio, is a ratio of the height towidth of the image on the screen. Forexample, a 4:3 ratio would mean animage that is 4 units by 3 units. You havetwo options: 4:3 (normal) and 16:9(widescreen). Press the display button toselect the preferred aspect ratio.When the RSE unit receives video sig-nals from the AUX, the aspect ratio canbe changed to 16:9 or 4:3 by the DISPbutton.The aspect ratio information will auto-matically disappear if no button ispressed for three seconds.


2263

5. ForwardThere are three DVD and VCD fast for-ward speeds. Press and hold the FWDbutton for up to 2 seconds and the playerwill fast forward at 4 times the normalspeed (8 times for VCDs). Hold the but-ton for more than 2 seconds but less than4 seconds and the player will fast forwardat about 8 times the normal speed (20times for VCDs). Hold the button for morethan 4 seconds and the fast forward willincrease to about 32 times the normalspeed for both DVDs and VCDs. Pressthe FWD button again to stop fast for-warding and return to normal speed play.

6. ReverseThere are three DVD and VCD fastreverse speeds. Press and hold the REVbutton for up to 2 seconds and the playerwill reverse through the DVD at 4 timesthe normal speed (8 times for VCDs).Hold the button for more than 2 secondsbut less than 4 seconds and the playerwill reverse at about 8 times the normalspeed (20 times for VCDs). Hold the but-ton for more than 4 seconds and thereverse will increase to 32 times the nor-mal speed for both DVDs and VCDs.Press the REV button again to stopreversing and return to normal speedplay.

7. Next While a DVD is playing, press the NEXTbutton to skip to the next chapter. Thecurrent chapter number is shown on thescreen. Press and hold the NEXT buttonto move quickly through the chapters.

✽✽ NOTICEDepending on the DVD, if NEXT ispressed during the last chapter on aDVD, a red circle with a “Invalidicon[ ]” may be displayed, indicatingan invalid button press.

8. PreviousPress the PREV button to skip to thebeginning of the previous chapter. Pressand hold the PREV button to move quick-ly through the chapters.Depending on your DVD, if the PREVbutton is pressed during the first 8 sec-onds of the first chapter, the player willskip to the beginning of the last chapterof the DVD.

9. EnterA momentary press shall initiate a selector enter function of a selected menuitem.

10. Menu DVDs may contain special programmingor features that are accessed by using themenu. To use the menu with a DVD that isplaying, press the MENU button once todisplay the DVD disc menu. Press the but-ton a second time to exit the menu andreturn to the DVD program.The menu is not available during disc ini-tialization, the beginning credits or anycopyright warnings.When viewing a menu, pressing theMENU button again will automaticallyreturn to the movie at the point it wasbeing viewed.You can also select “play” orany other option by using the NEXT,PREV, FWD and REV buttons.Press the NEXT button to move the cursorup and the PREV button to move the cur-sor down the menu.Press the FWD button to move the cursorto the right, and the REV button to movethe cursor to the left.

3 227


✽✽ NOTICEYou must repeatedly push any button tomove through several items. Pressingand holding any button will not advancethe cursor beyond the position justmoved.

Press ENTER to select the desired menuchoice.

11. SourcePress the SOURCE button to switch fromthe RSE’s internal DVD player to anexternal device such as a VCR or videogame. The sound and images from theexternal source will be presentedthrough the RSE.

Pressing the SRC button will switchbetween the following RSE states:

Playback state - will play DVDs, VCDs, andCDs

Auxiliary (AUX) state - will play videogames and other external devices

When an external source is selected, theRSE’s internal DVD player turns off.Press the SRC button to switch backfrom the external source to the internalDVD player.If a disc is present in the DVD player, thedisc will begin to play. If another sourcehas been detected, such as a VCR orvideo game, the RSE will enter the AUXmode automatically and shall remain sountil a disc is inserted or until the PLAY/SRC button is pressed on the RSE’s frontpanel or on the remote control. If thevehicle ignition is on but the player isn'tbeing used, the display will power off.The DVD mechanism will be in sleepmode, but the main RSE's controller willstay up to accept commands from thefront panel controls or the remote control.

✽✽ NOTICEThe external device must be correctlyconnected to the RSE in order to playproperly.

12. AngleSome DVDs offer different scene angles.If available on the DVD, the ANGLE but-ton will show you the other availablescene angles. If angle scenes are notavailable, then “Invalid icon[ ]” will bedisplayed. Pressing the ANGLE buttonduring CD play will do nothing.

13. SubscriptThe SUBSC button allows you to displayor remove language subtitles. If no lan-guage subtitles are available, the displaywill show an invalid icon[ ]. Pressing theSUBSC button during CD play will donothing.

14. LanguagePressing the LANG button will allow youto select your preferred language, if avail-able. Select the language and then pressenter. If no other languages are available,the display will show an invalid icon[ ].Pressing the LANG button during CDplay will do nothing.


2283

15. Slow PlayThere are 3 slow forward and 3 slowreverse speeds available when viewingDVDs. To review a DVD in slow motion,first press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) buttonto pause the DVD, then press either REVor FWD (( ) or ( ) on the remote con-trol) to select slow playback in eitherreverse or forward.Pressing either the REV or FWD (( ) or( ) on the remote control) button oncechanges the player to 1/8 of normalspeed. Press the button again to return topause mode.Press and hold either button for morethan 2 seconds but less than 4 secondsand the player will switch to 1/4 of thenormal speed. Hold either button formore than 4 seconds and the player willswitch to 1/2 of the normal speed.

From the remote control for DVD, you canimmediately switch to 1/8 forward orbackward speed with the ( , ) but-tons. Press either button again to returnto normal play.While using the Slow Play feature, thecurrent play speed is displayed on thescreen.Press PLAY again to resume normalplay.

16. On/OffThis button will only turn off the DVD orCD and display, not the system itself. Thesystem will remain on standby.

3 229


AppendixMessages

Technical Specifications

NON PLAYABLE MEDIA An incompatible format disc is inserted, or the disc is not playable.

[INVALID ICON] Invalid button press: The PREV button was pressed during the first chapter of a DVD, or theNEXT button was pressed during the last chapter of a DVD.

NO DISC Displayed with the PLAY button is pressed but no disc is in the player.

READING The player is searching the disc to determine its format and check for any special program-ming.

STOP A disc is inserted in the RSE but not playing.

DISC ERROR The inserted disc is either scratched or otherwise damaged, and cannot be played.

REGION ERROR The region code of the disc is different from the RSE DVD region setting. The RSE unit canonly play disc from the intent region. (ie, Korean Region, US region, European region, etc…)

Input power requirements 12 volts nominal (10.5 to 15.5 volts) @ 5 amps nominal (10amps peak max)

A/V inputs - Audio Input : 1 volts nominal (0.8 to 1.2 V)- Video Input : 1 volts nominal (0.7 to 1.4 V)


2303

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible causes / solutions

Press the STOP/EJECT button to release the disc. The player will attempt to eject the discup to three times before performing the Auto-Reload function. Once the Auto-Reload func-tion is complete, press the STOP/EJECT button again to release the disc from the player.If a disc is still stuck or blocked in the RSE unit, turn the ignition off and then on again to resetthe RSE unit.

Verify that the headphone is equipped with batteries, and that the batteries are charged.Insert or replace 2 AAA batteries to resume headphone function.

If the display does not show “NO DISC”, then there is no power. Check the vehicle fuse. If theRSE still does not work, contact your authorized Hyundai dealer.

Make sure you are pointing the remote control at the face of the RSE at a 45° angle. Changethe battery. [Device requires one (1) CR2025 battery.] Use the control buttons on the RSE dis-play panel. If the remote control still does not work, contact your authorized Hyundai dealer.

Invalid button press. The function you are trying to perform is not available.

The disc becomes stuck orblocked.

There is no audio in the head-phones.

The RSE does not work.

The remote control does notwork.

Continue receiving an invalidicon[ ] when a button ispressed

4

Engine exhaust can be dangerous! / 4-2Before driving / 4-3Key positions / 4-5Starting the engine / 4-6Automatic transaxle / 4-7Cruise control system / 4-14Brake system / 4-17Electronic stability control (ESC) / 4-22

Back warning system / 4-25Good braking practices / 4-28Economical operation / 4-29Special driving conditions / 4-30Winter driving / 4-32Trailer towing / 4-34Vehicle load limit / 4-41Weight of the vehicle / 4-46



24

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-dows immediately.

• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-tion.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you heara change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have theexhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in yourgarage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open areawith the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield arekept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

4 3


Before entering vehicle:• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean.• Check the condition of the tires.• Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil, enginecoolant, brake fluid, and washer fluidshould be checked on a regular basis,with the exact interval depending on thefluid. Further details are provided inSection 6, Maintenance.

Before starting • Close and lock all doors.• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.• Be sure that all lights work.• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned tothe ON position.

• Release the parking brake and makesure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

PROPOSITION 65 WARN-ING

Engine exhaust and a wide varietyof automobile components andparts, including components foundin the interior furnishings in a vehi-cle, contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects andreproductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of componentwear contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm.

BEFORE DRIVING


44

WARNING - Driving underthe influence of alcohol ordrugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.Drunk driving is the number onecontributor to the highway deathtoll each year. Even a small amountof alcohol will affect your reflexes,perceptions and judgement. Drivingwhile under the influence of drugsis as dangerous or more dangerousthan driving drunk.You are much more likely to have aserious accident if you drink or takedrugs and drive.If you are drinking or taking drugs,don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-er who has been drinking or takingdrugs. Choose a designated driveror call a cab.

WARNINGAll passengers must be properlybelted whenever the vehicle is mov-ing. Refer to pages: 3-59 through 3-67 for more information on theirproper use.

WARNINGAlways check the surroundingareas near your vehicle for people,especially children, before putting acar into “Drive” or “Reverse”.

4 5


Illuminated ignition switch Whenever a front door is opened, theignition switch will be illuminated for yourconvenience, provided the ignition switchis not in the ON position. The light will gooff approximately 10 seconds after clos-ing the door or when the ignition switch isturned on.

Ignition switch and anti-theftsteering column lock Ignition switch positionLOCKThe steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. The ignition key can beremoved only in the LOCK position.When turning the ignition switch to theLOCK position, push the key inward atthe ACC position and turn the key towardthe LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-trical accessories are operative.

ONThe warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This is thenormal running position after the engineis started.Do not leave the ignition switch ON if theengine is not running to prevent batterydischarge.

STARTTurn the ignition key to the START posi-tion to start the engine. The engine willcrank until you release the key; then itreturns to the ON position. The brakewarning lamp can be checked in thisposition.If difficulty is experienced in turning theignition key to the START position, turnthe steering wheel right and left torelease the tension and then turn the key.

KEY POSITIONS

1VQA3017 1VQA3018


64

STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Make sure the parking brake isapplied.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P(Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.You can also start the engine whenthe shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START andhold it there until the engine starts (amaximum of 10 seconds), thenrelease the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below 0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle hasnot been operated for several days, letthe engine warm up without depress-ing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, itshould be started without depressingthe accelerator.

WARNING - Ignition key• Never turn the ignition switch to

LOCK or ACC while the vehicle ismoving.This would result in loss ofdirectional control and brakingfunction, which could cause anaccident.

• The anti-theft steering column lockis not a substitute for the parkingbrake. Before leaving the driver’sseat, always make sure the shiftlever is engaged in P (Park) for theautomatic transaxle and set theparking brake fully and shut theengine off. Unexpected and sud-den vehicle movement may occurif these precautions are not taken.

• Never reach for the ignition switch,or any other controls through thesteering wheel while the vehicle isin motion. The presence of yourhand or arm in this area couldcause a loss of vehicle control, anaccident and serious bodily injuryor death.

• Do not place any movable objectsaround the driver’s seat as theymay move while driving, interferewith the driver and lead to an acci-dent.

WARNINGAlways wear appropriate shoeswhen operating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels, skiboots,etc.) may interfere with yourability to use the brake and acceler-ator pedal, and the clutch (ifequipped).

CAUTIONIf the engine stalls while you are inmotion, do not attempt to move theshift lever to the P (Park) position. Iftraffic and road conditions permit,you may put the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position while the vehicleis still moving and turn the ignitionswitch to the START position in anattempt to restart the engine.

CAUTIONDo not engage the starter for morethan 10 seconds. If the engine stallsor fails to start, wait 5 to 10 secondsbefore re-engaging the starter.Improper use of the starter maydamage it.

4 7


AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

1VQA3024

The lock release button must be depressed while moving the shift lever.

Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting.

The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports modeAutomatic mode

Lock release button prevents shift levermovement without first depressing the button.


84

Automatic transaxle operationAll normal forward driving is done withthe shift lever in the D (Drive) position.To move the shift lever from the P (Park)position, the brake pedal must bedepressed and the lock release buttonmust be depressed.

✽✽ NOTICEThe first few shifts on a new vehicle, orif the battery has been disconnected,may be somewhat abrupt. This is a nor-mal condition, and the shifting sequencewill adjust after shifts are cycled a fewtimes by the T.C.M (Transaxle ControlModule).

For smooth operation, depress the brakepedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to aforward or reverse gear.

WARNING - Automatictransaxle

• Always check the surroundingareas near your vehicle for peo-ple, especially children, beforeputting a car into “Drive” or“Reverse”.

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift leveris in the P (PARK) position; thenset the parking brake fully andshut the engine off. Unexpectedand sudden vehicle movementcan occur if these precautionsare not followed in the order iden-tified.

1VQA3024

Automaticmode

CAUTION• To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not accelerate theengine in R (Reverse) or any for-ward gear position with thebrakes on.

• When stopped on an upgrade, donot hold the vehicle stationarywith engine power. Use the serv-ice brake or the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P(Park) into D (Drive), or R(Reverse) when the engine isabove idle speed.

4 9


Transaxle rangesP (park)Always come to a complete stop beforeshifting into P (Park). This position locksthe transaxle and prevents the frontwheels from rotating.

R (reverse)Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

N (neutral)The wheels and transaxle are not locked.The vehicle will roll freely even on theslightest incline unless the parking brakeor service brakes are applied.

D (drive)This is the normal forward driving posi-tion. The transaxle will automatically shiftthrough a 5-gear sequence, providing thebest fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing anothervehicle or climbing grades, depress theaccelerator fully, at which time thetransaxle will automatically downshift tothe next lower gear.

(Continued)• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift leveris in the P (PARK) position. Setthe parking brake fully, shut theengine off and take the key withyou. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement can occur ifyou do not follow these precau-tions in the order specified.

• Never leave a child unattended ina vehicle.

WARNING• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion will cause thedrive wheels to lock which willcause you to lose control of thevehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) positionin place of the parking brake.Always make sure the shift leveris latched in the P (Park) positionso that it cannot be moved unlessthe lock release button is pushedin, AND set the parking brakefully.

(Continued)

CAUTIONThe transaxle may be damaged ifyou shift into P (Park) while thevehicle is in motion.

CAUTIONAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R(Reverse); you may damage thetransaxle if you shift into R whilethe vehicle is in motion, except asexplained in “Rocking the Vehicle”,in this manual.


104

Sports modeWhether the vehicle is stationary or inmotion, sports mode is selected by push-ing the shift lever from the “D” positioninto the manual gate. To return to “D”range operation, push the shift lever backinto the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift leverbackwards and forwards will allow you tomake gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to amanual transaxle, the sports modeallows gearshifts with the acceleratorpedal depressed.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once toshift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards onceto shift down one gear.

✽✽ NOTICE• In sports mode, the driver must exe-

cute upshifts in accordance with roadconditions, taking care to keep theengine speed below the red zone.

• In sports mode, only the five forwardgears can be selected. To reverse orpark the vehicle, move the shift leverto the “R” or “P” position as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are madeautomatically when the vehicle slowsdown. When the vehicle stops, 1st gearis automatically selected.

(Continued)

(Continued)• In sports mode, when the engine rpm

approaches the red zone, shift pointsare varied to upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels ofvehicle performance and safety, thesystem may not execute certaingearshifts when the shift lever is oper-ated.

• When driving on a slippery road,push the shift lever forward into the+(up) position. This causes thetransaxle to shift into the 2nd gearwhich is better for smooth driving ona slippery road. Push the shift lever tothe -(down) side to shift back to the 1stgear.

1VQA3025

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports mode

4 11


Moving up a steep grade from astanding startTo move up a steep grade from a stand-ing start, depress the brake pedal, shiftthe shift lever to D (Drive). Select theappropriate gear depending on loadweight and steepness of the grade, andrelease the parking brake. Depress theaccelerator gradually while releasing theservice brakes.When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-dency to roll backwards. Shifting theshift lever into 2 (Second Gear) whilein Sports mode will help prevent thevehicle from rolling backwards.

Good driving practices• Never move the gear selector lever

from "P" or "N" to any other positionwith the accelerator pedal depressed.

• Never move the gear selector lever into"P" when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the car is completely stoppedbefore you attempt to shift into "R".

• Never take the car out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may beextremely hazardous. Always leave thecar in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and malfunc-tion. Instead, when you are drivingdown a long hill, slow down and shift toa lower gear. When you do this, enginebraking will help slow the car.

• Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear maynot be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Do notdepend on placing the transaxle in "P"to keep the car from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when drivingon a slippery surface. Be especiallycareful when braking, accelerating orshifting gears. On a slippery surface,an abrupt change in vehicle speed cancause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothlydepressing and releasing the accelera-tor pedal.

WARNING• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-cantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a properlybelted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering wheelmovements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose control ofyour vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs iftwo or more wheels drop off theroadway and the driver over-steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leavesthe roadway, do not steer sharply.Instead, slow down before pullingback into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-its.


124

Shift lock system For your safety, the automatic transaxlehas a shift lock system which preventsshifting the transaxle out of P (Park)unless the brake pedal is depressed.To shift the transaxle out of P (Park):1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to

the ON position.3. Depress the lock release button and

move the shift lever.If the brake pedal is repeatedlydepressed and released with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, a chatteringnoise near the shift lever may be heard.This is a normal condition.

Shift-lock overrideIf the shift lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position with the brake pedaldepressed, continue depressing thebrake, then do the following:1. Carefully remove the cap covering the

shift-lock override access hole which islocated on the right side of the shiftlever.

1VQA3026

WARNINGAlways fully depress the brakepedal before and while shifting outof the "P" Park position into anoth-er position to avoid inadvertentmotion of the vehicle which couldinjure persons in or around the car.

CAUTIONIf your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then you mayattempt to rock the vehicle free bymoving it forward and backward. Donot attempt this procedure if peopleor objects are anywhere near thevehicle. During the rocking opera-tion the vehicle may suddenly moveforward of backward as it becomesunstuck, causing injury or damageto nearby people or objects.

4 13


2. Insert a screwdriver into the accesshole and press down on the screwdriv-er.

3. Depress the lock release button andmove the shift lever.

4. Have your vehicle inspected by anauthorized Hyundai dealership imme-diately.

Ignition key interlock system The ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P (Park)position. If the ignition switch is in anyother position, the key cannot beremoved.

1VQA30281VQA3027


144

The cruise control system allows you toprogram the vehicle to maintain a con-stant speed without resting your foot onthe accelerator pedal.With cruise control, you can set andautomatically maintain any speed ofbetween 24 mph (40 km/h) and 96 mph(160 km/h).

To set cruise control speed:1. Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF button on

the steering wheel to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, whichmust be more than 24 mph (40 km/h)and less than 96 mph (160 km/h).

3. Push the COAST/SET switch, andrelease it at the desired speed.The SETindicator light in the instrument clusterwill illuminate. Release the acceleratorat the same time.The desired speed willautomatically be maintained.

The SET function cannot be activated untilapproximately 2 seconds after theCRUISE ON-OFF button has beenengaged.On a steep grade, the vehicle maymomentarily slow down while going down-hill.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Cruise control

Do not use the cruise control fea-ture under the following conditions:• Heavy or unsteady traffic• Slippery or winding roads• Situations that involve varying

speeds

WARNINGIf the cruise control is left on,(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment cluster illuminated) the cruisecontrol can be switched on acciden-tally. Keep the cruise control systemoff (CRUISE indicator light OFF) whenthe cruise control is not in use, toavoid inadvertently setting a speed.

OVQ046003NOVQ046002N

4 15


To cancel cruise control, do oneof the following:• Press the brake pedal.• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic

transaxle.• Press the CANCEL switch located on

the steering wheel.• Press the COAST/SET and RES/

ACCEL switches at the same time.Each of these actions will cancel cruisecontrol operation (the SET indicator lightin the instrument cluster will go OFF), butit will not turn the system off. If you wishto resume cruise control operation, pushthe RES/ACCEL switch located on yoursteering wheel. You will return to yourpreviously preset speed.

To turn cruise control off, do oneof the following:• Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will go OFF).

• Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions cancel cruise con-trol operation. If you want to resumecruise control operation, repeat the stepsprovided in “To Set Cruise ControlSpeed” on the previous page.

To increase cruise control setspeed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push the RES/ACCEL switch and hold

it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Releasethe switch at the speed you want.

• Push the RES/ACCEL switch andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will increase by 1 mph (1.6 km/h)each time the RES/ACCEL switch isoperated in this manner.

OVQ046004N OVQ046005N


164

To temporarily accelerate with thecruise control on:If you want to speed up temporarily whenthe cruise control is on, depress theaccelerator pedal. Increased speed willnot interfere with cruise control operationor change the set speed.To return to the set speed, take your footoff the accelerator.

To decrease the cruising speed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push the COAST/SET switch and hold

it. Your vehicle will gradually slowdown. Release the switch at the speedyou want to maintain.

• Push the COAST/SET switch andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will decrease by 1 mph (1.6km/h) each time the COAST/SETswitch is operated in this manner.

To resume cruising speed atmore than 24 mph (40 km/h):If any method other than the CRUISEON-OFF switch was used to cancelcruising speed and the system is stillactivated, the most recent set speed willautomatically resume when theRES/ACCEL switch is pushed.It will not resume, however, if the vehiclespeed has dropped below 24 mph (40km/h).

OVQ046003N OVQ046005N

4 17


Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakesthat adjust automatically through normalusage.In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of a stalledengine or some other reason, you canstill stop your vehicle by applying greaterforce to the brake pedal than you nor-mally would. The stopping distance, how-ever, will be longer.When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partially depletedeach time the brake pedal is applied. Donot pump the brake pedal when thepower assist has been interrupted.Pump the brake pedal only when neces-sary to maintain steering control on slip-pery surfaces.

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate while thevehicle is in motion, you can make anemergency stop with the parking brake.The stopping distance, however, will bemuch greater than normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

(Continued)• When descending a long or steep

hill, shift to a lower gear andavoid continuous application ofthe brakes. Continuous brakeapplication will cause the brakesto overheat and could result in atemporary loss of braking per-formance.

• Wet brakes may result in the vehi-cle not slowing down at the usualrate and pulling to one side whenthe brakes are applied. Applyingthe brakes lightly will indicatewhether they have been affectedin this way. Always test yourbrakes in this fashion after driv-ing through deep water.To dry thebrakes, apply them lightly whilemaintaining a safe forward speeduntil brake performance returnsto normal.

WARNING - Parking brakeApplying the parking brake whilethe vehicle is moving at normalspeeds can cause a sudden loss ofcontrol of the vehicle. If you mustuse the parking brake to stop thevehicle, use great caution in apply-ing the brake.

WARNING - Brakes• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This willcreate abnormal high brake tem-peratures, excessive brake liningand pad wear, and increasedstopping distances.

(Continued)


184

Disc brakes wear indicator Your vehicle has disc brakes.When your brake pads are worn and newpads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your frontbrakes or rear brakes (if equipped). Youmay hear this sound come and go or itmay occur whenever you depress thebrake pedal.Please remember that some driving con-ditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when you first apply (or lightlyapply) the brakes. This is normal anddoes not indicate a problem with yourbrakes.

Parking on curbed streets • When parking your vehicle on an uphill

grade, park as close to the curb aspossible and turn the front wheelsaway from the curb so that the frontwheels will contact the curb if the vehi-cle moves backward.

• When parking your vehicle on a down-hill grade, park as close to the curb aspossible and turn the front wheelstoward the curb so that the frontwheels will contact the curb if the vehi-cle moves forward.

WARNING - Brake wearThis brake wear warning soundmeans your vehicle needs service.If you ignore this audible warning,you will eventually lose braking per-formance, which could lead to aserious accident.

CAUTIONAlways replace brake pads as com-plete front or rear axle sets.

CAUTIONTo avoid costly brake repairs, donot continue to drive with wornbrake pads.

4 19


Parking brake To apply the parking brake, depress theparking brake pedal fully and firmlydownward while applying the servicebrake.

To release the parking brake, pull theparking brake release lever while apply-ing the service brake.The pedal will auto-matically extend to the fully releasedposition. If the parking brake pedal doesnot release or does not release all theway, have the system checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.CAUTION

Driving with the parking brakeapplied will cause excessive brakepad and brake rotor wear.

WARNING - Parking brake• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leavingthe vehicle, do not use thegearshift lever in place of theparking brake. Set the parkingbrake AND make sure thegearshift lever is securely posi-tioned in P (Park) for automatictransaxle equipped vehicles.

• Never allow a person who is unfa-miliar with the vehicle or childrento touch the parking brake. If theparking brake is released unin-tentionally, serious injury mayoccur.

WARNINGWhenever leaving vehicle or park-ing always set the parking brake asfar as possible and fully engage thevehicle's transaxle into the parkposition. Vehicles not fully engagedin park with the parking brake setare at risk for moving inadvertentlyand injuring yourself or others.

1VQA3030 1VQA3031


204

Check the brake warning light by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). This light will be illuminatedwhen the parking brake is applied withthe ignition switch in the START or ONposition.Before driving, be sure the parking brakeis fully released and the brake warninglight is off.If the brake warning light remains onafter the parking brake is released, theremay be a malfunction in the brake sys-tem. Immediate attention is necessary.If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-cle immediately. If that is not possible,use extreme caution while operating thevehicle and only continue to drive thevehicle until you can reach a safe loca-tion or repair shop.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The ABS continuously senses the speedof the wheels. If the wheels are going tolock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-lates the hydraulic brake pressure to thewheels.When you apply your brakes under con-ditions which may lock the wheels, youmay hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from thebrakes, or feel a corresponding sensationin the brake pedal. This is normal and itmeans your ABS is active.In order to obtain the maximum benefitfrom your ABS in an emergency situa-tion, do not attempt to modulate yourbrake pressure and do not try to pumpyour brakes. Press your brake pedal ashard as possible or as hard as the situa-tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-trol the force being delivered to thebrakes.

W-75

WARNING - ABSABS (ESC) will not prevent acci-dents due to improper or danger-ous driving maneuvers. Eventhough vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, alwaysmaintain a safe distance betweenyou and objects ahead. Vehiclespeeds should always be reducedduring extreme road conditions.The braking distance for carsequipped with an anti-lock brakingsystem (Electronic Stability ControlSystem) may be longer than forthose without it in the followingroad conditions.During these conditions the vehicleshould be driven at reducedspeeds:• Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.• With tire chains installed.• On roads where the road surface

is pitted or has different surfaceheight.

(Continued)

(Continued)The safety features of an ABS (ESC)equipped vehicle should not betested by high speed driving or cor-nering. This could endanger thesafety of yourself or others.

4 21


✽✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehiclebegins to move after the engine is start-ed. These conditions are normal andindicate that the anti-lock brake systemis functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,your vehicle still requires sufficientstopping distance. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from exces-sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brake systemmay result in a longer stopping dis-tance than for vehicles equipped with aconventional brake system.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, the enginemay not run as smoothly and the ABSwarning light may turn on at the sametime. This happens because of the lowbattery voltage. It does not mean yourABS is malfunctioning.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

W-78

CAUTION• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problemwith the ABS. In this case, howev-er, your regular brakes will worknormally.

• The ABS warning light will stay onfor approximately 3 seconds afterthe ignition switch is ON. Duringthat time, the ABS will go throughself-diagnosis and the light will gooff if everything is normal. If thelight stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS. Contactan authorized Hyundai dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,and operate your brakes continu-ously, the ABS will be active con-tinuously and the ABS warninglight may illuminate. Pull your carover to a safe place and stop theengine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABSwarning light is off, then yourABS system is normal.Otherwise, you may have a prob-lem with the ABS. Contact anauthorized Hyundai dealer assoon as possible.


224

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system is designed to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering manuevers. ESC checkswhere you are steering and where thevehicle is actually going. ESC applies thebrakes at individual wheels andintervenes in the engine managementsystem to stabilize the vehicle.The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system is an electronic system designedto help the driver maintain vehicle controlunder adverse conditions. It is not asubstitute for safe driving practices.Factors including speed, road conditionsand driver steering input can all affectwhether ESC will be effective inpreventing a loss of control. It is still yourresponsibility to drive and corner atreasonable speeds and to leave asufficient margin of safety.

ESC operationESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turnedON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-cator lights illuminate forapproximately 3 seconds,then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF buttonfor at least half a second afterturning the ignition ON to turnESC off. (ESC OFF indicatorwill illuminate). To turn theESC on, press the ESC OFFbutton (ESC OFF indicatorlight will go off).

• When starting the engine,you may hear a slight tickingsound. This is the ESC per-forming an automatic systemself-check and does not indi-cate a problem.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) (IF EQUIPPED)

-

WARNINGNever drive too fast for the roadconditions or too quickly when cor-nering. Electronic stability control(ESC) will not prevent accidents.Excessive speed in turns, abruptmaneuvers and hydroplaning onwet surfaces can still result in seri-ous accidents. Only a safe andattentive driver can prevent acci-dents by avoiding maneuvers thatcause the vehicle to lose traction.Even with ESC installed, always fol-low all the normal precautions fordriving - including driving at safespeeds for the conditions.

❈ The location of the ESC OFF button maybe different depending on your model.

OVQ046001N

4 23


When operatingWhen the ESC is in operation,ESC indicator light blinks.• When the Electronic Stability

Control is operating properly,you can feel a slight pulsationin the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control and indi-cates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mudor slippery road, pressing theaccelerator pedal may notcause the engine rpm (revo-lutions per minute) toincrease.

ESC operation offESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation,press the ESC OFF button(ESC OFF indicator light illu-minates).

• If the ignition switch is turnedto LOCK position when ESCis off, ESC remains off. Uponrestarting the engine, theESC will automatically turnon again. Indicator light

When ignition switch is turned to ON, theindicator light illuminates, then goes off ifESC system is operating normally.The ESC indicator light blinks wheneverESC is operating.ESC OFF indicator light comes on wheneither the ESC is turned off with the but-ton, or ESC fails to operate when turnedon.

ESC

ESCOFF

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

ESCOFFESC


244

ESC OFF usageWhen driving• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned

on for daily driving whenever possible.• To turn ESC off while driving, press the

ESC OFF button while driving on a flatroad surface.

Never press ESC OFF button while ESCis operating (ESC indicator light blinks).If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.

✽✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehiclebegins to move after the engine is start-ed. These conditions are normal andindicate that the Electronic StabilityControl System is functioning properly.

✽✽ NOTICE• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESC isturned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-vent the vehicle speed from increas-ing, and result in false diagnosis.

• Turning the ESC off does not affectABS or brake system operation.

WARNINGNever press the ESC OFF buttonwhile ESC is operating.If the ESC is turned off while ESC isoperating, the vehicle may go out ofcontrol.To turn ESC off while driving, pressthe ESC OFF button while drivingon a flat road surface.

WARNINGThe Electronic Stability Controlsystem is only a driving aid; useprecautions for safe driving byslowing down on curved, snowy, oricy roads. Drive slowly and don’tattempt to accelerate whenever theESC indicator light is blinking, orwhen the road surface is slippery.

CAUTIONDriving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the ESC system tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same size asyour original tires.

4 25


The back warning system assists thedriver during backward movement of thevehicle by chiming if any object is sensedwithin a distance of 47 in. (120 cm)behind the vehicle. This system is a sup-plemental system and it is not intendedto nor does it replace the need forextreme care and attention of the driver.The sensing range and objectsdetectable by the back sensors are limit-ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as muchattention to what is behind you as youwould in a vehicle without a back warningsystem.

Operation of the back warningsystemOperating condition• This system will activate when backing

up with the ignition key ON.If the vehicle is moving at a speed over3 mph (5 km/h), the system may not beactivated correctly.

• The sensing distance while the BackWarning System is in operation isapproximately 47 in. (120 cm).

• When more than two objects aresensed at the same time, the closestone will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound• When an object is 47 in. to 32 in. (120

cm to 81 cm) from the rear bumper :Buzzer beeps intermittently

• When an object is 31 in. to 16 in. (80 cmto 41 cm) from the rear bumper : Buzzerbeeps more frequently

• When an object is within 15 in. (40 cm)of the rear bumper : Buzzer soundscontinuously.

BACK WARNING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGThe Back Warning System is a sup-plementary function only. The oper-ation of the Back Warning Systemcan be affected by several factors(including environmental condi-tions). It is the responsibility of thedriver to always check the areabehind the vehicle before backingup.

OEP036098


264

Non-operational conditions ofback warning systemThe back warning system may notoperate properly when:1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will

operate normally when the moisturehas been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreignmatter, such as snow or water, or thesensor cover is blocked. (It will operatenormally when the material is removedor the sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-ent).

4. Objects generating excessive noise(vehicle horns, loud motorcycleengines, or truck air brakes) are withinrange of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones

are within range of the sensor.7. The sensor is covered with snow.8. Trailer towing

The detecting range may decreasewhen:1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-

ter such as snow or water. (The sens-ing range will return to normal whenremoved.)

2. Outside air temperature is extremelyhot or cold.

The following objects may not be rec-ognized by the sensor:1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,

chains or small poles.2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-

sor frequency such as clothes, spongymaterial or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than 40 in.(1 m) and narrower than 6 in. (14 cm) indiameter.

CAUTION1. The back warning may not sound

sequentially depending on thespeed and shapes of the objectsdetected.

2. The back warning system maymalfunction if the vehicle bumperheight or sensor installation hasbeen modified or damaged. Anynon-factory installed equipmentor accessories may also interferewith the sensor performance.

3. The sensor may not recognizeobjects less than 15 in. (40 cm)from the sensor, or it may sensean incorrect distance. Use cau-tion.

4. When the sensor is frozen orstained with snow, dirt, or water,the sensor may be inoperativeuntil the stains are removedusing a soft cloth.

5. Do not push, scratch or strike thesensor. Sensor damage couldoccur.

4 27


✽✽ NOTICEIf you don’t hear an audible warningsound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-tently when shifting the gear to “R” posi-tion, this may indicate a malfunction inthe back warning system. If this occurs,have your vehicle checked by an author-ized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

WARNINGPay close attention when the vehi-cle is driven close to objects on theroad, particularly pedestrians, andespecially children. Be aware thatsome objects may not be detectedby the sensors, due to the object’sdistance, size or material, all ofwhich can limit the effectiveness ofthe sensor. Always perform a visu-al inspection to make sure the vehi-cle is clear of all obstructionsbefore moving the vehicle in anydirection.

CAUTIONThis system can only sense objectswithin the range and location of thesensors; It can not detect objects inother areas where sensors are notinstalled. Also, small or slimobjects, such as poles or objectslocated between sensors may notbe detected by the sensors.Always visually check behind thevehicle when backing up.Be sure to inform any drivers of thevehicle that may be unfamiliar withthe system regarding the systemscapabilities and limitations.Your new vehicle warranty does notcover any accidents or damage tothe vehicle or its occupants due toa back warning system malfunc-tion. Always drive safely and cau-tiously.


284

• After being parked, check to be surethe parking brake is not engaged andthat the parking brake indicator light isout before driving away.

• Driving through water may get thebrakes wet. They can also get wetwhen the car is washed. Wet brakescan be dangerous! Your car will notstop as quickly if the brakes are wet.Wet brakes may cause the car to pullto one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakeslightly until the braking action returns tonormal, taking care to keep the carunder control at all times. If the brakingaction does not return to normal, stopas soon as it is safe to do so and callyour Hyundai dealer for assistance.

• Don't coast down hills with the car outof gear. This is extremely hazardous.Keep the car in gear at all times, usethe brakes to slow down, then shift to alower gear so that engine braking willhelp you maintain a safe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Restingyour foot on the brake pedal while driv-ing can be dangerous because it canresult in the brakes overheating andlosing their effectiveness. It alsoincreases the wear of the brake com-ponents.

• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,apply the brakes gently and keep thecar pointed straight ahead while youslow down. When you are movingslowly enough for it to be safe to do so,pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

• If your car is equipped with an auto-matic transaxle, don't let your carcreep forward. To avoid creeping for-ward, keep your foot firmly on thebrake pedal when the car is stopped.

• Use caution when parking on a hill.Firmly engage the parking brake andplace the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic transaxle) or in first orreverse gear (manual transaxle). Ifyour car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels into the curb to help keepthe car from rolling. If your car is facinguphill, turn the front wheels away fromthe curb to help keep the car fromrolling. If there is no curb or if it isrequired by other conditions to keepthe car from rolling, block the wheels.

• Under some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engaged posi-tion. This is most likely to happen whenthere is an accumulation of snow or icearound or near the rear brakes or if thebrakes are wet. If there is a risk that theparking brake may freeze, apply it onlytemporarily while you put the gearselector lever in "P" (automatic) or infirst or reverse gear (manual transaxle)and block the rear wheels so the carcannot roll. Then release the parkingbrake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgradewith the accelerator pedal. This cancause the transaxle to overheat.Always use the brake pedal or parkingbrake.

GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

WARNINGWhenever leaving vehicle or park-ing, always set the parking brake asfar as possible and fully engage thevehicle's transaxle into the parkposition. Vehicles not fully engagedin park with the parking brake setare at risk for moving inadvertentlyand injuring yourself or others.

WARNINGAll vehicles should always have theparking brake fully engaged whenparking to avoid inadvertent move-ment of the car which can injureoccupants or pedestrians.

4 29


Your vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, where youdrive and when you drive.Each of these factors affects how manymiles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicleas economically as possible, use the fol-lowing driving suggestions to help savemoney in both fuel and repairs:• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling. Once the

engine is running smoothly, begin driv-ing. Remember, engine warm-up maytake a little longer on cold days.

• Save fuel by accelerating slowly afterstopping.

• Keep the engine in tune and follow therecommended periodic maintenanceschedule. This will increase the life ofall parts and lower your operatingcosts.

• Do not use the air conditioner unnec-essarily.

• Slow down when driving on roughroads.

• For longer tire life and better fuel econ-omy, always keep the tires inflated tothe recommended pressures.

• Maintain a safe distance from othervehicles to avoid sudden stops. Thiswill reduce wear on brake linings andpads. Driving in such a way will alsosave fuel because extra fuel is requiredto accelerate back to driving speed.

• Do not carry unnecessary weight in thevehicle.

• Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. This can causeneedless wear, possible damage to thebrakes, and poor fuel economy.

• Improper wheel alignment results infaster tire wear and lower fuel econo-my.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswindsand headwinds. To help offset some ofthis loss, slow down when driving inthese conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-dition is important both for economy andsafety. Therefore, have an authorizedHyundai dealer perform scheduledinspections and maintenance.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

WARNING - Engine off dur-ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coastdown hills or anytime the vehicle isin motion. The power steering andpower brakes will not functionproperly without the engine run-ning. Instead, keep the engine onand downshift to an appropriategear for engine braking effect. Inaddition, turning off the ignitionwhile driving could engage thesteering wheel lock resulting inloss of vehicle steering which couldcause serious injury or death.


304

Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions areencountered such as water, snow, ice,mud, sand, or similar hazards, followthese suggestions:• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.• Avoid sudden movements in braking or

steering.• When braking with non-ABS brakes

pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle isstopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, usesecond gear. Accelerate slowly toavoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, orother non-slip material under the drivewheels to provide traction when stalledin ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle tofree it from snow, sand, or mud, first turnthe steering wheel right and left to clearthe area around your front wheels. Then,shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and any forward gear in vehiclesequipped with an automatic transaxle. Donot race the engine, and spin the wheelsas little as possible. If you are still stuckafter a few tries, have the vehicle pulledout by a tow vehicle to avoid engine over-heating and possible damage to thetransaxle.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

WARNING - DownshiftingDownshifting with an automatictransaxle, while driving on slipperysurfaces can cause an accident.The sudden change in tire speedcould cause the tires to skid. Becareful when downshifting on slip-pery surfaces.

WARNING - ABSDo not pump the brake pedal on avehicle equipped with ABS.

CAUTIONProlonged rocking may causeengine over-heating, transaxle dam-age or failure, and tire damage.

CAUTIONThe ESC system (if equipped)should be turned OFF prior to rock-ing the vehicle.

WARNING - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, especiallyat speeds more than 35 mph (56km/h). Spinning the wheels at highspeeds when the vehicle is station-ary could cause a tire to overheat,explode and injure bystanders.

4 31


Driving at night Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight, hereare some important tips to remember:• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as itmay be more difficult to see at night,especially in areas where there maynot be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glarefrom other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-erly aimed on vehicles not equippedwith the automatic headlight aimingfeature. Dirty or improperly aimedheadlights will make it much more diffi-cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlightsof oncoming vehicles. You could betemporarily blinded, and it will takeseveral seconds for your eyes to read-just to the darkness.

Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re not pre-pared for the slick pavement. Here are afew things to consider when driving in therain:• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distanceneeded to stop your vehicle, so slowdown.

• Keep your windshield wiping equip-ment in good shape. Replace yourwindshield wiper blades when theyshow signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition,making a quick stop on wet pavementcan cause a skid and possibly lead toan accident. Be sure your tires are ingood shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddlescan affect your brakes. If you must gothrough puddles, try to drive throughthem slowly.

• If you believe you may have gottenyour brakes wet, apply them lightlywhile driving until normal braking oper-ation returns.

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is no high-er than the bottom of the wheel hub.Drive through any water slowly. Allowadequate stopping distance becausebrake performance may be affected.After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them severaltimes while the vehicle is moving slowly.


324

• We recommend that you carry emer-gency equipment, including tire chains,a window scraper, windshield de-icer,a bag of sand or salt, flares, a smallshovel and jumper cables.

• Make sure you have sufficient ethyl-ene-glycol coolant in the radiator.

• Check the battery condition andcables. Cold temperatures reduce thecapacity of any battery, so it must be inexcellent condition to provide enoughwinter starting power.

• Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for cold weather.

• Check the ignition system for looseconnections and damage.

• Use antifreeze-formulated windshieldwasher fluid. (Do not use enginecoolant antifreeze.)

• Do not use the parking brake if it mightfreeze. When parking, shift to P (Park)with an automatic transaxle and blockthe rear wheels.

Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your Hyundai,make sure they are radial tires of thesame size and load range as the originaltires. Mount snow tires on all four wheelsto balance your vehicle’s handling in allweather conditions. Keep in mind that thetraction provided by snow tires on dryroads may not be as high as your vehi-cle's original equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer for max-imum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without firstchecking local, state and municipal regu-lations for possible restrictions againsttheir use.

Tire chains Since the sidewalls of radial tires arethinner, they can be damaged by mount-ing some types of snow chains on them.Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-ommended instead of snow chains. Donot mount tire chains on vehiclesequipped with aluminum wheels; snowchains may cause damage to the wheels.If snow chains must be used, use wire-type chains with a thickness of less than0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehiclecaused by improper snow chain use isnot covered by your vehicle manufactur-ers warranty.Install tire chains only on the front tires.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tire sizeSnow tires should be equivalent insize and type to the vehicle's stan-dard tires. Otherwise, the safety andhandling of your vehicle may beadversely affected.

1VQA3007

4 33


Chain installation When installing chains, follow the manu-facturer's instructions and mount them astightly as you can. Drive slowly withchains installed. If you hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stop andtighten them. If they still make contact,slow down until it stops. Remove thechains as soon as you begin driving oncleared roads.

CAUTION• Make sure the snow chains are

the correct size and type for yourtires. Incorrect snow chains cancause damage to the vehicle bodyand suspension and may not becovered by your vehicle manufac-turer warranty. Also, the snowchain connecting hooks may bedamaged from contacting vehiclecomponents causing the snowchains to come loose from thetire. Make sure the snow chainsare SAE class “S” certified.

• Always check chain installationfor proper mounting after drivingapproximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.Retighten or remount the chainsif they are loose.

WARNING - Mounting chains

When mounting snow chains, parkthe vehicle on level ground awayfrom traffic. Turn on the vehicleHazard Warning flashers and placea triangular emergency warningdevice behind the vehicle if avail-able. Always place the vehicle inpark (P), apply the parking brakeand turn off the engine beforeinstalling snow chains.

WARNING - Tire chains• The use of chains may adversely

affect vehicle handling.• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)

or the chain manufacturer’s rec-ommended speed limit, whichev-er is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,holes, sharp turns, and other roadhazards, which may cause thevehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking.

• Chains that are the wrong size orimproperly installed can damageyour vehicle's brake lines, sus-pension, body and wheels.

• Stop driving and retighten thechains any time you hear themhitting the vehicle.


344

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identifywhat the vehicle trailering capacity is foryour vehicle, you should read the infor-mation in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section.

Remember that trailering is different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in handling,durability, and fuel economy. Successful,safe trailering requires correct equip-ment, and it has to be used properly.

This section contains many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules.Many of these are important for yoursafety and that of your passengers.Please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as theengine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, andtires are forced to work harder againstthe load of the added weight. The engineis required to operate at relatively higherspeeds and under greater loads. Thisadditional burden generates extra heat.The trailer also adds considerably towind resistance, increasing the pullingrequirements.

TRAILER TOWING

WARNING - Towing a trail-er

If you don't use the correct equip-ment and drive improperly, you canlose control when you pull a trailer.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well- or even at all. You and your pas-sengers could be seriously or fatal-ly injured. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in thissection.

WARNING - Weight limitsBefore towing, make sure the totaltrailer weight, gross combinationweight, gross vehicle weight, grossaxle weight and trailer tongue loadare all within the limits.

CAUTIONPulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by yourwarranty. To pull a trailer correctly,follow the advice in this section.

4 35


Hitches It's important to have the correct hitchequipment. Crosswinds, large trucksgoing by, and rough roads are a few rea-sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Hereare some rules to follow:• Will you have to make any holes in the

body of your vehicle when you install atrailer hitch? If you do, then be sure toseal the holes later when you removethe hitch.If you don’t seal them, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from your exhaust canget into your vehicle, as well as dirt andwater.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are notintended for hitches. Do not attachrental hitches or other bumper-typehitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

Safety chains You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle and your trailer.Cross the safety chains under the tongueof the trailer so that the tongue will notdrop to the road if it becomes separatedfrom the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may beprovided by the hitch manufacturer or bythe trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-ufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your trailer.And, never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer brakes If your trailer weighs more than the max-imum trailer weight without trailer brakesloaded, then it needs its own brakes andthey must be adequate. Be sure to readand follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-

tem.

WARNING - Trailer brakesDo not use a trailer with its ownbrakes unless you are absolutelycertain that you have properly setup the brake system. This is not atask for amateurs. Use an experi-enced, competent trailer shop forthis work.


364

Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Before setting outfor the open road, you must get to knowyour trailer. Acquaint yourself with thefeel of handling and braking with theadded weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and notnearly so responsive as your vehicle isby itself.Before you start, check the trailer hitchand platform, safety chains, electricalconnector(s), lights, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-ing and then apply the trailer brake con-troller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electri-cal connection at the same time.During your trip, check occasionally to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and any trailer brakes are still work-ing.

Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-cle ahead as you would when drivingyour vehicle without a trailer. This canhelp you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing You’ll need more passing distance upahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,because of the increased vehicle length,you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return toyour lane.

Backing up Hold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. Then, to move the trailerto the left, just move your hand to the left.To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someone guideyou.

Making turns When you’re turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this so yourtrailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoidjerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle hasto have a different turn signal flasher andextra wiring. The green arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever yousignal a turn or lane change. Properlyconnected, the trailer lights will also flashto alert other drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes, or stop.When towing a trailer, the green arrowson your instrument panel will flash forturns even if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Thus, you may think driversbehind you are seeing your signalswhen, in fact, they are not. It’s importantto check occasionally to be sure the trail-er bulbs are still working. You must alsocheck the lights every time you discon-nect and then reconnect the wires.Do not connect a trailer lighting systemdirectly to your vehicle’s lighting system.Use only an approved trailer wiring har-ness.Your Authorized Hyundai Dealer canassist you in installing the wiring harness.

WARNING Failure to use an approved trailerwiring harness could result in dam-age to the vehicle electrical systemand/or personal injury.

4 37


Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore you start down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift down, youmight have to use your brakes so muchthat they would get hot and no longeroperate efficiently.On a long uphill grade, shift down andreduce your speed to around 45 mph (70km/h) to reduce the possibility of engineand transaxle overheating.If your trailer weighs more than the max-imum trailer weight without trailer brakesand you have an automatic transaxle,you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-ing a trailer.Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) whentowing a trailer will minimize heat build upand extend the life of your transaxle.

Parking on hills Generally, you should not park your vehi-cle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.People can be seriously or fatally injured,and both your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged if they begin a downhill tra-jectory.

However, if you ever have to park yourtrailer on a hill, here’s how to do it:1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift into

gear.2. Have someone place chocks under

the trailer wheels.3. When the wheel chocks are in place,

release the brakes until the chocksabsorb the load.

4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your park-ing brake, and then shift to P (Park) foran automatic transaxle.

5. Release the brakes.

CAUTION• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) payclose attention to the enginecoolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not over-heat. If the needle of the coolanttemperature gauge moves acrossthe dial towards “H” (HOT), pullover and stop as soon as it is safeto do so, and allow the engine toidle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine hascooled sufficiently.

• You must decide driving speeddepending on trailer weight anduphill grade to reduce the possi-bility of engine and transaxleoverheating.

WARNING - Parking on ahill

Parking your vehicle on a hill with atrailer attached could cause seriousinjury or death, should the trailerbreak lose.


384

When you are ready to leave afterparking on a hill 1. With the automatic transaxle in P

(Park), apply your brakes and hold thebrake pedal down while you:• Start your engine;• Shift into gear; and• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear ofthe chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up andstore the chocks.

Maintenance when trailer towing Your vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you regularly pull a trailer.Important items to pay particular atten-tion to include engine oil, automatictransaxle fluid, axle lubricant and coolingsystem fluid. Brake condition is anotherimportant item to frequently check. Eachitem is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. Ifyou’re trailering, it’s a good idea to reviewthese sections before you start your trip.Don’t forget to also maintain your trailerand hitch. Follow the maintenanceschedule that accompanied your trailerand check it periodically. Preferably, con-duct the check at the start of each day’sdriving. Most importantly, all hitch nutsand bolts should be tight.

WARNING - Parking brakeIt can be dangerous to get out ofyour vehicle if the parking brake isnot firmly set.If you have left the engine running,the vehicle can move suddenly. Youor others could be seriously orfatally injured.

CAUTION• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occurin hot days or during uphill driv-ing. If the coolant gauge indicatesover-heating, switch off the A/Cand stop the vehicle in a safe areato cool down the engine.

• When towing check transaxlefluid more frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equippedwith the air conditioner, youshould install a condenser fan toimprove engine performancewhen towing a trailer.

4 39


If you do decide to pull a trailerHere are some important points if youdecide to pull a trailer:• Consider using a sway control.You can

ask a hitch dealer about sway control.• Do not do any towing with your car dur-

ing its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) inorder to allow the engine to properlybreak in. Failure to heed this cautionmay result in serious engine ortransaxle damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-sult your Hyundai dealer for furtherinformation on additional requirementssuch as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-ate speed (less than 60 mph (100km/h)).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towingspeed limit, whichever is lower.

• The important considerations have todo with weight:

Weight of the trailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be? Itshould never weigh more than the maxi-mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. Buteven that can be too heavy.It depends on how you plan to use yourtrailer. For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature and howoften your vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. The ideal trailer weightcan also depend on any special equip-ment that you have on your vehicle.

Weight of the trailer tongueThe tongue load of any trailer is animportant weight to measure because itaffects the total gross vehicle weight(GVW) of your vehicle. This weightincludes the curb weight of the vehicle,any cargo you may carry in it, and thepeople who will be riding in the vehicle.And if you will tow a trailer, you must addthe tongue load to the GVW becauseyour vehicle will also be carrying thatweight.The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-mum of 10% of the total loaded trailerweight. After you've loaded your trailer,weigh the trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights are prop-er. If they aren’t, you may be able to cor-rect them simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

C190E01JM

Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight

Trailer TongueWith brake 3500 (1587)

350 (158)Without brake 1000 (453)

Maximum Towable Weight

lbs. (kg)


404

WARNING - Trailer• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in thefront. The front should be loadedwith approximately 60% of thetotal trailer load; the rear shouldbe loaded with approximately40% of the total trailer load.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never exceed the maximum

weight limits of the trailer or trail-er towing equipment. Improperloading can result in damage toyour vehicle and/or personalinjury. Check weights and loadingat a commercial scale or highwaypatrol office equipped withscales.

• An improperly loaded trailer cancause loss of vehicle control.C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight

4 41

Driving your vehilcle

Tire and loading informationlabelThe label located on the driver's doorsill gives the original tire size, coldtire pressures recommended for yourvehicle, the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and vehiclecapacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight:1157 lbs (525 kg)Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weightincludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total : 7 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 5 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximumnumber of occupants including adriver, your vehicle may carry.However the seating capacity maybe reduced based upon the weight ofall of the occupants, and the weightof the cargo being carried or towed.Do not overload the vehicle as thereis a limit to the total weight, or loadlimit including occupants and cargo,the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:Without trailer brakes:1000 lbs (453 kg)With trailer brakes:3500 lbs (1587 kg)Towing capacity is the maximumtrailer weight including its cargoweight, your vehicle can tow.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehiclewill increase or decrease dependingon the weight and the number ofoccupants and the tongue load, ifyour vehicle is equipped with a trail-er.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

/

/

/

/

/ /

235/60R17 240 kPa, 35 psi

240 kPa, 35 psi235/60R17

T135/90R17 420 kPa, 60 psi

/

/

/

/

/ /

225/70R16 240 kPa, 35 psi

240 kPa, 35 psi225/70R16

T135/90R17 420 kPa, 60 psi

525 11571157525

525 11571157525

7 2 5

7 2 5

7 2 5

7 2 5

1VQN5900


424

Steps for determining correctload limit1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, ifthe "XXX" amount equals 1400lbs. (635 kg), and there will be five150 lbs. (68 kg) passengers inyour vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs. (295 kg).(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs. or635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 1400 lbs

Weight (635 kg)Subtract Occupant

B Weight 300 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2(136 kg)

CAvailable Cargo and 1100 lbs

Luggage weight (499 kg)

Example 1

A B C

4 43


Compliance labelThe compliance label is located onthe driver's door sill.This label shows the maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo.This label also tells you the maxi-mum weight that can be supportedby the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

C190F02JM




B Weight 750 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 5(340 kg)



A B C

Example 2

C190F03JM




B Weight 860 lbs

172 lbs (78 kg) × 5(390 kg)



A B C

Example 3

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The com-bined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.

OEP046001


444

To find out the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to goto a weigh station and weigh yourvehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the center-line.

The label will help you decide howmuch cargo and installed equipmentyour vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle- like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else - they are moving asfast as the vehicle. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash,the items will keep going and cancause an injury if they strike the driv-er or a passenger.

WARNING - Over loading• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR foreither the front or rear axleand vehicle capacity weight.Exceeding these ratings cancause an accident or vehicledamage.You can calculate theweight of your load by weigh-ing the items (or people)before putting them in thevehicle. Be careful not to over-load your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, eitherthe maximum front or rearGAWR and vehicle capacityweight. If you do, parts, includ-ing tires on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change theway your vehicle handles andbraking ability. This couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

WARNING• Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in yourvehicle's tires and possibletire failure that could lead to acrash.

• Overloading your vehicle cancause increased stopping dis-tances that could lead to acrash.

• A crash resulting from poorhandling vehicle damage, tirefailure, or increased stoppingdistances could result in seri-ous injury or death.

4 45


WARNING - Loose cargoItems you carry inside yourvehicle can strike and injureoccupants in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.• Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-cases, inside the vehicleabove the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure it.

• Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

CAUTION• Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs wouldnot be covered by your war-ranty. Do not overload yourvehicle.

• Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not changeyour weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load yourvehicle the right way.


464

This section will guide you in theproper loading of your vehicle and/ortrailer, to keep your loaded vehicleweight within its design rating capa-bility, with or without a trailer.Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehi-cle design performance. Before load-ing your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determin-ing your vehicle's weight ratings, withor without a trailer, from the vehicle'sspecifications and the compliancelabel:Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicleincluding a full tank of fuel and allstandard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or option-al equipment.Vehicle curb weightThis is the weight of your new vehiclewhen you picked it up from your deal-er plus any aftermarket equipment.Cargo weightThis figure includes all weight addedto the Base Curb Weight, includingcargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)This is the total weight placed oneach axle (front and rear) - includingvehicle curb weight and all payload.GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight that can be carried by a singleaxle (front or rear). These numbersare shown on the compliance label.The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its GAWR.GVW (Gross vehicle weight)This is the Base Curb Weight plusactual Cargo Weight plus passen-gers.GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle(including all options, equipment,passengers and cargo). The GVWRis shown on the compliance labellocated on the driver’s door sill.

WEIGHT OF THE VEHICLE

5

Road warning / 5-2If the engine will not start / 5-2Emergency starting / 5-3If the engine overheats / 5-5Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 5-6If you have a flat tire / 5-10Towing / 5-19



25

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves as awarning to other drivers to exerciseextreme caution when approaching,overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergencyrepairs are being made or when the vehi-cle is stopped near the edge of a road-way.Depress the flasher switch with the igni-tion switch in any position. The flasherswitch is located in the center consoleswitch panel. All turn signal lights willflash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operateswhether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when thehazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using thehazard warning flasher while the vehi-cle is being towed.

If engine doesn't turn over orturns over slowly1. If your car has an automatic transaxle,

be sure the gear selector lever is in "N"or "P" and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to besure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the lightdims or goes out when you operate thestarter, the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to besure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to startit. See instructions for "Jump Starting".

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

OVQ036059N

OVQ036060N

Type A

Type B

WARNINGIf the engine will not start, do notpush or pull the car to start it. Thiscould result in a collision or causeother damage. In addition, push orpull starting may cause the catalyt-ic converter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.

5 3


If engine turns over normally butdoes not start1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position,

check all connectors at ignition, coiland spark plugs. Reconnect any thatmay be disconnected or loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-partment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call aHyundai dealer or seek other qualifiedassistance.

If engine stalls while driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact aHyundai dealer or seek other qualifiedassistance.

Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if doneincorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm toyourself or damage to your vehicle orbattery, follow the jump starting proce-dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-mend that you have a competent techni-cian or towing service jump start yourvehicle.

EMERGENCY STARTING

CAUTIONUse only a 12-volt jumper system.You can damage a 12-volt startingmotor, ignition system, and otherelectrical parts beyond repair byuse of a 24-volt power supply (eithertwo 12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-duces hydrogen gas which mayexplode if exposed to flame orsparks.

• Do not attempt to jump start thevehicle if the discharged batteryis frozen or if the electrolyte levelis low; the battery may rupture orexplode.

WARNING - BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery as thismay cause the battery to rupture orexplode causing serious injury.


45

Connecting jumper cables Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal isgrounded.

2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehicles totouch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exactsequence shown in the illustration.First connect one end of a jumpercable to the positive terminal of thedischarged battery (1), then connectthe other end to the positive terminalon the booster battery (2). Proceed toconnect one end of the other jumpercable to the negative terminal of thebooster battery (3), then the other endto a solid, stationary, metallic point (forexample, the engine lifting bracket)away from the battery (4). Do not con-nect it to or near any part that moveswhen the engine is cranked.Do not allow the jumper cables to con-tact anything except the correct batteryterminals or the correct ground. Do notlean over the battery when makingconnections.

1VQA4001

Connect cables in numerical order anddisconnect in reverse order.

Discharged battery

Jumper Cables

Booster battery

(-)

(+)

(+)(-)

5 5


5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thebooster battery and let it run at 2,000rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent, you should have your vehi-cle checked by an Authorized HyundaiDealer.

Push-starting Vehicles equipped with automatictransaxle cannot be push-started.Follow the directions in this section forjump-starting.

If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, if you experience a loss ofpower, or if you hear a loud knocking orpinging noise, the engine has probablyoverheated. Should any of these symp-toms occur, use the following procedure:1. Turn on the hazard warning flasher,

then drive to the nearest safe locationand stop your vehicle; set the auto-matic transaxle in P (Park) and applythe parking brake.

2. Make sure the air conditioner is off.3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the

radiator, stop the engine and call anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer for assis-tance.If coolant is not boiling out, allow theengine to idle and open the hood topermit the engine to cool gradually.If the temperature does not go downwith the engine idling, stop the engineand allow sufficient time for it to cool.

4. The coolant level should then bechecked. If the level in the reservoir islow, look for leaks at the radiatorhoses and connections, heater hosesand connections, radiator, and waterpump. If you find a major leak oranother problem that may havecaused the engine to overheat, do notoperate the engine until it has beencorrected. Call an Authorized HyundaiDealer for assistance. If you do notfind a leak or other problem, carefullyadd coolant to the reservoir.

If the engine frequently overheats, havethe cooling system checked and repairedby an Authorized Hyundai Dealer.

CAUTIONNever tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge forwardwhen the engine starts could causea collision with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION - Battery cablesDo not connect the jumper cablefrom the negative terminal of thebooster battery to the negative ter-minal of the discharged battery.This can cause the discharged bat-tery to overheat and crack, releas-ing battery acid.

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant and steammay blow out under pressure. Thiscould cause serious injury.


65

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

(1) Low Tire Pressure Indicator(2) Low Tire Pressure Position

Indicator(3) TPMS Malfunction Indicator

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufac-turer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehi-cle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with aTire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure indicator and a low tirepressure position indicator when oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when thelow tire pressure indicator and a lowtire pressure position indicator illumi-nate, you should stop and check yourtires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Drivingon a significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehi-cle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumina-tion of the TPMS low tire pressureand position indicators.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is provided by aseparate indicator, which displaysthe symbol "TPMS" when illuminat-ed. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pres-sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of rea-sons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternative tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctionindicator after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alter-native tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function proper-ly.

OVQ036414N

Type A

Type B

5 7


Low tire pressureindicator

Low tire pressureposition indicator

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning indicators are illumi-nated, one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. And thelow tire pressure position indicatorlight will indicate which tire is signifi-cantly under-inflated by illuminatingthe corresponding position light.Immediately reduce your speed,avoid hard cornering and anticipateincreased stopping distances. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible. Inflate the tires tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s placard or tire inflationpressure label located on the driver’sside center pillar outer panel. If youcannot reach a service station or ifthe tire cannot hold the newly addedair, replace the low pressure tire withthe compact spare tire.

The Low Tire Pressure and Positionindicators will remain on when thelow pressure tire is in the vehiclebefore you have the low pressure tirerepaired and replaced on the vehicle.However, if the low pressure tire isnot in the vehicle, the Low TirePressure and Position indicators willgo off and the TPMS malfunctionindicator will go on after a few min-utes because the compact spare tireis not equipped with a tire pressuresensor.

CAUTIONIn winter or cold weather, the lowtire pressure indicator may beilluminated if the tire pressurewas adjusted to the recommend-ed tire inflation pressure in warmweather. It does not mean yourTPMS is malfunctioning becausethe decreased temperature leadsto a proportional lowering of tirepressure.When you drive your vehiclefrom a warm area to a cold areaor from a cold area to a warmarea, or the outside temperaturesignificantly increases ordecreases, you should checkthe tire inflation pressure andadjust the tires to the recom-mended tire inflation pressure.


85

TPMS (Tire pressuremonitoring system)malfunction indicatorThe TPMS malfunction indicatorcomes on and stays on when there isa problem with the Tire PressureMonitoring System. If Front Left sen-sor fails, the TPMS malfunction indica-tor comes on, but if the Front Right,Rear Left, or Rear Right tire is under-inflated, the low tire pressure and posi-tion indicators may come on togetherwith the TPMS malfunction indicator.Have the system checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer as soonas possible to determine the causeof the problem.

✽✽ NOTICE• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may be illuminated if the vehicle ismoving around electric power sup-ply cables or radio transmitterssuch as may be located at policestations, government and publicoffices, broadcasting stations, mili-tary installations, airports, ortransmitting towers, etc. This caninterfere with normal operation ofthe Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indicatormay be illuminated if some elec-tronic devices, such as notebookcomputers, are used in the vehicle.This can interfere with normaloperation of the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS).

Changing a tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure and Position indicators willcome on. Have the flat tire repairedby an authorized Hyundai dealer assoon as possible or replace the flattire with the compact spare tire.NEVER use a puncture-repairingagent to repair and/or inflate a lowpressure tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-ommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by an authorizedHyundai dealer as soon as possible.Even if you replace the low pressuretire with the compact tire, the LowTire Pressure and Position indicatorswill remain on when the low pressuretire is in the vehicle. However, if thelow pressure tire is not in the vehicle,the Low Tire Pressure and Positionindicators will go off and the TPMSmalfunction indicator will go on aftera few minutes because the compactspare tire does not have a sensor.Once the low pressure tire is re-inflated to the recommended pres-sure and installed on the vehicle, theTPMS malfunction indicator and thelow tire pressure and position indica-tors will extinguish within a few min-utes.If the indicators are not extinguishedafter a few minutes, please visit anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

TPMS

WARNING - Low tirepressure

Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable andcan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and increased brakingdistances.Continued driving on low pres-sure tires will cause the tires tooverheat and fail.

5 9


You may not be able identify a lowpressure tire by simply looking at it.Always use a good quality tire pres-sure gauge to measure the tire'sinflation pressure. Please note that atire that is hot (from being driven) willhave a higher pressure measure-ment than a tire that is cold (from sit-ting stationary for at least 3 hoursand driven less than 1 mile (1.6km)during that 3 hour period). Allow thetire to cool before measuring theinflation pressure.Always be sure the tire is cold beforeinflating to the recommended pres-sure.A cold tire means the vehicle hasbeen sitting for 3 hours and driven forless than 1 mile (1.6km) in that 3hour period.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not use any tire sealant if yourvehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System. Theliquid sealant can damage the tirepressure sensors.

This device complies with Part 15of the FCC rules. Operation is sub-ject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesiredoperation.

WARNING - TPMS• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-age caused by external fac-tors.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-ity, immediately take your footoff the accelerator and slowlymove to a safe position off theroad.

WARNINGTampering with, modifying, ordisabling the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)components may interfere withthe system's ability to warn thedriver of low tire pressure con-ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modify-ing, or disabling the TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS) components may voidthe warranty for that portion ofthe vehicle.

CAUTIONChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operatethe equipment.


105

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nutwrench are stored in the luggagecompartment. Remove the panelindicated in the illustration.

Removing the spare tire Your spare tire is stored underneathyour vehicle, directly below the rightsliding door.1. Open the right sliding door and

find the plastic hex bolt cover onthe floor.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Use the wheel lug nut wrench toloosen the bolt enough to lowerthe spare tire.

1VQA4035

OVQ056002N

OVQ056003N OVQ056004N

5 11


4. Turn the wrench counterclockwiseuntil the spare tire reaches theground. After the spare tire reach-es the ground, continue to turn thewrench counterclockwise, anddraw the spare tire outside. Neverrotate the wrench excessively, oth-erwise the spare tire carrier maybe damaged.

5. Remove the retainer from the cen-ter of the spare tire.

Storing the spare tire 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the

valve stem facing down.2. Place the wheel under the vehicle

and install the retainer through thewheel center.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise until itclicks.

WARNINGEnsure the spare tire retainer isproperly aligned with the center ofthe spare tire to prevent the sparetire “rattling”. Otherwise, it maycause the spare tire to fall off thecarrier and lead to an accident.

OVQ056005N OVQ056006N


125

Important - use of compactspare tireYour vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire. This compact sparetire takes up less space than a regu-lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than aconventional tire and is designed fortemporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).

✽✽ NOTICECheck the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it tothe specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,observe the following precautions:• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); ahigher speed could damage thetire.

• Ensure that you drive slowlyenough for the road conditions toavoid all hazards. Any road hazard,such as a pothole or debris, couldseriously damage the compactspare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tire diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately 1inch (25 mm), which could result indamage to the vehicle.

CAUTION• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is inuse. The compact spareshould be replaced by theproper conventional tire andrim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicleis not recommended withmore than one compact sparetire in use at the same time.

WARNINGThis spare tire should be usedonly for VERY short distances.Compact spares should NEVERbe used for long drives orextended distances.

5 13


• Do not take this vehicle through anautomatic car wash while the com-pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use tire chains on the com-pact spare tire. Because of thesmaller size, a tire chain will not fitproperly. This could damage thevehicle and result in loss of thechain.

• The compact spare tire should notbe installed on the front axle if thevehicle must be driven in snow oron ice.

• Do not use the compact spare tireon any other vehicle because thistire has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread lifeis shorter than a regular tire.Inspect your compact spare tireregularly and replace worn com-pact spare tires with the same sizeand design, mounted on the samewheel.

Changing tires Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.To prevent the jack from “rattling”while the vehicle is in motion, lowerthe jack to the lowest position, placethe jack in the luggage side trim andturn the wing bolt (1) clockwise firmly.Make sure the jack is secured firmlyby trying to move the jack forwardand backward.

Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changingtires

• Never attempt vehicle repairsin the traffic lanes of a publicroad or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-pletely off the road and ontothe shoulder before trying tochange a tire. The jack shouldbe used on level firm ground.If you cannot find a firm, levelplace off the road, call a tow-ing service company forassistance.

• Be sure to use the correctfront and rear jacking posi-tions on the vehicle; never usethe bumpers or any other partof the vehicle for jack support.

(Continued)

OVQ056007N


145

Tire replacement 1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.2. Shift the automatic transaxle shift

lever into P (Park).3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,jack, jack handle, and spare tirefrom the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositethe jack position.

1VQA4022 1VQA4023

(Continued)• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing seriousinjury or death. No personshould place any portion oftheir body under a vehicle thatis supported only by a jack;use vehicle support stands.

• Do not start or run the enginewhile the vehicle is on thejack.

• Do not allow anyone to remainin the vehicle while it is on thejack.

• Make sure any children pres-ent are in a secure place awayfrom the road and from thevehicle to be raised with thejack.

5 15


6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

7. Place the jack at the front or rearjacking position closest to the tireyou are changing. Place the jackat the designated locations underthe frame. The jacking positionsare plates welded to the framewith two tabs and a raised dot toindex with the jack.

WARNING - Jack locationTo reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicleand in the correct jack position;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.

OEP056027 OEP056028

WARNING - Changing a tire• To prevent vehicle movement

while changing a tire, alwaysset the parking brake fully, andalways block the wheel diago-nally opposite the wheel beingchanged.

• We recommend that thewheels of the vehicle bechocked, and that no personremain in a vehicle that isbeing jacked.


165

8. Insert the jack handle into the jackand turn it clockwise, raising thevehicle until the tire just clears theground. This measurement isapproximately 1.2 in (30 mm).Before removing the wheel lugnuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-ble and that there is no chance formovement or slippage.

9. Remove the wheel lug nuts byturning them counterclockwise,then remove the wheel.

10. Mount the spare tire into positionand install the wheel lug nutswith the beveled edge inward.

11. Once the wheel lug nuts havebeen tightened, lower the vehiclefully to the ground and continue totighten the lug nuts until they arefully secured. Tighten the wheellug nuts firmly in a “ ” pattern.If you are unsure of the tightnessof the wheel lug nuts, have themchecked at the nearest servicestation. The specified tighteningtorque is 65-79 lb•ft (9~11 kg•m,88-107 N•m). Improperly tight-ened wheel lug nuts could causebrake pedal vibration while brak-ing.

CAUTIONYour vehicle has metric threadson the wheel studs and nuts.Make certain during wheelremoval that the same nutsremoved are reinstalled - or, ifreplaced, that nuts with metricthreads and the same chamferconfiguration are used.Installation of a non-metricthread nut on a metric stud orvice-versa will not secure thewheel to the hub properly andwill damage the stud so that itmust be replaced.Note that most lug nuts do nothave metric threads. Be sure touse extreme care in checkingfor thread style before installingaftermarket lug nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer.

OVQ056008N1VQA4026

X

5 17


To prevent the jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench and spare tirefrom rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly. Carrying a flat tire

Do not store the flat tire on the com-pact spare tire carrier underneathyour vehicle. The full size flat tireshould be stored and fixed in thevehicle until you reach a service sta-tion.

To place a flat tire in the vehicle:1. Put the flat tire into the cover with

the valve stem facing up.

WARNING - Wheel studsIf the studs are damaged, theymay lose their ability to retainthe wheel.This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a collisionresulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequatespare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installingthe spare tire. Adjust it to thespecified pressure, if necessary.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

OVQ056009N OVQ056010N


185

2. Place the flat tire in the cargo areawhen the 3rd row seat is uprightposition or on the floor when the3rd row seat is stowed in the cargoarea.

3. Pass one end of the strap throughthe wheel center and connect bothstrap hooks to each striker of the3rd row seat on the floor.

4. Tighten the strap firmly using theratchet.

5. Make sure the flat tire is properlysecured by trying to move it.

WARNING - Flat tireNever leave the flat tire unse-cured in the vehicle to preventthe tire “rattling”. Otherwise, theunsecured flat tire may bethrown about inside the vehiclewhich can cause damage to thevehicle and serious injury ordeath to the vehicle occupantsin case of a sharp turn, a sud-den stop or an accident.

OVQ056013N

OVQ056014N

OVQ056300N

OVQ056011N

OVQ056012N

5 19


TOWING

If emergency towing is necessary, werecommend having it done by an author-ized Hyundai dealer or a commercialtow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-ing procedures are necessary to preventdamage to the vehicle. The use of wheeldollies or flatbed is recommended.For trailer towing guidelines information,refer to section 4 “Driving your vehicle”.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with therear wheels on the ground (without dol-lies) and the front wheels off the ground.When being towed by a commercial towtruck and wheel dollies are not used, thefront of the vehicle should always be lift-ed, not the rear.

1VQA40291VQA4028

1VQA4030

1GHA4105A

CAUTION• Do not tow the vehicle backwards

with the front wheels on theground as this may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equip-ment. Use wheel lift or flatbedequipment.


205

When towing your vehicle in an emer-gency without wheel dollies :1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion.2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).3. Release the parking brake.

If your car must be towedTowing with a vehicle other than atow truck If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by an AuthorizedHyundai dealer or a commercial towtruck service.If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tem-porarily towed using a cable or chainsecured to the emergency towing hookunder the rear of the vehicle. Useextreme caution when towing the vehicle.A driver must be in the vehicle to steer itand operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, power train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-

cle out of mud, sand or other condi-tions from which the vehicle cannot bedriven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than thevehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles shouldcommunicate with each other frequent-ly.

CAUTIONFailure to place the transaxle shiftlever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-nal damage to the transaxle. OEP056016

5 21


• Before emergency towing, check thatthe hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady andeven force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do notpull from the side or at a vertical angle.Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for tow-ing may damage the body of yourvehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifi-cally intended for use in towingvehicles. Securely fasten thecable or chain to the towing hookprovided.

WARNING Use extreme caution when towingthe vehicle.• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which wouldplace excessive stress on theemergency towing hook and tow-ing cable or chain. The hook andtowing cable or chain may breakand cause serious injury or dam-age.

• If the disabled vehicle is unable tobe moved, do not forcibly contin-ue the towing. Contact anAuthorized Hyundai dealer or acommercial tow truck service forassistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-ing towing.

CAUTIONTo prevent internal damage to thetransaxle, never tow your vehiclefrom the rear (backwards) with allfour tires in contact with the sur-face.


225

Tips for towing a stuck vehicleThe following methods are effectivewhen your vehicle is stuck in mud, sandor similar substances that prevent thevehicle from being driven out under itsown power.• Remove the soil and sand, etc. from

the front and the back of the tires.• Place a stone or wood under the tires.

Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing)

OEP056033

WARNING Do not use the hooks under thefront of the vehicle for towing pur-poses. These hooks are designedONLY for transport tie-down. If thetie-down hooks are used for towing,the tie-down hooks or front bumperwill be damaged and this could leadto serious injury.

6

Maintenance services / 6-2Scheduled maintenance service / 6-2Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 6-7Owner maintenance / 6-9Engine compartment / 6-11Engine oil / 6-12Engine coolant / 6-13Air cleaner / 6-15Automatic transaxle / 6-17Brakes / 6-19Lubricants and fluids / 6-20Power steering / 6-21Climate control air filter / 6-22Wiper blades / 6-24Fuses / 6-26

Battery / 6-35Tires and wheels / 6-37Light bulbs replacement / 6-51Lubricant / 6-59Corrosion protection / 6-61Appearance care / 6-63Emission control system / 6-66

Maintenance

Maintenance

26

MAINTENANCE SERVICESYou should exercise the utmost care toprevent damage to your vehicle andinjury to yourself whenever performingany maintenance or inspection proce-dures.Should you have any doubts concerningthe inspection or servicing of your vehi-cle, we strongly recommend that youhave an Authorized Hyundai Dealer per-form this work.An Authorized Hyundai Dealer has facto-ry-trained technicians and genuineHyundai parts to service your vehicleproperly. For expert advice and qualityservice, see an Authorized HyundaiDealer.Inadequate, incomplete or insufficientservicing may result in operational prob-lems with your vehicle that could lead tovehicle damage, an accident, or person-al injury.

Owner’s responsibility

Maintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsibil-ity.

You should retain documents that showproper maintenance has been performedon your vehicle in accordance with thescheduled maintenance service chartsshown on the following pages. You needthis information to establish your compli-ance with the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your Hyundai warranties.Detailed warranty information is providedin your Owner’s Handbook & WarrantyInformation booklet.Repairs and adjustments required as aresult of improper maintenance or a lackof required maintenance are not covered.We recommend you have your vehiclemaintained and repaired by an author-ized Hyundai dealer.An authorized Hyundai dealer meetsHyundai's high service quality standardsand receives technical support fromHyundai in order to provide you with ahigh level of service satisfaction.

If none of the following conditions areapplicable, then use Schedule 1 –Normal Maintenance.• Repeated short distance driving.• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy

areas.• Extensive use of brakes.• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.• Driving on rough or muddy roads.• Driving in mountainous areas.• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.• Driving for a prolonged period in cold

temperatures and/or extremely humidclimates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy citytraffic during hot weather above 90°F(32°C).

However, if any of the preceding condi-tions apply, follow Schedule 2 – SevereMaintenance.After 120 months or 150,000 miles(240,000 km) continue to follow the pre-scribed maintenance intervals.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCESERVICE

6 3

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

DESCRIPTION

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for allvehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-mined by whichever occurs first.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150

12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

R R R R

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I


I I I I I


I R I R I R I R I R

R

I I

I R I R I R I R I R

I I I I I I I I I I

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM HOSE

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED)

VALVE CLEARANCE

FUEL TANK AIR FILTER

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

Maintenance

46

Note:*1. FOR THE FIRST TIME, REPLACE THE COOLANT AT 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR 60 MONTHS.

AFTER THAT, REPLACE IT EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM) OR 24 MONTHS.

DESCRIPTION

7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150

12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

I I I I I

See Note *1

I I I I I I R I I I

I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT (AUTO-TENSIONER, ALT, P/STR'G,

A/CON, W/PUMP)

COOLANT

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR DISC BRAKE/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

6 5

Maintenance


Note:*2. FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 10,000 MILES (15,000 KM), WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"

DESCRIPTION

7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150

12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

I I I I I I I I I I



I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I

See Note *2

GENERAL ITEMS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS

/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL

JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

No.

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Maintenance

66

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) in nor-

mal temperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezing temperatureB - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread

roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold

weather

E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR DISC BRAKE/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID


(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

C, D, E, F, H

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCEOPERATION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

DRIVINGCONDITION

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chartbelow for the appropriate maintenance intervals.


6 7

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMSEngine oil and filterThe engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. If the car is beingdriven in severe conditions, more fre-quent oil and filter changes are required.

Fuel filterA clogged filter can limit the speed atwhich the vehicle may be driven, damagethe emission system and cause hardstarting. If an excessive amount of for-eign matter accumulates in the fuel tank,the filter may require replacement morefrequently.After installing a new filter, run the enginefor several minutes, and check for leaksat the connections. Fuel filters should beinstalled by trained technicians.

Drive beltsInspect all drive belts for evidence ofcuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-ration and replace if necessary. Drivebelts should be checked periodically forproper tension.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nectionsCheck the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections for leakage and damage. Havea trained technician replace any dam-aged or leaking parts immediately.

Vacuum, crankcase ventilationhosesInspect the surface of hoses for evidenceof heat and/or mechanical damage. Hardand brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-cate deterioration. Particular attentionshould be paid to examine those hosesurfaces nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure thatthe hoses do not come in contact withany heat source, sharp edges or movingcomponent which might cause heat dam-age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps and cou-plings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hoses shouldbe replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

Vapor hose and fuel filler capThe vapor hose and fuel filler cap shouldbe inspected at those intervals specifiedin the maintenance schedule. Make surethat a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap iscorrectly replaced.

Air cleaner filterA Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter isrecommended when the filter isreplaced.

Spark plugsMake sure to install new spark plugs ofthe correct heat range.

Valve clearanceInspect excessive valve noise and/orengine vibration and adjust if necessary.A qualified technician should perform theoperation.

CoolantThe coolant should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenanceschedule.

Maintenance

86

Automatic transaxle fluid The fluid level should be in the “HOT”range of the dipstick, after the engineand transaxle are at normal operatingtemperature. Check the automatictransaxle fluid level with the engine run-ning and the transaxle in neutral, with theparking brake properly applied. UseHYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP-III, DIA-MOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III or otherbrands meeting the SP III specificationapproved by Hyundai Motor Co. whenadding or changing fluid. Using thewrong ATF may result in damage to theATM.

Brake hoses and linesVisually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration and anyleakage. Replace any deteriorated ordamaged parts immediately.

Brake fluidCheck brake fluid level in the brake fluidreservoir. The level should be between"MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side ofthe reservoir. Use only hydraulic brakefluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.

Rear disc brake / linings, parkingbrakeCheck the rear disc brake and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, brokenparts, and excessive wear. Inspect theparking brake system including the park-ing brake pedal and cables. For detailedservice procedures, refer to the ShopManual.

Brake pads, calipers and rotorsCheck the pads for excessive wear, discsfor run out and wear, and calipers for fluidleakage.

Exhaust pipe and mufflerVisually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,or damage. Start the engine and listencarefully for any exhaust gas leakage.Tighten connections or replace parts asnecessary.

Suspension mounting boltsCheck the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage &boots/lower arm ball joint, upperarm ball jointWith the vehicle stopped and engine off,check for excessive free-play in the steer-ing wheel. Check the linkage for bends ordamage. Check the dust boots and balljoints for deterioration, cracks, or dam-age. Replace any damaged parts.

Power steering pump, belt andhosesCheck the power steering pump andhoses for leakage and damage. Replaceany damaged or leaking parts immediate-ly. Inspect the power steering belt (ordrive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks,excessive wear, oiliness and proper ten-sion. Replace or adjust it if necessary.

Drive shafts and bootsCheck the drive shafts, boots and clampsfor cracks, deterioration, or damage.Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-essary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerantCheck the air conditioning lines and con-nections for leakage and damage. Checkair conditioning performance according tothe relevant shop manual if necessary.

6 9

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE Owner maintenance schedule The following lists are vehicle checks andinspections that should be performed bythe owner or an Authorized HyundaiDealer at the frequencies indicated tohelp ensure safe, dependable operationof your vehicle.Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your dealer assoon as possible.These Owner Maintenance Checks aregenerally not covered by warranties andyou may be charged for labor, parts andlubricants used.

When you stop for fuel:• Check the engine oil level.• Check coolant level in coolant reser-

voir.

• Check the windshield washer fluidlevel.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

While operating your vehicle:• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumesin the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steeringeffort or looseness in the steeringwheel, or change in its straight-aheadposition.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turnsslightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-eling on smooth, level roads.

• When stopping, listen and check forunusual sounds, pulling to one side,increased brake pedal travel or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-ation of your transaxle occurs, checkthe transaxle fluid level.

• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)function.

• Check parking brake.• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-ing system during or after use is nor-mal).

At least monthly:• Check coolant level in the coolant

recovery reservoir.• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall):• Check radiator, heater and air condi-

tioning hoses for leaks or damage.• Check windshield washer spray and

wiper operation. Clean wiper bladeswith clean cloth dampened with wash-er fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields

and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.• Check for worn tires and loose wheel

lug nuts.

WARNING Be careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure.This could cause burns orother serious injury.

Maintenance

106

At least once a year:• Clean body and door drain holes.• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and

hood hinges.• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.• Check the air conditioning system

before the warm weather season.• Check the power steering fluid level.• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.• Clean battery and terminals.• Check the brake fluid level.

Owner maintenance precautions Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.As explained earlier in this section, sev-eral procedures can be done only by anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer with specialtools.

Improper owner maintenance duringthe warranty period may affect war-ranty coverage. For details, read theseparate Hyundai Owner’s Handbook& Warranty Information booklet pro-vided with the vehicle. If you're unsureabout any servicing or maintenanceprocedure, have it done by anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer.

WARNING - Maintenancework

• Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Youcan be seriously injured while per-forming some maintenance pro-cedures. If you lack sufficientknowledge and experience or theproper tools and equipment to dothe work, have it done by anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer.

• Working under the hood with theengine running is dangerous. Itbecomes even more dangerouswhen you wear jewelry or looseclothing. These can becomeentangled in moving parts andresult in injury. Always remove allloose or hanging clothing and alljewelry before working on theengine.

6 11

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OVQ066001N

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick

9. Radiator cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Power steering fluid reservoir

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

Maintenance

126

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil toreturn to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, andre-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and checkthe level. The level should be betweenF and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bringthe level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to refill the new oil com-fortably.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Referto “Recommended Lubricants” later inthis section.)

Have engine oil and filter changed by anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer according tothe Maintenance Schedule at the begin-ning of this section.

WARNING - Radiator hoseBe very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it may behot enough to burn you.

OVQ066002N OVQ066003N

PROPOSITION 65 WARN-ING

Used engine oil may cause irritationor cancer of the skin if left in con-tact with the skin for prolongedperiods of time. Used engine oilcontains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory ani-mals. Always protect your skin bywashing your hands thoroughlywith soap and warm water as soonas possible after handling used oil.

6 13

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANTThe high-pressure cooling system has areservoir filled with year-round antifreezecoolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-tory.Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year, at thebeginning of the winter season, andbefore traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

Check the condition and connections ofall cooling system hoses and heaterhoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-rated hoses.

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-ator cap while the engine is oper-ating or hot. Doing so might leadto cooling system and enginedamage and could result in seri-ous personal injury from escap-ing hot coolant or steam.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme carewhen removing the radiator cap.Wrap a thick towel around it, andturn it counterclockwise slowly tothe first stop. Step back while thepressure is released from thecooling system. When you aresure all the pressure has beenreleased, press down on the cap,using a thick towel, and continueturning counterclockwise toremove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-ing, do not remove the radiatorcap or the drain plug while theengine and radiator are hot. Hotcoolant and steam may still blowout under pressure, causing seri-ous injury.

OVQ066004N

Maintenance

146

The coolant level should be filledbetween F and L marks on the side of thecoolant reservoir when the engine iscool.If the coolant level is low, add enoughspecified coolant to provide protectionagainst freezing and corrosion. Bring thelevel to F, but do not overfill. If frequentadditions are required, see an AuthorizedHyundai Dealer for a cooling systeminspection.

Have coolant changed by an AuthorizedHyundai Dealer according to theMaintenance Schedule at the beginningof this section.• Use only soft (de-mineralized) water in

the coolant mixture.• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be pro-tected by an ethylene-glycol-basedcoolant to prevent corrosion and freez-ing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the specifiedcoolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60% antifreeze or less than35% antifreeze, which would reducethe effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-lowing table.

5°F (-15°C) 35 65

-13°F (-25°C) 40 60

-31°F (-35°C) 50 50

-49°F (-45°C) 60 40

AmbientTemperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

CoolantSolution

Water

WARNING - Radiator capDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant and steammay blow out under pressure caus-ing serious injury.


CAUTIONEngine coolant can damage the fin-ish of your car. If you spill enginecoolant on the car, wash it off thor-oughly with clean water.

6 15

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

Element replacement A viscous paper air cleaner filter is used.It must be replaced when necessary, andshould not be cleaned and reused.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attachingclips and open the cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleanerhousing with a clean, damp cloth.

OVQ066005N OVQ066006N OVQ066007N

Maintenance

166

3. Replace the air cleaner element. Werecommend that the air cleaner ele-ment be replaced with genuineHyundai parts.

4. Lock the cover with the cover attachingclips.

Replace the element according to theScheduled Maintenance Section.If the vehicle is operated in extremelydusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-ment more often than the usual recom-mended intervals. (Refer to Schedule 2 -Severe Maintenance in this section.)

WARNING - EngineDriving without an air cleanerencourages backfiring, which couldcause a fire in the engine compart-ment.

CAUTION - Engine• Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in exces-sive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleanerelement, be careful that dust ordirt does not enter the air intake,or damage may result.

OVQ066008N

6 17

Maintenance

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Checking the automatic transaxlefluid level The automatic transaxle fluid levelshould be checked regularly.The volume of the transaxle fluidchanges with temperature. Although it isbest to check the level after having driv-en the vehicle for at least 30 minutes, thelevel can be checked after warming thefluid using the following procedure.

1. Park the vehicle on level ground andfirmly apply the parking brake.

2. Allow the engine to idle for about 2minutes.

3. Depress the brake pedal and move theshift lever slowly through all rangesthen set it in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

4. With the engine still idling, pull out thedipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert itfully.

5. Pull out the dipstick again and checkthe fluid level.

WARNING - Transaxle fluidThe transaxle fluid level should bechecked when the engine is at nor-mal operating temperature. Thismeans that the engine, radiator,radiator hose and exhaust systemetc., are very hot. Exercise greatcare not to burn yourself during thisprocedure.

WARNING - Parking brakeTo avoid sudden movement of thevehicle, apply parking brake anddepress the brake pedal beforemoving the shift lever.

CAUTION• Low fluid level causes transaxle

slippage. Overfilling can causefoaming, loss of fluid andtransaxle malfunction.

• The use of a non-specified fluidcould result in transaxle malfunc-tion and failure.

OVQ066011N

Maintenance

186

If the fluid has been warmed to normaloperating temperature of approximately158~176°F (70~80°C), the fluid levelshould be within “HOT” range.

“COLD” scale is for reference onlyand should NOT be used to determinetransaxle fluid level.

New automatic transaxle fluid shouldbe red. The red dye is added so theassembly plant can identify it as auto-matic transaxle fluid and distinguish itfrom engine oil or antifreeze. The reddye, which is not an indicator of fluidquality, is not permanent. As the vehi-cle is driven, the automatic transaxlefluid will begin to look darker. Thecolor may eventually appear lightbrown.

✽✽ NOTICEHave an Authorized Hyundai dealerchange the automatic transaxle fluidaccording to the ScheduledMaintenance at the beginning of thissection.

Use only the specified automatictransaxle fluid. (Refer to "RecommendedLubricants" later in this section.)

1VQA5008

6 19

Maintenance

BRAKES

Checking brake fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-odically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.Before removing the reservoir cap andadding brake fluid, clean the area aroundthe reservoir cap thoroughly to preventbrake fluid contamination.If the level is low, add fluid to the MAXlevel. The level will fall with accumulatedmileage. This is a normal condition asso-ciated with the wear of the brake linings.If the fluid level is excessively low, havethe brake system checked by anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid. (Referto “Recommended Lubricants” later inthis section.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Brake fluidWhen changing and adding brakefluid, handle it carefully. Do not let itcome in contact with your eyes. Ifbrake fluid should come in contactwith your eyes, immediately flushthem with a large quantity of freshtap water. Have your eyes examinedby a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brakefluid

In the event the brake systemrequires frequent additions of fluid,the vehicle should be inspected byan Authorized Hyundai Dealer.1VQA5020

CAUTION Do not allow brake fluid to contactthe vehicle's body paint, as paintdamage will result. Brake fluid,which has been exposed to open airfor an extended time should neverbe used as its quality cannot beguaranteed. It should be thrownout. Don't put in the wrong kind offluid. A few drops of mineral-basedoil, such as engine oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake systemparts.

Maintenance

206

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

Checking the washer fluid level The reservoir is translucent so that youcan check the level with a quick visualinspection.Check the fluid level in the washer fluidreservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plainwater may be used if washer fluid is notavailable. However, use washer solventwith antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

This warning light indicatesthe washer fluid reservoir isnear empty. Refill the washerfluid as soon as possible.

Body lubrication All moving points of the body, such asdoor hinges, hood hinges, and locks,should be lubricated each time theengine oil is changed. Use a non-freez-ing lubricant on locks during cold weath-er.Make sure the engine hood secondarylatch keeps the hood from opening whenthe primary latch is released.

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and may causeloss of vehicle control or damageto paint and body trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agentscontain some amounts of alcoholand can be flammable under cer-tain circumstances. Do not allowsparks or flame to contact thewasher fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicleor it's occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-sonous to humans and animals.Do not drink and avoid contactingwindshield washer fluid. Seriousinjury or death could occur.

OVQ066013N

6 21

Maintenance

POWER STEERING

Checking the power steering fluidlevel With the vehicle on level ground, checkthe fluid level in the power steering reser-voir periodically. The fluid should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir at the normal tem-perature.Before adding power steering fluid, thor-oughly clean the area around the reser-voir cap to prevent power steering fluidcontamination.If the level is low, add fluid to the MAXlevel.

In the event the power steering systemrequires frequent addition of fluid, thevehicle should be inspected by anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer.

Use only the specified power steeringfluid. (Refer to "RecommendedLubricants" later in this section.)

Power steering hosesCheck the connections for oil leaks,severe damage and twists in the powersteering hose before driving.

CAUTION• To avoid damage to the power

steering pump, do not operate thevehicle for prolonged periodswith a low power steering fluidlevel.

• Never start the engine when thereservoir tank is empty.

• When adding fluid, be careful thatdirt does not get into the tank.

• Too little fluid can result inincreased steering effort and/ornoise from the power steering sys-tem.

• The use of the non-specified fluidcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe power steering system andcause damage to it.

OVQ066012N

Maintenance

226


The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dust orother pollutants that come into the vehi-cle from the outside through the heatingand air conditioning system. If dust orother pollutants accumulate in the filterover a period of time, the air flow from theair vents may decrease, resulting inmoisture accumulation on the inside ofthe windshield even when the outside(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-pens, have the climate control air filterreplaced by an Authorized HyundaiDealer.

The climate control air filter should bereplaced every 10,000 miles (15,000km). If the vehicle is operated in severelyair-polluted cities or on dusty roughroads for a long period, it should beinspected more frequently and replacedearlier. When you try to replace the cli-mate control air filter, perform the follow-ing procedure, and be careful to avoiddamaging other components.

Filter replacement1. Open the glove box and remove the

support rod.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Climate controlair filter

Blower

Evaporatorcore

Heater core

1VQA5014

6 23

Maintenance

2. With the glove box open, remove thestoppers on both sides to allow theglove box hang freely on the hinges.

3. Remove the climate control air filtercover pulling up both taps of the cover.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.5. Reassemble in the reverse order of

disassembly.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen replacing the climate control airfilter install it according to the “ ”identification marks. Otherwise, the sys-tem may produce noise and the effec-tiveness of the filter may be reduced.

1VQA5015 OVQ066014N OVQ066015N

Maintenance

246

WIPER BLADES

Maintenance Commercial hot waxes applied byautomatic car washes have beenknown to make the windshield diffi-cult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield orthe wiper blades with foreign matter canreduce the effectiveness of the wind-shield wipers. Common sources of con-tamination are insects, tree sap, and hotwax treatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-ing properly, clean both the window andthe blades with a good cleaner or milddetergent, and rinse thoroughly withclean water.

Replacement When the wipers no longer clean ade-quately, the blades may be worn orcracked, and require replacement.

1VQA5022 CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperarms or other components, do notattempt to move the wipers manual-ly.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specified wiperblade could result in wiper malfunc-tion and failure.

6 25

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper

blade assembly to expose the plasticlocking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the bladeassembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Rear window wiper bladeTo prevent damage to the wiper arms orother components, have an authorizedHyundai dealer replace the wiper blade.

1LDA5023

1LDA5024

1LDA5025

CAUTIONDo not allow the wiper arm to fallagainst the windshield, since it maychip or crack the windshield.

Maintenance

266

FUSES

A vehicle’s electrical system is protectedfrom electrical overload damage byfuses.

This vehicle has three fuse panels, onelocated in the driver’s side panel bolster,another in the cargo area, the other inthe engine compartment near the bat-tery.If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, check theappropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse hasblown, the element inside the fuse will bemelted.If the electrical system does not work,first check the driver’s side fuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse with one ofthe same rating.If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-cates an electrical problem. Avoid usingthe system involved and immediatelyconsult an Authorized Hyundai Dealer.Three kinds of fuses are used: blade typefor lower amperage rating and cartridgetype, fusible link for higher amperage rat-ings.

Fuse replacement

1VQA4037

Normal

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Fusible link

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING - Fuse replace-ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage and possibly afire.

• Never install a wire instead of theproper fuse - even as a temporaryrepair. It may cause extensivewiring damage and possibly a fire.

CAUTIONDo not use a screwdriver or anyother metal object to remove fusesbecause it may cause a short circuitand damage the system.

6 27

Maintenance

Engine compartment1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-

ing the tap and pulling up.3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,use the fuse puller in the main fusebox in the engine compartment.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult an AuthorizedHyundai Dealer. Inner panel

1. Turn the ignition switch and all otherswitches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

1VQA4006

CAUTIONAfter checking the fuse box in theengine compartment, securelyinstall the fuse box cover. If not,electrical failures may occur fromwater leaking in.

1VQA4002

OVQ066016N

Driver’s side panel

Rear cargo area panel

Maintenance

286

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.Use the removal tool provided on themain fuse box in the engine compart-ment.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown.Spare fuses are provided in the mainfuse box in the engine compartment.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an AuthorizedHyundai Dealer.If you do not have a spare, use a fuse ofthe same rating from a circuit you maynot need for operating the vehicle, suchas the cigar lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical com-ponents do not work and the fuses areOK, check the fuse block in the enginecompartment. If a fuse is blown, it mustbe replaced.

Main fuseIf the main fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the main fuse is blown, consult anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer.

1VQA40081VQA4004

6 29

Maintenance

✽✽ NOTICENot all fuse panel descriptions in thismanual may be applicable to your vehi-cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.When you inspect the fuse box on yourvehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

Driver’s side panel Engine compartment

1VQA4009/OVQ066017N/1VQA4013/OVQ046010N


Fuse/Relay panel descriptionInside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relayname and capacity.

Maintenance

306

Driver's side fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected componentAUDIO 15A Audio, Step lampMEMORY 7.5A Climate control module, Clock, Cluster, Trip computer, Front area module, Power sliding door module, Power

tailgate module, Driver's door module, Front passenger door module, Driver's power seat module, Driver position memory system unit

IG2-1 7.5A Air conditioner control module, Multi function switch, Inside relay box, ECM mirror, Rain sensor, Seat WarmerIG2-2 7.5A Rear climate control button, Front area module, Power sliding door module, Power tailgate module, Driver's door

module, Front passenger door module, Driver's power seat module, Driver position memory system unitOBD-II 7.5A OBD-II, Diagonosis connectorROOM 7.5A Vanity mirror, Map lamp, Overhead console, Room lamp switch, Climate control module, HomelinkK/LOCK 7.5A Key interlock solenoidILLUMI 7.5A Instrument panel illuminationAMP 25A AmplifierSEAT WARMER 20A Inside relay box(Seat warmer)SUNROOF 25A Sunroof moduleDDM 30A Driver's door moduleTPMS 7.5A Tire pressure monitoring systemPEDAL 15A Power adjustable pedal relay(None-driver position memory system only)P/OUTLET 1 15A Power outlet(Front)ASS P/SEAT 20A Front passenger's power seat moduleDRV P/SEAT 30A Driver's power seat moduleADM 30A Front passenger door moduleACC 7.5A Audio, Clock, Outside rearview mirror control and folding switchP/OUTLET 2 15A Cigar lighter, Power outletSTART 7.5A Start relayAIRBAG IND 7.5A Cluster

6 31

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected componentENG 7.5A Automatic shift lever switch, Vehicle speed sensor, Inhibitor switch, Transaxle control module,

Input speed sensor, Output speed sensor, Back-up lamp switch, Fuel filterIG1 7.5A Trip computer, Buzzer(Back warning system), Cluster, ESC switch, Ambient temperature sensor, GeneratorABS 7.5A ABS control module, ESC control module, Yaw rate sensor, Steering angle sensorAIRBAG 15A Air bag control moduleALTERNATOR - Generator relaySHUNT - Shunt connector

Description Fuse rating Protected componentRR D/LOCK 20A Sliding door lock relay, Sliding door unlock relay, Sliding door lock actuator, Tailgate lock actuatorRR WIPER 15A Rear wiper relay, Rear wiper motorRR DEFOG 25A Rear window defroster relay, Rear window defrosterPOWER TAIL GATE 30A Power tailgate moduleP/QUARTER 10A Power rear quarter glass open relay, Power rear quarter glass close relay, Power rear quarter glass motorRR P/WIN-RH 25A Sliding door power window relay(Right), Sliding door power window motor(Right)RR P/WIN-LH 25A Sliding door power window relay(Left), Sliding door power window motor(Left)PSD-RH 30A Power sliding door module(Right)PSD-LH 30A Power sliding door module(Left)LUGGAGE 7.5A Step lamp, Power tailgate ON/OFF switch, Tailgate lampFUEL DOOR 15A Fuel filler lid relay, Fuel filler lid actuatorRR P/OTLT-LH 15A Rear power outlet(Left)RR P/OTLT-RH 15A Rear power outlet(Right)RR DEFOG RELAY - Rear window defroster relay


Maintenance

326

Description Fuse rating Protected componentP/TRAIN 7.5A Theft alarm relay, Main relay,

TCM, Generator, ECM, Injector15A, ECU 2 15A, ECU 1 10A,Air conditioner compressor relay,Inlet metering valve, EGR sole-noid valve, Air flow sensor, Immobilizer module

FUEL PUMP 15A Fuel pump motorSP 7.5A Spare fuseSP 10A Spare fuseSP 15A Spare fuseSP 20A Spare fuseSP 25A Spare fuseABS 1 40A ABS control module,

ESC control moduleABS 2 20A ABS control module,

ESC control moduleFRT WIPER 30A Front wiper ON relayKEY SW 2 30A Start relay, IG2 Load(ECM mirror,

Rain sensor, Seat warmer)RAM 1 50A Rear area moduleRAM 2 50A Rear area moduleRAM 3 50A Rear area module

Engine compartment

Description Fuse rating Protected componentFRT/RR WASHER 10A Front washer motor relay,

Rear washer motor relayIG 2 7.5A Fuel filterSTOP LAMP 20A Stop lamp,

High mounted stop lampKEY SW 1 25A Instrument panel moduleSTOP SIGNAL 7.5A TCU, PCU/ECU, ABS/ESC UnitA/C COMP 7.5A Air conditioner compressor relayATM 15A ATM solenoidFRT DEICER 15A Front deicerHORN 15A Horn relayECU 1 10A PCU/ECU, A/C comp relay, Mass

air flow sensor, Immobilizer unitO2 DN 10A O2 sensor(RL, RR)ECU 2 15A PCU/ECU, Oil control valve 1/2,

Variable intake manifold valve 1/2,Canister purge solenoid valve,Canister close valve, Pulse width modulation relay

O2 UP 10A O2 sensor(FL, FR)IGN COIL 20A Ignition coil 1/2/3/4/5/6, CondensorINJECTOR 15A PCU/ECU, Injector 1/2/3/4/5/6,

Intake manifold valve, EGRSolenoid valve, Cooling fanrelay, Air flow sensor, Intakethrottle valve

6 33

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected componentIPM 1 50A Instrument panel moduleIPM 2 50A Instrument panel moduleIPM 3 50A Instrument panel moduleFRT BLOWER 40A Inside relay box(Front blower

relay)RR BLOWER 30A Inside relay box(Rear blower

relay)IG 2 RELAY - Ignition relayA/C COMP RELAY - Air conditioner compressor relayMAIN RELAY - Main relaySTART RELAY - Start relayFUEL PUMP RELAY - Fuel pump relay

Engine compartment (main fuse)

Description Fuse rating Protected componentALT 150A GeneratorC/FAN 60A Cooling fan

Maintenance

346

Shunt connector Your vehicle is equipped with a shuntconnector to prevent battery discharge ifyour vehicle is parked without beingoperated for prolonged periods. Use thefollowing procedures before parking thevehicle for prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull up the shunt connector.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the shunt connector is pulled up

from the fuse panel, the warningchime, audio, clock and interiorlamps, etc., will not operate. Someitems must be reset after replacement.(Refer to “Items to be reset···.” onpage 6-36)

• Even though the shunt connector ispulled up, the battery can still be dis-charged by operation of the head-lights or other electrical devices.

1VQA4005

Shunt connector

6 35

Maintenance

BATTERY

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the followinginstructions carefully whenhandling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes andall other flames or sparksaway from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-bustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Keep batteries out of thereach of children becausebatteries contain highlycorrosive SULFURIC ACID.Do not allow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention. Ifpossible, continue to applywater with a sponge orcloth until medical attentionis received. If electrolytegets on your skin, thor-oughly wash the contactedarea. If you feel a pain or aburning sensation, get med-ical attention immediately.Wear eye protection whencharging or working near abattery. Always provideventilation when working inan enclosed space.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on thecase may cause battery acid toleak, resulting in personal injury.Lift with a battery carrier or withyour hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge thebattery when the battery cablesare connected.

• The electrical ignition systemworks with high voltage. Nevertouch these components with theengine running or the ignitionswitched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-ings can result in serious bodilyinjury or death.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGBattery posts, terminals, and relat-ed accessories contain lead andlead compounds, chemicals knownto the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemi-cals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer. Wash hands afterhandling.

OVQ066018N

Maintenance

366

For best battery service:• Keep the battery securely mounted.• Keep the battery top clean and dry.• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleumjelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from thebattery immediately with a solution ofwater and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used foran extended time, disconnect the bat-tery cables.

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.• If the battery becomes discharged in a

short time (because, for example, theheadlights or interior lights were left onwhile the vehicle was not in use),recharge it by slow charging (trickle)for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load while thevehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

Items to be reset after the batteryhas been discharged or the bat-tery has been disconnected.• Clock (See Chapter 3)• Sunroof (See Chapter 3)• Trip computer (See Chapter 3)• Climate control system (See Chapter

3)• Audio (See Chapter 3)• Power sliding door and power tailgate

(See Chapter 3)

CAUTION• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn offall accessories and stop theengine.

• The negative battery cable mustbe removed first and installed lastwhen the battery is disconnected.

WARNING - Rechargingbattery

When recharging the battery,observe the following precautions:• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in anarea with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, orflame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-ing, and stop or reduce the charg-ing rate if the battery cells begingassing (boiling) violently or ifthe temperature of the electrolyteof any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Wear eye protection when check-ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger inthe following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger mainswitch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp fromthe negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp fromthe positive battery terminal.

6 37

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELS Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressures All tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked every daywhen the tires are cold. “Cold Tires”means the vehicle has not been driv-en for at least three hours or drivenless than one mile (1.6 km).Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, top vehi-cle handling, and minimum tire wear.

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the vehicle.

WARNING • Underinflated or overinflated

tires can cause poor handling,loss of vehicle control, andsudden tire failure leading toaccidents, injuries, and evendeath. Always check tires areproperly inflated before driv-ing.

• Driving on tires with no orinsufficient tread is danger-ous. Worn-out tires can resultin loss of vehicle control, col-lisions, and injury and evendeath. Worn-out tires shouldbe replaced as soon as possi-ble and should never be usedfor driving. Always check tiretread before driving your car.

OVQ066022N

Maintenance

386

WARNING - Tire InflationOverinflation or underinflationcan reduce tire life, adverselyaffect vehicle handling, and leadto sudden tire failure.This couldresult in loss of vehicle controland potential injury.

CAUTION• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handlingand reduced fuel economy.Wheel deformation also ispossible. Keep your tire pres-sures at the proper levels. If atire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by anAuthorized Hyundai Dealer.

• Overinflation produces aharsh ride, excessive wear atthe center of the tire tread, anda greater possibility of dam-age from road hazards.

CAUTION• Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres-sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41kPa). Do not release air fromwarm tires to adjust the pres-sure or the tires will be under-inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tireinflation valve caps. Withoutthe valve cap, dirt or moisturecould get into the valve coreand cause air leakage. If avalve cap is missing, install anew one as soon as possible.

WARNING - Tire underin-flation

Severe underinflation (10 psi (70kPa) or more) can lead to severeheat build-up, causing blowouts,tread separation and other tirefailures that can result in theloss of vehicle control leadingto severe injury or death. Thisrisk is much higher on hot daysand when driving for protractedperiods at high speeds.

/

/

/

/

/ /

psi

psi

psi

1KMN5039

6 39

Maintenance

Checking tire inflation pres-sureCheck your tires once a month ormore.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to checkUse a good quality gage to check tirepressure.You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by look-ing at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they'reunderinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage. Besure to put the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help preventleaks by keeping out dirt and mois-ture.

CAUTION - Tire pressureAlways observe the following:• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehiclehas been parked for at leastthree hours or hasn't beendriven more than one mile (1.6km) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of yourspare tire each time you checkthe pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.Be careful not to overload avehicle luggage rack if yourvehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badlyworn, or if your tires havebeen damaged, replace them.

Maintenance

406

S2BLA790

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tire

With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)

Directional tires (if equipped)

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km) orsooner if irregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tire iffabric or cord is visible. After rotation,be sure to bring the front and rear tirepressures to specification and checklug nut tightness.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

WARNING• Inspect your tires frequently

for proper inflation as well aswear and damage. Always usea tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too lit-tle pressure wear unevenlycausing poor handling, loss ofvehicle control, and suddentire failure leading to acci-dents, injuries, and evendeath. The recommended coldtire pressure for your vehiclecan be found in this manualand on the tire label locatedon the driver's side of the cen-ter pillar.

• Worn tires can cause acci-dents. Replace tires that areworn, show uneven wear, orare damaged.

• Remember to check the pres-sure of your spare tire.Hyundai recommends thatyou check the spare everytime you check the pressureof the other tires on your vehi-cle.

6 41

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspectedfor wear whenever tires are rotated.Rotate radial tires that have anasymmetric tread pattern onlyfrom front to rear and not fromright to left.

Tire replacementIf the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-ing the tire.

WARNING• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-stances. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death,severe injury, or propertydamage.

WARNINGDriving on tires with no or insuf-ficient tread is dangerous.Worn-out tires can result in lossof vehicle control, collisions,injury, and even death. Worn-outtires should be replaced assoon as possible and shouldnever be used for driving.Always check tire tread beforedriving your car. Refer to 8-3 forfurther information and treadlimits.

1LDA5026

Tread wear indicator

Maintenance

426

Compact spare tire replace-mentA compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew Hyundai and should be mount-ed on the same compact spare tirewheel. The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.

Wheel alignment and tire balance The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

WARNINGA wheel that is not the correctsize may adversely affect wheeland bearing life, braking andstopping abilities, handling char-acteristics, ground clearance,body-to-tire clearance, snowchain clearance, speedometercalibration, headlight aim andbumper height.

6 43

Maintenance

WARNING - Replacingtires

To reduce the chance or seriousor fatal injuries from an accidentcaused by tire failure or loss ofvehicle control:• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or aredamaged. Worn tires cancause loss of braking effec-tiveness, steering control, andtraction.

• Do not drive your vehicle withtoo little or too much pressurein your tires. This can lead touneven wear and tire failure.

• When replacing tires, nevermix radial and bias-ply tireson the same car. You mustreplace all tires (including thespare) if moving from radial tobias-ply tires.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Using tires and wheel other

than the recommended sizescould cause unusual handlingcharacteristics and poor vehi-cle control, resulting in a seri-ous accident.

• Wheels that do not meetHyundai's specifications mayfit poorly and result in damageto the vehicle or unusual han-dling and poor vehicle control.

CAUTIONImproper wheel weights candamage your vehicle's alu-minum wheels. Use onlyapproved wheel weights.

Maintenance

446

Tire tractionTire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tires should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. To reduce the possibility oflosing control, slow down wheneverthere is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignement.When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtire life. Additionally, a tire shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

Tire sidewall labelingFederal law requires tire manufactur-ers to place standardized informationon the sidewall of all tires. This infor-mation identifies and describes thefundamental characteristics of thetire and also provides the tire identifi-cation number (TIN) for safety stan-dard certification. The TIN can beused to identify the tire in case of arecall.

1. Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

2. Tire size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your car. The followingexplains what the letters and num-bers in the tire size designationmean.Example tire size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)P185/65R14 86H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengercars or light trucks; however, notall tires have this marking).

185 - Tire width in millimeters.65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).14 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7

6 45

Maintenance

86 - Load Index, a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this sectionfor additional information.

Wheel size designation Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:5.5JX14

5.5 - Rim width in inches.J - Rim contour designation.14 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger cars. The speedrating is part of the tire size designa-tion on the sidewall of the tire. Thissymbol corresponds to that tire'sdesigned maximum safe operatingspeed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : TireIdentification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years, basedon the manufacturing date, tirestrength and performance, declinewith age naturally (even unusedspare tires). Therefore, the tires(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOOThe front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1605 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2005.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)T 118 mph (190 km/h)H 130 mph (210 km/h)V 149 mph (240 km/h)Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol

Maintenance

466

4. Tire ply composition and mate-rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric are in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading The following information relates tothe tire grading system developed bythe National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) for gradingtires by tread wear, traction and tem-perature performance.

Tread wearThe tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use. However, performancemay differ from the norm because ofvariations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicle tires.The tires available as standard oroptional equipment on Hyundai vehi-cles may vary with respect to grade.

WARNING - Tire ageA tire more than 6 years old maysustain separation of cord lay-ers inside the tire. Tire failure toseparation of cord, can causeaccidents resulting in severeinjuries or death.Make sure to check the manu-facturing date of the tire andreplace it within 6 years of thatdate.

6 47

Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thegrades represent the tires ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.Temperature -A, B & C The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C. The grades repre-sent the tire’s resistance to the gen-eration of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degen-erate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. Grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passen-ger vehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades A and Brepresent higher levels of perform-ance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by the law.

Tire terminology and defini-tionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward onthe tire. Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmis-sion, power seats, and air condition-ing.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

WARNING - Tire temperature

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible suddentire failure. This can cause lossof vehicle control and seriousinjury or death.

Maintenance

486

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascals (kPa) before a tire has builtup heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.DOT Markings: A code molded intothe sidewall of a tire signifying thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation motorvehicle safety standards. The DOTcode includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for thattire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 150pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The outwardfacing sidewall bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings onthe inner facing sidewall.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seat-ed.Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

6 49

Maintenance

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called "wearbars," that show across the tread of atire when only 2/32 inch of treadremains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tire due tocurb and accessory weight plusmaximum occupant and cargoweight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good per-formance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires Hyundai specifies summer tires onsome models to provide superiorperformance on dry roads. Summertire performance is substantiallyreduced in snow and ice. Summertires do not have the tire traction rat-ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tireside wall. if you plan to operate yourvehicle in snowy or icy conditions.Hyundai recommends the use ofsnow tires or all season tires on allfour wheels.

Maintenance

506

Snow tiresIf you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28kPa) more air pressure than thepressure recommended for the stan-dard tires on the tire label on the dri-ver's side of the center pillar, or up tothe maximum pressure shown on thetire sidewall, whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

Tire chainsTire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the drive wheels (frontwheel).Be sure that the chains are installedin accordance with the manufactur-er's instructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, donot continue to use tire chains whenthey are no longer needed.

WARNING - Snow or ice • When driving on roads cov-

ered with snow or ice, drive atless than 20 mph (30 km/h).

• Use the SAE “S” class or wirechains.

• If you have noise caused bychains contacting the body,retighten the chain to avoidcontact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,retighten the chains after driv-ing 0.3~0.6 miles.

• Do not use tire chains on vehi-cles equipped with aluminumwheels. In unavoidable cir-cumstance, use a wire typechain.

• Use wire chains less than15mm to prevent damage tothe chain’s connection.

CAUTION• If you hear noise caused by

chains contacting the body,retighten the chain to avoidcontact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,retighten the chains after driv-ing 0.3 ~ 0.6 miles (0.5 ~ 1.0 km).

6 51

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS REPLACEMENT

Use only the bulbs of the specifiedwattage.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter driving in heavy rain or washing,headlight and taillight lenses couldappear frosty. This condition is caused bythe temperature difference between thelamp inside and outside. This is similarto the condensation on your windowsinside your vehicle during the rain anddoesn’t indicate a problem with yourvehicle. If the water leaks into the lampbulb circuitry, have the vehicle checkedby an Authorized Hyundai Dealer.

Headlight aiming adjustmentTo performing aiming adjustment, openthe engine hood and find the access holein grille guard assembly for vertical head-light adjustment.

WARNING - Working onthe lights

Prior to working on the light, firmlyapply the parking brake, ensure thatthe ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK” position and turn off thelights to avoid sudden movement ofthe vehicle and burning your fin-gers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTIONBe sure to replace the burned-outbulb with one of the same wattagerating. Otherwise, it may causedamage to the fuse or electricwiring system.

CAUTIONIf you don’t have necessary tools,the correct bulbs and the expertise,consult an Authorized HyundaiDealer. In many cases, it is difficultto replace vehicle light bulbsbecause other parts of the vehiclemust be removed before you canget to the bulb. This is especiallytrue if you have to remove the head-light assembly to get to the bulb(s).Removing/installing the headlightassembly can result in damage tothe vehicle.

OVQ036901N

Maintenance

526

Headlight bulb (1) Headlight (High)(2) Headlight (Low)(3) Position light/Front turn signal light(4) Front side mark light(5) Front fog light (if equipped)

1. Open the hood and loosen the fasten-er on the radiator grill cover.

1LDA7048

WARNING - Halogen bulbs• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-

ized gas that will produce flyingpieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully,and avoid scratches and abra-sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoidcontact with liquids. Never touchthe glass with bare hands.Residual oil may cause the bulbto overheat and burst when lit. Abulb should be operated onlywhen installed in a headlight.

• If a bulb becomes damaged orcracked, replace it immediatelyand carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when chang-ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cooldown before handling it.

OEP066019OVQ056003

6 53

Maintenance

2. Loosen the retaining bolts and removethe headlight assembly from the bodyof the vehicle.

3. Remove the headlight bulb cover byturning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-connector.

5. Unsnap the headlight bulb retainingwire by depressing the end and push-ing it upward.

6. Remove the bulb from the headlightassembly.

7. Install a new headlight bulb and snapthe headlight bulb retaining wire intoposition by aligning the wire with thegroove on the bulb.

8. Connect the headlight bulb socket-connector.

9. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-ing it clockwise.

10. Reinstall the headlight assembly tothe body of the vehicle.

Position/Turn signal light bulb1. Open the hood.2. Loosen the retaining bolts and remove

the headlight assembly from the bodyof the vehicle.

3. Remove the socket from the assemblyby turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on thesocket align with the slots on theassembly.

1VQA5034 OEP056024 OEP056025

Maintenance

546

4. Remove the bulb from the socket bypressing it in and rotating it until thetabs on the bulb align with the slots inthe socket. Pull the bulb out of thesocket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it intothe socket and rotating it until it locksinto place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly byaligning the tabs on the socket with theslots in the assembly. Insert the socketinto the assembly and turn the socketclockwise.

7. Reinstall the headlight assembly to thebody of the vehicle.

Front side mark light bulb1. Open the hood.2. Loosen the retaining bolts and remove

the headlight assembly from the bodyof the vehicle.

3. Remove the socket from the assemblyby turning the socket counterclockwiseuntil the tabs on the socket align withthe slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.5. Install a new bulb in the socket.6. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with theslots in the assembly. Insert the socketinto the assembly and turn the socketclockwise.

7. Reinstall the headlight assembly to thebody of the vehicle.

Front fog light bulbIf the light bulb is not operating, havethe vehicle checked by an authorizedHyundai Dealer.

OEP056026

6 55

Maintenance

Interior lights bulb replacement1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently

pry the lens from the interior lighthousing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straightout.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap thelens into place.

1VQA5046

OVQ066020N

Tailgate lamp

Glove box lamp1VQA5043

1VQA5044

Front map lamp

Center/rear dome lamp

Center dome lamp (if equipped)

1VQA50501VQA5045

Door courtesy lamp • Front • Rear

WARNING Prior to working on the InteriorLights, ensure that the “OFF” but-ton is depressed to avoid burningyour fingers or receiving an electricshock.

Maintenance

566

License plate lights bulb 1. Loosen the lens retaining screws with

a cross-tip screwdriver.2. Remove the lens.3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.4. Install a new bulb.5. Reinstall the lens securely with the

lens retaining screws.

Rear combination light bulb (1) Stop and tail light(2) Back-up light(3) Rear turn signal light

1. Open the tailgate.2. Loosen the light assembly retaining

screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.

1VQA5048 OEP056037 1VQA5038

6 57

Maintenance

3. Remove the rear combination lightassembly from the body of the vehicle.

4. Remove the socket from the assemblyby turning the socket counterclockwiseuntil the tabs on the socket align withthe slots on the assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket bypressing it in and rotating it until thetabs on the bulb align with the slots inthe socket. Pull the bulb out of thesocket.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it intothe socket and rotating it until it locksinto place.

7. Install the socket in the assembly byaligning the tabs on the socket with theslots in the assembly. Push the socketinto the assembly and turn the socketclockwise.

8. Replace the service cover and tightenthe screws.

1VQA5039 OEP066041 OEP066042

Maintenance

586

High mounted stop light bulbreplacementIf the light bulb is not operating, have thevehicle checked by an authorizedHyundai Dealer.

OEP056042

6 59

Maintenance

LUBRICANTRecommended lubricants To help achieve proper engine and pow-ertrain performance and durability, useonly lubricants of the proper quality. Thecorrect lubricants also help promoteengine efficiency that results in improvedfuel economy.Engine oils labeled Energy ConservingOil are now available. Along with otheradditional benefits, they contribute to fueleconomy by reducing the amount of fuelnecessary to overcome engine friction.Often, these improvements are difficult tomeasure in everyday driving, but in ayear’s time, they can offer significant costand energy savings.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

*¹ Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

Lubricant Classification

API Service SJ, SL or above,

ILSAC GF-3 or above

(SAE 5W-20, 5W-30)

HYUNDAI GEUINE ATF SP-III, DIAMOND ATF

Automatic transaxle fluidSP-III, SK ATF SP-III or other brands meeting the SP-III specification approved by Hyundai Motors Corp.

Power steering fluid PSF-3

Brake fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3, DOT-4 or Equivalent

Engine oil *¹

<Recommends>

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

This product contains a chemicalknown to the State of California tocause cancer. Used engine oil maycause irritation or cancer of theskin if left in contact with the skinfor prolonged periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicals thathave caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skinby washing your hands thoroughlywith soap and warm water as soonas possible after handling used oil.

Maintenance

606

Recommended SAE viscositynumber

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has aneffect on fuel economy and cold weatheroperating (starting and oil flow). Lowerviscosity engine oils can provide betterfuel economy and cold weather perform-ance, however, higher viscosity engineoils are required for satisfactory lubrica-tion in hot weather. Using oils of any vis-cosity other than those recommendedcould result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the rangeof temperature your vehicle will be oper-ated in before the next oil change.Proceed to select the recommended oilviscosity from the chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Gasoline Engine Oil *1

°C(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 (API SJ, SL / ILSAC GF-3). However, if the engine oil is not available in your coun-try, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

CAUTIONAlways be sure to clean the areaaround any filler plug, drain plug, ordipstick before checking or drain-ing any lubricant. This is especiallyimportant in dusty or sandy areasand when the vehicle is used onunpaved roads. Cleaning the plugand dipstick areas will prevent dirtand grit from entering the engineand other mechanisms that couldbe damaged.

6 61

Maintenance

CORROSION PROTECTIONProtecting your Hyundai fromcorrosionBy using the most advanced design andconstruction practices to combat corro-sion, Hyundai produces cars of the high-est quality. However, this is only part ofthe job. To achieve the long-term corro-sion resistance your Hyundai can deliver,the owner's cooperation and assistanceis also required.

Common causes of corrosionThe most common causes of corrosionon your car are:• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath thecar.

• Removal of paint or protective coatingsby stones, gravel, abrasion or minorscrapes and dents which leave unpro-tected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areasIf you live in an area where your car isregularly exposed to corrosive materials,corrosion protection is particularly impor-tant. Some of the common causes ofaccelerated corrosion are road salts,dust control chemicals, ocean air andindustrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosionMoisture creates the conditions in whichcorrosion is most likely to occur. Forexample, corrosion is accelerated byhigh humidity, particularly when tempera-tures are just above freezing. In suchconditions, the corrosive material is keptin contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it isslow to dry and holds moisture in contactwith the vehicle. Although the mudappears to be dry, it can still retain themoisture and promote corrosion.High temperatures can also acceleratecorrosion of parts that are not properlyventilated so the moisture can be dis-persed. For all these reasons, it is par-ticularly important to keep your car cleanand free of mud or accumulations ofother materials. This applies not only tothe visible surfaces but particularly to theunderside of the car.

Maintenance

626

To help prevent corrosionYou can help prevent corrosion from get-ting started by observing the following:

Keep your car cleanThe best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your car clean and free of corrosivematerials. Attention to the underside ofthe car is particularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area —where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollution,acid rain, etc.—, you should take extracare to prevent corrosion. In winter,hose off the underside of your car atleast once a month and be sure toclean the underside thoroughly whenwinter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the car,give particular attention to the compo-nents under the fenders and otherareas that are hidden from view. Do athorough job; just dampening the accu-mulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion ratherthan prevent it. Water under high pres-sure and steam are particularly effec-tive in removing accumulated mud andcorrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members, besure that drain holes are kept open sothat moisture can escape and not betrapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dryDon't park your car in a damp, poorlyventilated garage. This creates a favor-able environment for corrosion. This isparticularly true if you wash your car inthe garage or drive it into the garagewhen it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage cancontribute to corrosion unless it is wellventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condi-tionScratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon aspossible to reduce the possibility of cor-rosion. If bare metal is showing through,the attention of a qualified body and paintshop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-ly corrosive and may damage paintedsurfaces in just a few hours. Alwaysremove bird droppings as soon as possi-ble.

Don't neglect the interiorMoisture can collect under the floor matsand carpeting to cause corrosion. Checkunder the mats periodically to be surethe carpeting is dry. Use particular care ifyou carry fertilizers, cleaning materials orchemicals in the car.These should be carried only in propercontainers and any spills or leaks shouldbe cleaned up, flushed with clean waterand thoroughly dried.

6 63

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CAREExterior care Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warning andcaution statements that appear on thelabel.

Finish maintenanceWashing To help protect your vehicle’s finish fromrust and deterioration, wash it thoroughlyand frequently at least once a month withlukewarm or cold water.If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-ing, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to theremoval of any accumulation of salt, dirt,mud, and other foreign materials. Makesure the drain holes in the lower edges ofthe doors and rocker panels are keptclear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similar depositscan damage your vehicle’s finish if notremoved immediately.Even prompt washing with plain watermay not completely remove all thesedeposits. A mild soap, safe for use onpainted surfaces, may be used.After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Donot allow soap to dry on the finish.

WARNING - Wet brakesAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

CAUTIONDo not use strong soap, chemicaldetergents or hot water, and do notwash the vehicle in direct sunlightor when the body of the vehicle iswarm.

CAUTION• Water washing in the engine com-

partment may cause the failure ofelectrical circuits located in theengine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquidsto come in contact with electri-cal/electronic components insidethe vehicle as this may damagethem.

Maintenance

646

WaxingWax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.Always wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing. Use a good quality liquid orpaste wax, and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions. Wax all metal trim to protectit and to maintain its luster.Removing oil, tar, and similar materialswith a spot remover will usually strip thewax from the finish. Be sure to re-waxthese areas even if the rest of the vehicledoes not yet need waxing.

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quickly rustand may develop into a major repairexpense.

✽✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged and requiresany metal repair or replacement, be surethe body shop applies anti-corrosionmaterials to the parts repaired orreplaced.

Bright-metal maintenance• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or othersharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metalparts from corrosion, apply a coating ofwax or chrome preservative and rub toa high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal parts witha heavier coating of wax or preserva-tive. If necessary, coat the parts withnon-corrosive petroleum jelly or otherprotective compound.

Underbody maintenanceCorrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal and dust control may col-lect on the underbody. If these materialsare not removed, accelerated rusting canoccur on underbody parts such as thefuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaustsystem, even though they have beentreated with rust protection.Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbodyand wheel openings with lukewarm orcold water once a month at the end ofeach winter. Pay special attention tothese areas because it is difficult to seeall the mud and dirt. It will do more harmthan good to wet down the road grimewithout removing it. The lower edges ofdoors, rocker panels, and frame mem-bers have drain holes that should not beallowed to clog with dirt; trapped water inthese areas can cause rusting.

CAUTION• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch thefinish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, or strong detergentscontaining highly alkaline orcaustic agents on chrome-platedor anodized aluminum parts. Thismay result in damage to the pro-tective coating and cause discol-oration or paint deterioration.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

6 65

Maintenance

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with aclear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wirebrushes on aluminum wheels. Theymay scratch or damage the finish.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.Also, be sure to clean the wheels afterdriving on salted roads. This helps pre-vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any acid detergent. It maydamage and corrode the aluminumwheels coated with a clear protectivefinish.

Interior care Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such as per-fume and cosmetic oil from contactingthe dashboard because they may causedamage or discoloration. If they do con-tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-diately. See the instructions that follow forthe proper way to clean vinyl.

Cleaning the upholstery and interiortrim Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt from vinylwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fabricwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean with a mild soap solution recom-mended for upholstery or carpets.Remove fresh spots immediately with afabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do notreceive immediate attention, the fabriccan be stained and its color can beaffected. Also, its fire-resistant propertiescan be reduced if the material is notproperly maintained.

CAUTIONNever allow water or other liquidsto come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside thevehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTIONUsing anything but recommendedcleaners and procedures may affectthe fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Maintenance

666

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-bing Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-tions provided with the soap. Do notbleach or re-dye the webbing becausethis may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-cle become fogged (that is, covered withan oily, greasy or waxy film), they shouldbe cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow thedirections on the glass cleaner container.

The emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warranty infor-mation contained in the Owner’sHandbook & Warranty Information book-let in your vehicle.Your Hyundai is equipped with an emis-sion control system to meet all emissionregulations.There are three emission control sys-tems which are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function ofthe emission control systems, it is rec-ommended that you have your carinspected and maintained by an author-ized Hyundai dealer in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in this manu-al.

Caution for the Inspection andMaintenance Test (With ElectronicStability Control (ESC) system)• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing,turn the Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system off by pressing theESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is com-pleted, turn the ESC system back onby pressing the ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase emission controlsystem

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-tem is employed to prevent air pollutioncaused by blow-by gases being emittedfrom the crankcase. This system suppliesfresh filtered air to the crankcase throughthe air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,which then pass through the PCV valveinto the induction system.

CAUTIONDo not scrape or scratch the insideof the rear window. This may resultin damage to the rear windowdefroster grid.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

6 67

Maintenance

2. Evaporative emission control(including ORVR: OnboardRefueling Vapor Recovery)System

The Evaporative Emission ControlSystem is designed to prevent fuelvapors from escaping into the atmos-phere.(The ORVR system is designed to allowthe vapors from the fuel tank to beloaded into a canister while refueling atthe gas station, preventing the escape offuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

CanisterFuel vapors generated inside the fueltank are absorbed and stored in theonboard canister. When the engine isrunning, the fuel vapors absorbed in thecanister are drawn into the surge tankthrough the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)The purge control solenoid valve is con-trolled by the Engine Control Module(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-es so that evaporated fuel is not takeninto the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSVopens to introduce evaporated fuel to theengine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control System isa highly effective system which controlsexhaust emissions while maintaininggood vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your Hyundai could affectits performance, safety or durability andmay even violate governmental safetyand emissions regulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modificationmay not be covered under warranty.

Engine exhaust gas precautions (car-bon monoxide) • Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if yousmell exhaust fumes of any kind insideyour vehicle, have it inspected andrepaired immediately. If you ever sus-pect exhaust fumes are coming intoyour vehicle, drive it only with all thewindows fully open. Have your vehiclechecked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - ExhaustEngine exhaust gases contain car-bon monoxide (CO). Though color-less and odorless, it is dangerousand could be lethal if inhaled.Follow the instructions following toavoid CO poisoning.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide varietyof automobile components andparts, including components foundin the interior furnishings in a vehi-cle, contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects andreproductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of componentwear contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm.

Maintenance

686

• Do not operate the engine in confinedor closed areas (such as garages) anymore than what is necessary to movethe vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a short timewith the engine running, adjust theventilation system (as needed) to drawoutside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-cle for any extended time with theengine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,excessive attempts to re-start theengine may cause damage to theemission control system.

Operating precautions for catalyt-ic converters

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter emission control device.Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-

line engine.• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, suchas misfire or a noticeable loss of per-formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.Examples of misuse are coasting withthe ignition off and descending steepgrades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idlespeed for extended periods (5 minutesor more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any partof the engine or emission control sys-tem. All inspections and adjustmentsmust be made by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.If you run out of gasoline, it couldcause the engine to misfire and resultin excessive loading of the catalyticconverter.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyticconverter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could void yourwarranties.

WARNING - FireA hot exhaust system can igniteflammable items under your vehi-cle. Do not park the vehicle over ornear flammable objects, such asgrass, vegetation, paper, leaves,etc.

7

Label information / 7-2Warranties for your Hyundai vehicle / 7-3Consumer information / 7-4Reporting safety defects / 7-5Binding arbitration (U.S.A only) / 7-5



27

LABEL INFORMATION There are several important labels andidentification numbers located on yourvehicle. The label locations are identifiedin the illustrations shown.

Vehicle identification number(VIN) The vehicle identification number (VIN) isthe number used in registering your carand in all legal matters pertaining to itsownership, etc.

OVQ076001N

OVQ066023N

OVQ076002N

Frame number

Identification label (if equipped)

VIN (if equipped)

7 3


Tire specification / pressure labelTire label located on the driver's side ofthe center pillar outer panel gives thecold tire pressures recommended foryour vehicle with the original tire size, thenumber of people that can be in yourvehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

Engine numberThe engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.

Please consult your Owner'sHandbook & Warranty Informationbooklet for your vehicle's specificwarranty coverage.


WARRANTIES FOR YOURHYUNDAI VEHICLE


47

CONSUMER INFORMATIONThis consumer information has been pre-pared in accordance with regulationsissued by the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration of the U.S.Department of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospective pur-chasers of Hyundai automobiles withinformation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Hyundai dealer will help answerany questions you may have as you readthis information.

Hyundai motor vehicles are designedand manufactured to meet or exceed allapplicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we stronglyurge you to read and follow all directionsin this Owner's Manual, particularly theinformation under the headings"NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING".

If, after reading this manual, you haveany questions regarding the operation ofyour vehicle, please contact your nearestHyundai Motor America Regional Officeas listed following:

Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, NewHampshire, New Jersey, New York,Pennsylvanina, Rhode Island, Vermont,Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia,North Carolina, South Carolina.

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama,Arkansas, Colorado, Kansas, Louisiana,Mississippi, Missouri, New Mexico,Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas, Wyoming.

South Central Region1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota,Ohio, Wisconsin.

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii,Arizona, California, ldaho, Montana,Nevada, Oregon, Texas, Utah,Washington.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151

7 5


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSIf you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA. If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, orHYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, DC 20590. Youcan also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Any claim or dispute you may have relat-ed to your vehicle's warranty or the dutiescontemplated under the warranty, includ-ing claims related to the refund or partialrefund of your vehicle's purchase price(excluding personal injury or product lia-bility claims), shall be resolved by bindingarbitration. Binding arbitration shall beadministered by and through the NationalArbitration Forum (NAF) or the AmericanArbitration Association (AAA), under theCode of Procedure of the entity youselect.You will not be responsible for paying fil-ing and hearing fees above $275.00. Allother arbitration costs shall be borne byHyundai Motor America. You are notresponsible to pay any of the costsHyundai incurs.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallnot deprive you of any remedies avail-able to you under applicable law. Theparties are waiving their right to seekremedies in court, including the right to ajury trial.

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallbe governed by and interpreted underthe Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. sec-tions 1-16. Judgment upon any awardmay be entered in any court having juris-diction.You may revoke this ArbitrationAgreement by (1) written notice or (2)electronic notice. Written notice must bedelivered (via certified mail) to HyundaiMotor America, Attn: Consumer Affairs,10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box 20849,Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.Electronic notice must be submitted atthe following website address: http://war-ranty-arbitrat ion.hyundaiUSA.com.Notice must be received within 90 daysafter you purchase your vehicle.

BINDING ARBITRATION (U.S.A ONLY)

8

Dimensions / 8-2Bulb wattage / 8-2Tires / 8-3Capacities / 8-3

Specifications

Specifications

28

Item in (mm)

Overall length 202.0 (5130)

Overall width 78.1 (1985)*1 / 76.4 (1940)

Overall height 71.5 (1815)*2 / 69.3 (1760)

Front tread 66.3 (1685)

Rear tread 66.3 (1685)

Wheelbase 118.9 (3020)

DIMENSIONS

*1 With door handle *2 With roof rack

Light Bulb WattageHeadlights (Low) 55Headlights (High) 55Front turn signal/Position lights 28/8 (Amber)Side mark lights 5Front fog lights 51Stop and tail lights 27/8Rear turn signal lights 27 (Amber)Back-up lights 16High mounted stop light LED *1

License plate lights 5Front map lamps 10Center dome lamps 10Tailgate lamp 10Door courtesy lamps 5Glove box lamp 5Vanity mirror lamps 3

BULB WATTAGE

*1 LED : Light-emitting diode

8 3

Specifications

Inflation pressure

psi (kPa)

Front Rear

225/70R16 102T 6.5J×16 35 35

235/60R17 102T 6.5J×17 (240) (240)

T135/90R17 104M 4.0T×1760 60

(420) (420)

Full size tire

Compactspare tire

Wheel lug nut torque lb•ft

(kg•m, N•m)

65~79

(9~11 , 88~107)

TIRES

ItemTire

sizeWheel size

CAPACITIESLubricant Volume Classification

5.91 US qt.(5.6 l)

Automatic transaxle fluid11.52 US qt.

(10.9 l)

Power steering 1.06 US qt. (1.0 l) PSF-3

Coolant 9.09 US qt. (8.6 l) Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

Brake fluid0.7~0.8 US qt.

FMVSS116 DOT-3, DOT-4 or Equivalent(0.7~0.8 l )

Fuel 21.1 US gal. (80 l) -

Engine oil *1 (with filter change)

<Recommends>

API Service SJ, SL or above, ILSAC GF-3 or above(SAE 5W-20, 5W-30)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP-III, DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III or otherbrands meeting the SP-III specification approved by Hyundai Motors Corp.

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the page 6-59.

9Index

Index

29

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system ······ 3-78Driver's and passenger's front air bag ······················ 3-79SRS components and functions ······························· 3-83Occupant classification system ································ 3-86Side impact air bag ··················································· 3-91Curtain air bag ·························································· 3-93SRS care ··································································· 3-94Air bag warning label ············································· 3-101

Air cleaner ··································································· 6-15Antenna ······································································ 3-180Appearance care ·························································· 6-63Audio remote control ················································· 3-181Audio system ····························································· 3-182

M445 ······································································ 3-185M455 ······································································ 3-191M465 ······································································ 3-201

Automatic climate control system ····························· 3-149Air conditioning button ·········································· 3-155Heating and ventilation (front) ······························· 3-150Heating and ventilation (rear) ································ 3-157

Automatic transaxle ······················································· 4-7Ignition key interlock system ··································· 4-13Automatic transaxle operation ··································· 4-8Transaxle ranges ························································· 4-9Sports mode ······························································ 4-10Shift lock system ······················································ 4-12

Automatic transaxle ····················································· 6-17

Back warning system ··················································· 4-25Battery ········································································· 6-35Before driving ································································ 4-3Biding arbitration (U.S.A only) ····································· 7-5Brake system ······························································· 4-17

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ································· 4-20Parking brake ··························································· 4-19Power brakes ···························································· 4-17

Brakes ·········································································· 6-19Bulb wattage ·································································· 8-2

Capacities ······································································· 8-3Child restraint system ·················································· 3-71

Tether anchor system ··············································· 3-73Child seat lower anchors ·········································· 3-74Placing a passenger seat belt into the auto lock mode ········································································· 3-75

Climate control air filter ·············································· 6-22Consumer assistance ······················································ 7-4Corrosion protection ···················································· 6-61Cruise control system ·················································· 4-14

Defroster ···································································· 3-136Dimensions ···································································· 8-2Door locks ···································································· 3-11

A B

C

D

9 3

Index

Central door lock switch ·········································· 3-13Child-protector rear door lock ································· 3-15Tailgate ····································································· 3-15

Driver position memory system ·································· 3-56

Economical operation ·················································· 4-29Electronic stability control (ESC) ······························· 4-22Emergency starting ························································ 5-3Emission control system ·············································· 6-66Engine compartment ···················································· 6-11Engine coolant ····························································· 6-13Engine exhaust can be dangerous! ································ 4-2Engine oil ····································································· 6-12Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ··············· 6-7

Fuel filler lid ································································ 3-30Fuel requirements ·························································· 1-2Fuses ············································································ 6-26

Gauges ······································································· 3-110Engine temperature gauge ······································ 3-109Fuel gauge ······························································ 3-112Instrument panel illumination ································ 3-112 Odometer/Trip odometer ········································ 3-110Speedometer ··························································· 3-110

Tachometer ····························································· 3-111Good braking practices ················································ 4-28

Hazard warning flasher ············································· 3-137Homelink® wireless control system ························· 3-167Hood ············································································ 3-29Horn ··········································································· 3-135How to use this manual ················································· 1-2

If the engine overheats ·················································· 5-5If the engine will not start ············································· 5-2If you have a flat tire ··················································· 5-10

Carrying a flat tire ···················································· 5-17Changing tires ·························································· 5-13Removing the spare tire ··········································· 5-10Storing the spare tire ················································ 5-11Important - use of compact spare tire ······················ 5-12

Immobilizer system ······················································· 3-9Instrument cluster ······················································ 3-109Instrument panel overview ············································ 2-3Interior features ························································· 3-175

Ashtray ··································································· 3-175Cigarette lighter ······················································ 3-175Clothes hanger ························································ 3-178Cup holder ······························································ 3-176Digital clock ··························································· 3-180Power outlet ··························································· 3-179

E

F

G

H

I

Index

49

Shopping bag holder ·············································· 3-177Sunvisor ·································································· 3-178

Interior lights ····························································· 3-125Interior overview ··························································· 2-2

Key positions ································································· 4-5Illuminated ignition switch ········································ 4-5

Keys ··············································································· 3-3

Label information ·························································· 7-2Light bulbs replacement ·············································· 6-51Lighting ····································································· 3-128Lubricant ······································································ 6-59Lubricants and fluids ··················································· 6-20Luggage net holder ···················································· 3-165

Maintenance services ····················································· 6-2Manual climate control system ································· 3-138

Air conditioning button ·········································· 3-143Heating and ventilation (front) ······························· 3-139Heating and ventilation (rear) ································ 3-144

Mirrors ······································································· 3-104

Owner maintenance ······················································· 6-9

Power adjustable pedals ·············································· 3-58Power sliding door and power tailgate ························ 3-17

Power ON/OFF button ············································· 3-20Power sliding door operation ··································· 3-21Power tailgate operation ··········································· 3-24

Power steering ····························································· 6-21

Rear seat entertainment system / DVD player ·········· 3-212Headphones ···························································· 3-213Audio via vehicle speakers ···································· 3-214Connecting other devices to the RSE ···················· 3-215Using the DVD player ··········································· 3-216Using the CD player ··············································· 3-220Using the remote control ········································ 3-225

Remote keyless entry ····················································· 3-4Reporting safety defects ················································ 7-5Road warning ································································· 5-2Roof rack ··································································· 3-166

Scheduled maintenance service ····································· 6-2Seat ·············································································· 3-37

M

S

O

P

R

K

L

9 5

Index

Armrest ····································································· 3-44Headrest ···································································· 3-42Front seat adjustment - manual ································ 3-39Front seat adjustment - power ·································· 3-40Lumbar support ························································ 3-45Rear seat adjustment ················································ 3-46Seatback pocket ························································ 3-44Seat warmer ······························································ 3-45

Seat belts ······································································ 3-59Seat belt precautions ················································ 3-59Care of seat belts ······················································ 3-61Height adjustable shoulder belts ······························ 3-62Driver's 3-point system ············································ 3-62Passenger's 3-point system ······································· 3-633-point rear center belt ············································· 3-65Proper use and care of the seat belt system ············· 3-67Pre-tensioner safety belt ··········································· 3-68

Special driving conditions ··········································· 4-30Starting the engine ························································· 4-6Steering wheel ··························································· 3-102Storage compartments ··············································· 3-171

Center console storage ··········································· 3-172Glove box ······························································· 3-173Side table ································································ 3-174Sunglass holder ······················································ 3-174

Sunroof ········································································ 3-33

Theft-alarm system ························································ 3-7Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ····················· 5-6

Tires ··············································································· 8-3Tires and wheels ·························································· 6-37Towing ········································································· 5-19

Tie-down hook ························································· 5-22Trailer towing ······························································ 4-34

Hitches ······································································ 4-35Safety chains ···························································· 4-35Trailer brakes ···························································· 4-35Weight of the trailer (tongue) ··································· 4-39

Trip computer ···························································· 3-113

Vehicle break-in process ················································ 1-3Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ·········· 1-4Vehicle load limit ························································· 4-41

Compliance label ······················································ 4-43Tire and loading information label ·························· 4-41Vehicle capacity weight ··········································· 4-41Seating capacity ······················································· 4-41Towing capacity ······················································· 4-41Cargo capacity ·························································· 4-41

Warnings and indicators ············································ 3-119Warranties for your Hyundai vehicle ···························· 7-3Weight of the vehicle ··················································· 4-40Window ········································································ 3-26

Rear quarter window (manual flip - open) ·············· 3-28Power window lock switch ······································ 3-28

V

W

T

Index

69

Windshield defrosting and defogging ······················· 3-162Automatic climate control system ························· 3-163Defogging logic ······················································ 3-164Manual climate control system ······························ 3-162

Winter driving ······························································ 4-32Snow tires ································································· 4-32Tire chains ································································ 4-32

Wiper blades ································································ 6-24Wipers and washers ··················································· 3-132

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S INFORMATION

ORIGINAL OWNER _____________________________________________________

ADDRESS

CITY _________________ STATE ___________ ZIP CODE _____________________

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail Purchaser)

DEALER NAME _______________ DEALER NO. _____________________________

ADDRESS ____________________________________________________________

CITY _________________ STATE ___________ ZIP CODE _____________________

please consult your owner's handbook & warranty...

Documents